DECREE OF

THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY

NUMBER : 555.K/26/M.PE/1995
ON

GENERAL MINING OCCUPATIONAL

SAFETY AND HEALTH

TECHNICAL DIRECTORATE OF MINES

THE DIRECTORATE GENERAL OF MINES
1995

1
 FOREWORD

In an effort to refine and complement legislative regulations in mining, the Decree of the
Minister of Mines and Energy No. 555.K/26/M.PE/1995 was published on May 22, 1995
on Occupational Safety and Health. The regulations on occupational safety and health
prevailing previous thereto were Mijn Politie Reglement (MPR) Number 341 published
in 1930.

These occupational safety and health regulations are formulated to be capable of

anticipating any progress in the field of mining in Indonesia at this time as well as in the
future. These regulations apart from being more up-to-date are also more complete as the
regulation for underground occupational safety and health has been covered in detail,
both in terms of coal and ore mines. These standards for occupational safety and health
also exceed the standards of the previous regulations and they are expected to be capable
of meeting practical demands in providing protection and instructions/information to all
workers in mining who face the problem of occupational safety and health.

The stipulations in these occupational safety and health regulations should be complied
with by any worker in mining operations to prevent the occurrence of any accident.

Jakarta, September 1995

DIRECTOR GENERAL OF MINES

signature/stamp

KUNTORO MANGKUSUBROTO

2
 CONTENTS

DECREE OF THE MINISTER OF MINING

AND ENERGY NUMBER : 555.K/26/M.PE/1995

CHAPTER I

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 9

PART ONE : INTERPRETATION 9

PART TWO : PROHIBITIONS ON THE
ENTRY TO MINING OPERATIONS REGION 16
PART THREE : MINING OPERATORS 16
PART FOUR : SURVEYORS AND MINE MAPS 23
PART FIVE : MINE BOOK 25
PART SIX : GUIDELINES TO MINE OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY AND HEALTH 26
PART SEVEN : MINE WORKERS 27
PART EIGHT : MINING FACILITIES 32
PART NINE : HEALTH TREATMENT AND FIRST AID 33
PART TEN : MINE ACCIDENTS AND DANGEROUS
OCCURRENCES 34
PART ELEVEN : HEALTH 40

CHAPTER II

EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING 41

PART ONE : THE EXPLOSIVES MAGAZINE 41

PART TWO : SURFACE MAGAZINES 43
PART THREE : UNDERGROUND MAGAZINES 52
PART FOUR : EXPLOSIVES STORAGE PROCEDURES 53
PART FIVE : TRANSPORTATION 59
PART SIX : BLASTING ACTIVITIES 60

3
 CHAPTER III

WORKING ENVIRONMENT 64

PART ONE : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 64

PART TWO : DUST 64
PART THREE : NOISE AND VIBRATIONS 66
PART FOUR : HAZARDOUS AND NOXIOUS MATERIALS 67

CHAPTER IV

SURFACE MINE INFRASTRUCTURE 69

PART ONE : STRUCTURES, BUILDINGS AND

ACCESS WAYS AND EGRESS 69
PART TWO : LIGHTING 72
PART THREE : FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL 73
PART FOUR : TRANSPORTATION SAFETY 81
PART FIVE : WORKSHOPS AND FACTORIES 105
PART SIX : ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND
MACHINERY 114
PART SEVEN : LIQUID FUEL STORAGE 128

CHAPTER V

DRILLING 134

CHAPTER VI

SURFACE MINES 141

PART ONE : SAFE WORKING PROCEDURES 141

PART TWO : HYDRAULIC MINES 144
PART THREE : EARTH MOVING EQUIPMENT 146
PART FOUR : EVACUATION IN EMERGENCY SITUATIONS 150

4
 CHAPTER VII

DREDGES 151

PART ONE : PERSON IN CHARGE 151

PART TWO : PLACEMENT OF DREDGES 154
PART THREE : DREDGE PONTOONS 156
PART FOUR : INSPECTIONS 157
PART FIVE : DREDGE SAFETY 158
PART SIX : SAFETY EQUIPMENT 159
PART SEVEN : MACHINERY AND ELECTRICITY 162
PART EIGHT : SAFETY MEASURES 163
PART NINE : TOWING A MINE DREDGE 165
PART TEN : DOCKING OF MINING DREDGES 167
PART ELEVEN : AUXILIARY FACILITIES 167

CHAPTER VIII

UNDERGROUND ORE MINES 168

PART ONE : MINE ADMINISTRATION 168

PART TWO : MEANS OF EGRESS 173
PART THREE : SHAFTS AND HOISTING 176
PART FOUR : EMERGENCY SITUATIONS 189
PART FIVE : IN-RUSHES, EMISSIONS AND OUT BURSTS 192
PART SIX : GROUND CONTROL SUPPORT METHODS 194
PART SEVEN : PROTECTION AT WORK SITE 200
PART EIGHT : VENTILATION 202
PART NINE : UNDERGROUND DRAINAGE 211
PART TEN : TRANSPORTATION 213
PART ELEVEN : TRANSPORTATION BY CONVEYOR 227
PART TWELVE : RAISE CLIMBERS 232
PART THIRTEEN : UNDERGROUND MINE ELECTRICITY 234
PART FOURTEEN : LIGHTING 246
PART FIFTEEN : FIRE PREVENTION UNDERGROUND
AND RESCUE ARRANGEMENTS 249
PART SIXTEEN : WELFARE 262
PART SEVENTEEN : MANPOWER TRAINING AND SUPERVISION 267
PART EIGHTEEN : PROTECTION FROM NATURAL RADIATION 272

5
 CHAPTER IX

UNDERGROUND COAL MINES 276

PART ONE : GENERAL 276

PART TWO : PREVENTION OF COMBUSTIBLE GASES
AND DUST FROM IGNITING 281
PART THREE : VENTILATION IN GASSY MINES 290
PART FOUR : INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AT
WORK SITES 305
PART FIVE : TRAINING AND SUPERVISION OF
MANPOWER IN UNDERGROUND
COAL MINES 315

CHAPTER X

PENALTIES 316

CHAPTER XI

TRANSFER STIPULATIONS 317

CHAPTER XII

CLOSING STIPULATIONS 317

6
 DECREE OF
THE MINISTER OF MINING AND ENERGY

NUMBER : 555.K/26/M.PE/1995
ON

GENERAL MINING OCCUPATIONAL WORK HEALTH

AND SAFETY

TECHNICAL DIRECTORATE OF GENERAL MINING

THE DIRECTORATE GENERAL OF GENERAL MINING
1995

7
 THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY OF
THE REPUBLIC OF INDONESIA

DECREE OF THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY

NUMBER : 555.K/26/M.PE/1995

ON

MINES OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH

THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY

Considering : a. that in accordance with Government Regulation Number 19, Year 1973 the
regulation of safety and health in the field of mining is the authority of the Minister
of Mines and Energy;

b. that in accordance with the development of mining technology, not one of the safety
requirements in the field of mining as laid down in Min Polite Regiment (MPR)
1930 Number 341 can be maintained and must therefore be reviewed;

c. that given the very technical nature of Occupational safety and health regulations
entailing detailed rules requiring constant amendment in accordance with the
development of technology, provision of the regulation of Occupational safety and
health is sufficient in a Decree of the Minister of Mines and Energy.

Given : 1. Law Number 11, 1967 (Government Gazette 1967, Number 22, Addendum Number
2831);

2. Law Number 1, 1970 (Government Gazette 1970, Number 1 Addendum Number

2981);

3. Government Regulation Number 32, 1969 (Government Gazette 1969 Number 60,
Addendum 2916) as amended by Government Regulation Number 79, 1992
(Government Gazette 1992, Number 130, Addendum Number 3510);

4. Government Regulation Number 19, 1973 (Government Gazette 1973, Number 25

Addendum Number 3003);

5. Government Regulation Number 27, 1980 (Government Regulation, 1980 Number

47, Addendum Number 3174) and

6. Presidential Decree Number 96/M, 1993, March 17, 1993

DECIDES :

TO STIPULATE : DECREE OF THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY

ON MINES SAFETY AND HEALTH

8
 Chapter I
General Requirements

Part One
Article 1
Interpretation

Within this Ministerial Decree the following shall mean :

1. Mining Activities means any place of operation intended to or directly related to

general surveying, exploration, feasibility studies, construction, production or
exploitation operations, processing or refining, transporting or selling, a, b and c
class minerals including the supporting services and infrastructure located above
or below ground, whether on a single property or at remote locations.

2. Mining Company means any person or business granted the authority to carry out
a mining operation based on a Mining Authority and Contract of Work.

3. Mine means the location of any mining activity carried out in order to extract
minerals.

4. Surface Mining means any system of mining of minerals which is carried out on
the surface or from the surface of water.

5. Underground Mine means any system of mining to extract minerals which is

carried out below ground.

6. Technical Mine Manager means any person who is in charge of and who is
responsible for the implementation and compliance of occupational safety and
health regulations at the mine.

7. Mine Worker means any person who works directly at the mining operation.

8. Mining Accident means any accident causing injury to any mine worker or any
person permitted to enter the area of the mining activity.

9. Director General shall refer to the Director General of Mines.

10. Operator means the management of the company.

11. Mine Book means the record book of prohibitions, orders, and directives of the
Mine Inspector which must be kept by the Technical Mine Manager.

12. A Mine Inspector is a government authority supervising the implementation of

occupational safety and health in mines..

9
13. Project Area shall mean any place stipulated by the Director General or Provincial
Governor used for the mine facilities.

14. Explosives shall mean any chemical compound, mixture or device that is made,
manufactured, or used to produce an explosion by a sustained chemical reaction.
Explosives include black powder, nitro-glycerine, dynamite, gelatine, detonating
cords, safety fuses, detonators, ammonium nitrate, when mixed with
hydrocarbons and other blasting agents.

15. Detonator shall mean any device containing a detonating charge that is used to
initiate explosives and includes but is not limited to electric detonators, plain
detonators, non-electric detonators (none) or delay detonators.

16. Magazine shall mean any building or container with specific technical and safety
features for storing explosives.

17. Blaster means any person appointed by the mining company or the Technical
Mine Manager to carry out explosive work and who holds a current Blasting
License (KIM)

18. Blasting work shall consist of mixing explosives, making a primer, loading, and
stemming of blast holes, linking and connecting any explosion pattern, coupling a
shot-firing circuit to a detonator circuit, a circuit tester or blasting machine,
determining dangerous areas, ordering people to withdraw or shelter, and to take
cover, testing circuits, firing blast holes, handling misfires, and controlling the
impact of explosions such as fly-rock, ground vibrations, noise, and air blasts.

19. Blaster Trainee means any person approved by the Technical Mine Manager to
undergo blasting operations training under the close personal supervision of a
blaster.

20. Blasting means any single or series of blasts carried out as part of one blast.

21. Magazine safety distance means the minimum distance at which the magazine
must be separated from other magazines, buildings inhabited by people, railway
lines and public roads and which shall depend on the amount and type of
explosives stored.

22. Detonator sensitive explosive means any explosives that can be detonated by a
No. 8 blasting cap.

23. Primer sensitive explosives means any explosive that can only be detonated by
using a primer/booster charge together with a No. 8 blasting cap.

10
24. Explosive Ingredients means the standard materials which when mixed with
certain materials become primer sensitive explosives.

25. Main magazine means the magazine used as the storage facility for explosives the
location of which is not too far from the mine and from which explosives are used
for blasting.

26. Transit magazine means the magazine utilised as a temporary storage facility
prior to transportation to the main explosives magazine.

27. Temporary magazine means the magazine used during mining exploration work
or mining development.

28. Container means the explosives magazine in the form of a container made from
metal plate.

29. Combustible material means any material which ignites, burns, supports
combustion or releases combustible vapour when subject to fire or heat.

30. Combustible gas means gas which is capable of ignitions at the normal
concentration of oxygen in the air.

31. Flash point means the minimum temperature at which sufficient vapour is
released by a liquid to form a combustible vapour-air mixture near the surface of
the liquid.

32. Fire resistance rating means the time in minutes or hours that a material will
retain its protective characteristics and structure when exposed to fire.

33. Crane is any machinery or equipment operated mechanically, electrically or

hydraulically that is able to be used as a lifting apparatus including rail, railway or
other supplementary equipment, but not including raise climbers attached to a
mine shaft.

34. Chain block is any lifting apparatus, consisting of shackles, swivels, hooks,
slings, eyebolts, chains and fittings which is used to lift and includes the clips
used to secure the wire.

35. Workshop means any place or workroom used to carry out repairs, maintenance,
manufacturing, installation or testing of mining equipment and other technical
work that supports mining activities.

36. High voltage electricity shall mean an installation with more than 300 volts under
normal work conditions (250 volts in the underground circuit).

11
37. Bangka drill means any auger type drill fitted with casing and core recovery
effected by the platform which is assembled to the head of the casing. The
system for taking samples is operated by means of tamping from the platform.

38. Hydraulic Mine is one type of surface mine that uses water to dig and transport
materials to the washing installation.

39. Earth moving equipment means any mechanical equipment used to move top soil,
overburden and deposits of minerals during clearing, digging, and lifting and
removing operations, and includes bulldozers, shovels, draglines, scrapers and
bucket wheel excavators but does not include transport vehicles such as dump
trucks.

40. Mining dredge means a dredge used for mining, including boats used as support
facilities which is carried out on the surface of water, and shall hereafter be
known as dredge.

41. Head line means the mooring line attached to the bow of a dredge used to moor
the dredge.

42. Port and starboard line means the mooring line attached to the left and right sides
(respectively) of the dredge to moor the dredge.

43. Stern line means the cable attached to the rear of the dredge.

44. Anchor cable means a cable used to moor the dredge, i.e. head line, port,
starboard lines and stern lines.

45. Spill anchor means a chain anchor attached to the middle of the dredge.

46. Compartment / tank is the pontoon divided into water tight segments.

47. Pontoon is a closed compartment whose function is to make the dredge float.

48. Safety Hull means a series of small hulls designed to protect the main
compartment from collisions.

49. Ballast tanks means a compartment that can be filled with water to maintain the
balance of the dredge.

50. Man hole means the water tight hole in the deck used as an access way for
inspection and repair work of the compartments.
51. Current tripping device is a device whose function is to cut off electrical currents
including any automatic or manual switches.

12
52. Concentric cables means a cable whose outer conductor is entwined around the
insulation of the inner conductor.

53. Flexible Cable means a cable designed specifically to be flexible when used.

54. Metallic cable casing means the iron or steel cable encasing the cable.

55. Tripping means an automatic interruption of an electrical current which operates

mechanically or electrically.

56. Raise is any tunnel with an inclination above the horizontal greater than 15
degrees whose construction is carried out from bottom to top.

57. Winze is any tunnel with an inclination below the horizontal greater than 15
degrees whose construction is carried out from top to bottom.

58. In rush is the sudden and high speed flow of water or mud.

59. Emission is the sudden release of noxious or combustible gas from any place
other than an abandoned working site into any area of an underground mine
which causes the conditions of the mine air at the said area to exceed ventilation
requirements.

60. Out burst is a violent outburst of gas together with solid rock in the mine.

61. Rock burst means an outburst of rock fragments caused by excessive pressure
producing an accumulation of energy, which does not include outbursts or
emissions of pressured gas.

62. Hazardous area means any area below ground in a mine which is within 45 meters
(measured in any plane) of the surface, any disused working, any stratum
containing or likely to contain water, any material that flows or is likely to flow
when wet.

63. Main fan means a fan that controls the entire airflow of a mine.

64. Booster fan means a fan which is installed in a main airway or a district airway
for the purpose of boosting or increasing the quantity of air in that part of the
mine.

65. Auxiliary fan means a fan used to deliver air to work places off the main
airstream such as headings, drifts, and which usually makes use of ventilation
tubing.

13
66. Main intake airway means the main airway of incoming fresh air beginning at a
shaft or outlet. When an airway is split into two or more working areas, the
airways through which it passes are known as intake airways.

67. Main return airway means the main airway of out-coming used air ending at a
shaft or outlet. Airways in which the airflow is returning from two or more
working areas into the main return airway are called return airways.

68. Transport system means any system of transport which operates wholly or partly
underground (other than in a shaft) which carries men, materials or minerals.

69. Free Steered Vehicles means any powered vehicles not moving on tracks.

70. Rope Haulage System means any transport system where vehicles are attached to
and moved by a rope, driven by a stationary haulage engine whether mechanically
or gravity powered.

71. Raise climber means any powered machine or device using a pinion and fixed
rack system for traction and used as a working platform in the course of
excavating vertical or inclined raises. Raise climbers installed as permanent
means of transportation between fixed levels are not included.

72. Flame safety lamp means any lamp which is so protected or enclosed as to make
impossible the ignition of an atmosphere of combustible gas and dust outside the
lamp.

73. Firedamp or methane means any mixture of flammable gases naturally occurring
in a mine.

74. Combustible dust means any dust which when freely dispersed in air forms a
combustible mixture.

75. Venturi ventilation means apparatus used to induce airflow into a duct by means
of a jet of compressed air or water and includes all types of ejector or blowers but
shall not include any ejector or blower used in a firedamp drainage system.

76. Automatic Fire Damp Detector (AFD) means an approved device to continually
detect the presence of firedamp and to give a visual or audible alarm at a preset
level.

77. Firedamp monitoring system means an approved device to continuously detect the
presence of firedamp and to record the results at a location at the surface of the
mine or some other location as may be accepted by an inspector.

78. Bore hole means any hole drilled for the purpose of tapping firedamp and
draining it through firedamp drainage system.

14
79. Firedamp drainage is an activity in a mine carried out to collect the fire damp in a
mine prior to it being diluted and discharged from the mine.

80. Firedamp drainage system is a system for the drainage of firedamp excluding the
drainage of firedamp that accumulated behind road-side packs and merely
consists of a pipe to convey the firedamp to a point where it can be discharged.

81. Calorimeter room means a place at the surface used to monitor firedamp or the
heat levels thereof.

82. Armoured Flexible Conveyor (AFC) means conveyor equipment using a flexible
chain to convey coal from a working face when using a drum sheerer.

83. Bar means a girder or any form of cross support.

84. ‘Prop’ includes friction props of chocks.

85. Powered support means a support that works using hydraulic power or pneumatic
power.

86. Travelling roadway means any roadway used for the transportation of people
from and to the work site and includes any roadway intended to be used as a
secondary egress from the mine.

87. Roadway is any heading, cut-through, roadway between two pillars or road in the
room and pillar system or any road used for transportation.

88. Working face is the space between the excavation boundary and the nearest series
of supports installed when the said supports are parallel and systematically
withdrawn and or the space between the excavation boundary until a boundary up
to 3.5 meters from a mined out area when the supports are not systematically
withdrawn.

15
 Article 2
Scope
(1) This Ministerial Decree shall apply to all aspects of activities in mining
operations in the Mining Concession, Contract of Work, Work Agreement, area
or any other place designated as a project area by the Director General or
Provincial (Level I) Governor in accordance with the authority vested therein.

(2) The Chief Mine Inspector may grant exemption of the implementation of the
stipulations in this Ministerial Decree on the basis of such requests from the
operator or the Technical Mine Manager.

Part Two
Article 3
Prohibitions on the Entry to
Mining Operations Region
(1) It is prohibited to enter or be found within the region of any mining operation
apart from those who work therein or who are permitted.

(2) Those in possession of a permit to enter a mining operation region as required in

paragraph (1), shall be accompanied by the Technical Mine Manager or an
appointed employee who has full comprehension of the situation and conditions
of the area to be visited.

(3) Roads designated by the Technical Mine Manager shall be roads for specific use
of mining operations and where the public is granted the right of use thereof, the
safety for the use of the said right shall become his/her responsibility.

Part Three
Mining Operators

Article 4
Obligations

(1) The operator shall only commence mining activities after written notification has
been given to the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Within two weeks after one of the following activities, the operator shall send a
written report to the Chief Mine Inspector, namely:

a. commencement of exploration, excavation of any mine, and a new horizon or

seam at the coal level in an underground mine.

16
 b. commencement of a new shaft or outlet for any underground mine and

c. termination of activities or abandoning of any surface mine or any horizon or

seam at the coal level, shaft or outlet from any underground mine calculated
12 months from the date of the final activities, except where abandoned prior
thereto.

(3) The operator shall provide any equipment, fittings, protective equipment,
facilities and costs required for the implementation of these regulations.

(4) The operator shall supply free of charge any personal protective equipment
required in accordance with the type, nature and danger of the work carried out
thereby as well as for any person who enters the mining operation site.

(5) Based on the considerations of the Chief Mine Inspector, the operator shall
provide appropriate accommodation at or close to the mining operation for the
Mine Inspector for the duration of his/her duties.

(6) The operator shall provide full assistance to the Mine Inspector in the
implementation of his/her duties.

(7) The operator shall stop mining work, whenever the Technical Mine Manager or
appointed employee is not found on site.

Article 5
Appointment of the
Technical Mine Manager

(1) Exploration or new exploitation shall only be commenced after the holder of the
Mining Authority has appointed a Technical Mine Manager.

(2) The operator shall appoint a Technical Mine Manager and obtain the approval of
the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) The operator may submit an application to the Chief Mine Inspector to appoint
more than one Technical Mine Manager where it is considered necessary or based
on the specific considerations of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) The operator may submit an application to the Chief Mine Inspector to appoint
more than one deputy Technical Mine Manager where it is considered necessary
or based on the specific considerations of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) Implementation of the requirements of paragraph (3) and (4) shall be stipulated by
the Chief Mine Inspector.

17
(6) The Chief Mine Inspector may grant the Technical Mine Manager notice letters as
requested.

Article 6
Qualifications for the
Technical Mine Manager

Technical Mine Managers shall be grouped into four classifications in the following order :

a. Class III B;
b. Class III A;
c. Class II and
d. Class I

Article 7
Class III B Technical Mine Managers

Class III B Technical Mine Managers shall meet the following criteria :

a. mining systems : hydraulic mines, auger mines, open pit mines with single
benches, the use of explosives, water jet suction dredges, open pit coal mines
using a manual system or exploration stage mines without drifts and open pit
construction stage mines;
.
b. mining companies : individuals, co-operatives and private Indonesian companies
and

c. qualifications :
one of the following :

1) graduates of Mining/Machinery/Electrical Secondary Technical School

(STM) shall possess an occupational work health and safety course certificate
with mining work experience of no less than four years, or

2) Bachelors or DIII and or Graduates shall possess an occupational work health

and safety course certificate with mining work experience of no less than 2
years.

Article 8
Class III A Technical Mine Managers

Class III A Technical Mine Managers shall meet the following criteria :

18
a. mining systems : bucket dredges, open pit mines with benches, quarries, open pit
mines with a production scale smaller than 1000 tons per day or exploration stage
open pit mines with drifts and underground construction mines.

b. mining companies : private Indonesian companies and State Owned Firms

(BUMN) and

c. qualifications :
one of the following :

1) graduates of Mining/Machinery/Electricity Secondary Technical Schools must

possess an occupational work health and safety course certificate as well as a
Class II Blaster Certificate for mines using explosives, or possess a dredge
course certificate for mines using dredges or possess a Technical Mine
Manager course certificate with mining work experience of no less than 6
years, or

2) Bachelors or DIII or Graduates must possess an occupational work health and

safety course certificate and Class II Blaster Certificate for mines using
explosives or possess a dredge course certificate for mines using dredges or
possess a Technical Mine Manager course certificate with mining work
experience of no less than three years, or

3) have particular experience as a Class III B Technical Mine Manager of no less

than 5 years.

Article 9
Class II Technical Mine Managers
Class II Technical Mine Managers shall meet the following criteria :

a. mining systems : open pit mines with a production scale greater than 1000 tons
per day and underground ore mines;

b. mining companies : State Owned Firms (BUMN), Contracts of Work, and private
Indonesian companies and

19
c. qualifications :

1) Indonesian citizens must hold one of the following :

a) Bachelors and DIII graduates shall possess a Technical Mine Manager

course certificate, with open pit mine or underground ore mine experience
of no less than seven years, or

b) graduates who hold a Technical Mine Manager course certificate shall

have mining work experience of no less than five years, or

c) shall have held office as a Mine Inspector for no less than 10 years, or

d) possess a mining occupational work health and safety course certificate or

training from abroad and have been accredited by the Technical Mine
Manager accreditation committee with no less than 10 years mining work
experience.

2) foreign citizens (foreign experts) may hold one of the following :

a) possess a mining manager certificate accredited by the Technical Mine

Manager Accreditation Committee, or

b) write or present a paper as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 10
Class I Technical Mine Managers

Class I Technical Mine Managers shall meet the following criteria :

a. mining systems : underground coal mines, underground ore mines with an ore
production scale greater than 1000 tons per day;

b. qualifications :
one of the following :

1) Indonesian citizens
must hold one of the following :

a) Bachelors and DIII graduates who possess a Technical Mine Manager

course certificate, shall possess underground coal mine and or
underground ore mine work experience of no less than 10 years, or

b) shall have held office as a Mine Inspector for no less than 15 years, or

20
 c) Class II Technical Mine Managers shall have five years of experience in
the said position.

2) foreign citizens (foreign experts) shall hold one of the following :

a) possess a mining manager certificate accredited by the Technical Mine

Manager Accreditation Committee, or

b) write or present a paper as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 11
Operational Supervisor
(1) The Technical Mine Manager in carrying out his duties and functions in the field
of occupational safety and health in mining, machinery, electrical apparatus and
its auxiliary equipment shall be assisted by supervisory officials who are
responsible for organisation of the different units at the mine.

(2) Where the operator has yet to appoint employees as required in paragraph (1) the
Technical Mine Manager shall assign or appoint the intended employee.

(3) Employees as required in paragraphs (1) and (2) in carrying out their duties shall
be known as operational supervisors or technical supervisors and shall report to
the Technical Mine Manager.

Article 12
Obligations of the
Operational Supervisor

The operational supervisor shall :

a. be responsible to the Technical Mine Manager for the safety of every mine
worker under his/her supervision;

b. carry out inspections, examinations, and testing;

c. be responsible for the safety, health, and welfare of every person assigned to
him/her and

d. prepare and sign examination, inspection and testing reports

Article 13
Obligations of the

21
 Technical Supervisor

The technical supervisor shall :

a. be responsible to the Technical Mine Manager for the safe installation and correct
operation and maintenance of any equipment that is part of his/her duties;

b. supervise and inspect all machinery and electrical equipment within the scope of
his/her responsibilities;

c. make sure that investigations, inspections, and testing are always carried out on
the operation of machinery, electrical apparatus and equipment;

d. prepare and sign investigation, inspection and testing reports;

e. carry out investigations and testing of all machinery and equipment prior to use,
after installation, re-installation or repair and

f. plan and enforce the implementation of the maintenance timetable as scheduled as

well as the repair of all mine machinery, transportation, road makers, and any
other machinery utilised.

Article 14
Mine Inspection

(1) In order to ensure safe working conditions the Technical Mine Manager or an
appointed employee shall carry out inspections :

a. during every mineral-getting shift, shall inspect no less than one time the
work site of any person on shift and every road or travel way used by any
person during the said shift;

b. during every shift, shall inspect every site before blasting operations;

c. every work day, inspect the access ways or ladder ways to be used that day;

d. every working face, work front, banks, and working slope as well as the
implementation of repair work where necessary;

e. blasting preparation as well as the condition of equipment and vehicles used

therefor;

f. haulage and transport equipment;

g. mine roadways;

22
 h. machinery safety devices and

i. any place considered dangerous.

(2) In carrying out inspections as required in paragraph (1), where anything is found
to be unsafe, the necessary action shall be taken.

Article 15

In order to ensure effective supervision and inspection of the work, the mine may be
divided into sections and each section shall be in the charge of a supervisory official.

Article 16

(1) The type and time of machinery, electrical apparatus and equipment inspection
reports shall be determined by the Technical Mine Manager.

(2) Such reports as required in paragraph (1) shall be forwarded to the Technical
Mine Manager.

Part Four
Surveyors and Mine Maps

Article 17

(1) Only those persons in possession of a surveyor certificate recognised by the Chief
Mine Inspector shall be appointed as a mine surveyor.

(2) Specifically for underground mines, the surveyor as required in paragraph (1)
shall have underground mine experience and shall have been approved by the
Mine Inspector.

Article 18
Obligations of the Surveyor

(1) The mine surveyor shall be responsible for indicating or determining the direction
and boundaries for excavation in accordance with pre-determined plans.

(2) The surveyor shall make immediate notification to the employee responsible for
excavation work when such work is approaching (no less than 50 meters)
potential dangerous sites such as water pockets, dangerous gases, rock bursts, and
the surface of the earth or supports that may endanger such excavation.

23
(3) To the extent that it does not conflict with the stipulations in this Decree, the mine
surveyor shall not be responsible for the accuracy of measuring work already
carried out or approved by a previous mine surveyor or measuring work approved
in correction of any other surveyor. The said surveyor must however :

a. make every effort to take the necessary steps to ensure the accuracy of every
map, drawings or sections not yet made by him/her or under his/her
supervision and

b. shall report to the Technical Mine Manager, where he/she is in doubt as to the
accuracy of any map, drawing or section of the mine which was not made by
or under the supervision of the mine surveyor, which could possibly impact on
the work and mining activities or the safety of people in the mine.

Article 19
Maps

The Technical Mine Manager shall provide :

a. location maps that indicate the boundaries of the mining area, all above ground
work, buildings, electrical circuits, land roads, railway lines, lakes, rivers, tailings
disposal sites, adits and shafts as well as other information determined by the
Chief Mine Inspector. For underground operations such maps shall indicate all
underground workings including shafts, tunnels, dams, ventilation doors and
bulkheads;

b. mine plans for surface mines must indicate the planned surface situation including
the location of mining and surface facilities. Underground mine plans shall show
all sections of horizontal layers and underground workings including openings,
shafts, and underground infrastructure as well as other information on a scale as
stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector and shall show the situation of the
previous six months.

c. a geological map that shows the boundaries of upper ground layer and alluvial
sediment in the area: and

d. Mine maps that can be easily seen by employees, which show the main roads and
exits from underground to the surface, as well as telephones and other means of
communication.

Part Five
Mine Book

24
 Article 20

Mine Book stipulations.

(1) Every mining operation shall possess a Mine Book the size and format of which
must accord with the stipulations of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Mine Book as required in paragraph (1) shall be validated by the Mine Inspector
by numbering and initialling every page.

Article 21
Mine Book Records

(1) Any violation of these regulations as well as specific stipulations such as orders,
prohibitions and directives shall be recorded personally by the Mine Inspector.

(2) Without diminishing the requirements of paragraph (1), any notification given by
the Chief Mine Inspector to the Technical Mine Manager shall be recorded in the
Mine Book including a signature on a copy that matches the original.

(3) Provisions as required in paragraphs (1) and (2), shall be recorded by the
Technical Mine Manager in the Mine Book on the left hand side of the page.

Article 22
Storage of the Mine Book

(1) The Mine Book shall always be available at the office of the Technical Mine
Manager while a copy shall be kept at the office of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) The Mine Book may be read and studied by the mine workers.

25
 Part Six
Guidelines for Mine
Occupational Safety and Health

Article 23
Occupational
Safety and Health Department

At every mining activity, based on the considerations of the number of workers and the
character or extent of work, the Chief Mine Inspector can oblige the mining authority
holder to establish a safety and health department which shall arrange the occupational
safety and health at the mine and which shall be under the supervision of the Technical
Mine Manager.

Article 24
Tasks of the Occupational
Safety and Health Department
The occupational safety and health department shall be responsible for the following :

a. to collect data and record details of any accident or dangerous occurrence, the
condition before the accident occurred, the cause of an accident, accident
analysis, and accident prevention;

b. to collect data concerning the areas and activities requiring stricter supervision
with the intention of providing suggestions to the Technical Mine Manager
regarding mining methods and working procedures, mining equipment, and the
use of detection equipment as well as personal protection equipment.

c. to provide information and instructions on occupational safety and health to all

mine workers by means of meetings, lectures, discussions, films, publications,
and the like;

d. where necessary, to form and train members of a Mine Rescue Team.

e. to formulate accident statistics and

f. to evaluate occupational safety and health.

26
 Article 25
The Occupational Safety
and Health Committee
In order to complete the tasks as required in Article 23, the mine safety and health
department shall establish a committee with the following tasks :

a. to carry out regular joint inspections into every aspect of occupational safety and
health as well as any related issues encountered at the mine and propose measures
aimed at overcoming such issues.

b. to organise joint inspections of work sites to enable the committee to fulfil its
function.

Part Seven
Mine Workers

Article 26
Qualifications
(1) Mine workers shall meet the requirements of the nature of the position to be given
to them and must be in mental and physical good health.

(2) It is prohibited for female mine workers to work in underground mines except for
those working in health services, those carrying out internships or research and
who have obtained a recommendation from the Technical Mine Manager.

(3) It is prohibited to assign a mine worker to work alone in any isolated place or
where there are unexpected dangers (except where direct means of
communication with other workers in the vicinity have been made available).

(4) It is prohibited to employ mine workers who are sick or who due to any reason
are not able to work normally.

(5) Where an investigation by the Mine Inspector, Technical Mine Manager or

Underground Mine Manager, reveals that a mine worker is discovered to have
wilfully violated this Ministerial Decree, the said mine worker may be subject to
penalties in accordance with the prevailing stipulations.

27
 Article 27
Health Checks

(1) Mine workers shall be entitled to health checks which shall be the responsibility
of the company.

(2) Mine workers shall undergo regular health checks (comprehensive checks) by an
authorised doctor.

(3) Underground mine workers shall undergo health checks no less than two times a
year.

(4) Mine workers who work in areas that may endanger the lungs, shall undergo
special health checks.

(5) Based on the existing regulations, the Chief Mines Inspector may order frequent
health checks for mine workers handling dangerous materials by an authorised
physician.

Article 28
Education and Training
(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall have a plan containing programs for training
new workers, mine workers with new duties, training for dangerous situations and
annual refresher training or other education and training as stipulated by the Chief
Mine Inspector.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager may conduct his own education and training as
required in paragraph (1), alone or in conjunction with government authorities or
other official bodies, and such education and training must be appropriate to the
activities and type of work at the mining operation.

(3) Every education and training program as intended in paragraph (1), shall obtain
prior approval from the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 29

(1) Education and training programs as required in Article 28, shall at the very least
include subjects on the following :

a. the responsibilities of a mine worker;

b. the authority and responsibilities of a supervisor;

c. introduction to the work environment;

28
 d. escape and emergency evacuation plans, fire warning and fire fighting;

e. health and safety aspects of duties to be assigned;

f. danger identification and avoidance;

g. the dangers of electricity and machinery;

h. first aid; and

i. the danger of noise, dust and heat and protective measures.

(2) Education and training programs as required in paragraph (1), for underground
mines shall include additional subjects on the following :

a. safe working procedures;

b. care and use of mine lamps;

c. basic ventilation knowledge;

d. support rules and basic support practices;

e. mine evacuation procedures during an emergency situation;

f. the use of self-rescuers; and

g. any hazards as well as how to detect combustible and noxious gases

(3) Beside the lessons mentioned in Paragraph (1), additional subjects for education
and training may be required based on the activities and nature of work at the
mine.

Article 30
(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall carry out education and training for
supervisors covering at the very least the following subjects :

a. occupational safety and health regulations;

b. safety management;

c. safety rules and safe working procedures

d. danger identification and avoidance;

29
 e. emergency situation measures and rescue procedures;

f. self rescue and breathing apparatus;

g. the dangers of machinery and electricity;

h. fire prevention and control

i. first aid in an accident and;

j. the environmental impact of activities.

(2) In addition to the subjects as required in paragraph (1) specifically for

underground mine supervisors, the following additional subjects shall be covered
:

a. safe working procedures;

b. the care and use of mine lamps;

c. basic ventilation knowledge;

d. support rules and basic support practices;

e. mine evacuation procedures during an emergency situation;

f. the use of self-rescuers and breathing devices and

g. any hazards as well as how to detect combustible and noxious gases

Article 31
Attendance List of the Mine Workers

(1) The attendance of every mine worker shall be recorded or any other means may
be used to record the time and workplace.

(2) The record as required in paragraph (1), shall be carried out at the mine office or
any other place in the proximity of the mining operation.

30
 Article 32
Obligations
(1) Mine workers shall comply with occupational safety and health regulations.

(2) Mine workers shall carry out their work in accordance with safe working
procedures.

(3) While at work mine workers shall :

a. consider and safeguard their own safety as well as that of others who may be
affected by their actions and

b. take immediate measures and or report immediately to the supervisor any

situation which they consider may lead to danger.

(4) Mine workers who witness or hear of any deviation from the implementation of
work as intended in paragraph (3), shall notify the supervisor on duty
immediately.

(5) Mine workers shall use and maintain personal protective equipment in the
implementation of their duties.

(6) Provide factual information when requested by the Mine Inspector or the
Technical Mine Manager.

(7) Mine workers shall be entitled to voice objections to their superiors where health
and safety requirements are not being met.

Article 33
Actions Required to Prevent Hazardous Occurrences

Every mine worker shall :

1) Consider and safeguard his own health and safety as well as that of others who
may be affected by his/her actions or his/her absence at the workplace;

2) Carry out given instructions in the interests of his/her own safety and that of
others;

3) Use safety and personal protective equipment correctly;

4) Report immediately to his/her direct superiors any situation which he/she believes
will lead to danger and which cannot be overcome him/herself and

31
5) Report every work or work related accident or injury.

Article 34
(1) Mine workers who see any danger which they believe will cause immediate
danger to any other worker shall inform the other worker.

(2) Any mine worker informed of the presence of danger shall move away
immediately.

(3) The previous shift supervisor shall inform the following shift supervisor of the
presence of any dangers in a written report.

Part Eight
Mining Facilities

Article 35
Mine Office

(1) A mine office shall be built at or in the vicinity of any mining operation or part of
it where mining work is done regularly.

(2) Mine offices as required in paragraph (1) shall be provided with maps related to
the general mining operation.

(3) At or in the vicinity of the mine office shall be provided a place to post :

a. notices required by legislative regulations and

b. notices which are required by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 36
Accommodations
Mining operations located in remote areas shall provide accommodations for the mine
workers that is both appropriate and meet health requirements.

32
 Part Nine
First Aid

Article 37
Health Treatment and
First Aid

(1) A fully equipped health and first aid station shall be provided at or in the vicinity
of the mine office.

(2) The health and first aid station as required in paragraph (1), shall meet the
following requirements.

a. adequate space;

b. be easily reached;

c. easily accessible by stretcher;

d. sufficient lighting and ventilation;

e. separated from areas used for other purposes and

f. used only for first aid treatment.

(3) Based on specific considerations, the Chief Mine Inspector may grant written
approval to deviate from the provisions in paragraph (2).

(4) An ambulance or such specific vehicle shall be made available and ready for
immediate use when required.

Article 38
Supervision of the Health and
First Aid Station
(1) The first aid station shall be supervised by a nurse or health expert or by a person
who possesses at the very least an First Aid Certificate.

(2) The supervisor of the first aid station shall be available at any time. When the
supervisor is not able to always be present, the appointment of a capable
replacement must be provided for.

Part Ten

33
 Mine Accidents
and Dangerous Occurrences

Article 39

An accident is a mining accident when the following conditions are given :

a. the accident must have actually occurred;

b. must have caused injury to a mine worker or any person granted a permit by the
Technical Mine Manager;

c. must be the result of activities of the mining operation;

d. must have occurred during the working hours of the mine worker injured or at any
time for any person granted a permit and

e. must have occurred within the area of the activities of the mining operation or the
project area.

Article 40
Classification of Mining
Accident Injuries

Mining accidents shall be recorded and classified into the following categories :

a. Minor

Any injury resulting from a mining accident which causes the mine worker to no
longer be able to carry out his/her normal duties for more than one day and less
than three weeks, including Sundays and holidays;

b. Serious

1) any injury resulting from a mining accident which causes the mine worker to
no longer be able to carry out his/her normal duties for more than three weeks
including Sundays and holidays;

2) any injury resulting from a mining accident which causes the mine worker to
become an invalid and who can no longer carry out his/her original duties and

3) irrespective of any duration of absence, any mining accident causing one or

more of the following injuries :

34
 a) Fractures of skull, spine, pelvis, lower arm, upper arm, leg or foot.

b) Internal haemorrhage or unconsciousness caused by oxygen deficiency;

c) Severe wounds or lacerations likely to cause permanent disability;

d) Any dislocation of any joint which had never previously occurred;

c. Fatal.

any accident causing the death of a mine worker within 24 hours calculated from
the time the accident occurred.

Article 41
Reporting Requirements

(1) Regardless of how minor the nature of the injury, any injury of a mine worker
shall be reported to the first aid or health care station for medical examination and
treatment before leaving the work.

(2) Injury reports and the medical treatment thereof as required in paragraph (1) shall
be recorded in a book provided specifically for that purpose.

(3) When a mining accident occurs which causes a serious injury or death, the
Technical Mine Manager shall forthwith notify the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 42

(1) Mining accidents shall be investigated by the Technical Mine Manager or any
appointed person within 48 hours, and the findings of the said investigation shall
be recorded in the accident book.

(2) Mining accidents shall be recorded in a specified form and must be sent to the
Chief Mine Inspector.
Article 43
Notification of Dangerous Occurrences

(1) Dangerous occurrences that may be life endangering or which may obstruct
production shall be reported as soon as possible by the Technical Mine Manager
to the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall take immediate measures to eleminate the
dangerous occurrence as required in paragraph (1) of this Article.

Article 44

35
 Specifications of a
Dangerous Occurrences

Dangerous occurrences at open pit mines, mining and drilling dredges are defined as
follows :

a. Collapse of, overturning of or the failure of any load bearing crane or lifting
appliance;

b. pressure vessels :

explosion, collapse or bursting of any closed vessel in which the interior pressure
was above or below atmospheric pressure;

c. electrical short circuit or overload attended by fire or explosions that resulted in

the stoppage of the plant involved for more than 24 hours;

d. explosion or fire :

an explosion of fire occurring in any plant or place which resulted in the stoppage
of the plant or suspension of normal work in the place for more than 24 hours,
where such explosion or fire was caused by the ignition of process materials,
by-products or finished products.

e. escape of hazardous substances :

the sudden or uncontrolled release of one tonne or more of highly flammable or

poisonous substances, gas or liquid from any system, plant or pipeline ;

f. collapse of any scaffolding :

complete or partial collapse of any scaffolding the height of which exceeds 5

meters from the floor ;

g. the collapse of any building or structure;

h. explosions :

premature or unintended detonation of explosive materials;

i. pipelines :

damage which may cause human injury or serious damage to property;

j. accidents caused by the overturning of vehicles carrying hazardous materials

along mine or production roads.

36
k. accidents caused by any breathing apparatus being worn that causes the wearer to
be incapable of breathing freely, or the failure of such breathing apparatus to
function causing the wearer to suffer oxygen deficiency;

l. accidents involving buildings or equipment coming into contact with un-insulated

high voltage overhead electrical lines ;

m. any accident caused by a collision between a locomotive and any other vehicle;

n. the collapse of a coal bunker.

o. any passenger water craft, working barge or mining dredge that sinks or
overturns;

p. any incident where any person is injured as the result of an explosion or the
detonation of explosives or explosive equipment which causes the victim to
receive treatment for his/her injuries.

q. any incident where any object is thrown beyond the boundaries of the mine as the
result of any blasting activities and in which any person is affected or who may be
exposed to danger and

r. any stockpile which becomes unstable or any fire or other incident which
indicates that any stockpile is not safe or indicates signs of being unsafe.

Article 45

Dangerous occurrences related to underground mines are defined as follows :

a. any burning of gas underground;

b. any underground fire;

c. any surface fire which threatens the operation of the hoist or haulage equipment
installed in the shaft or any mechanically operated equipment used for
underground ventilation;

d. outburst of gas together with coal or other solids into mine workings except
where such bursts are carried out intentionally;

e. any breakage of ropes, chains, couplings, slings, guide rope, suspensions gear or
any other equipment related to the transportation of people through the shaft or
outlet;

37
f. any breakage of ropes, chains, couplings, slings, guide ropes, suspension gear or
any other equipment related to the transportation of people underground, or any
conveyor designed to transport people which experiences damage of the belt,
slings, or any other equipment related to the said conveyor, while carrying people;

g. any conveyance which turns over while carrying people;

h. except where to carry out scheduled maintenance, any stoppage of any ventilation
equipment, which causes a significant reduction in ventilation for more than 30
minutes in any lamp mine, or for a period of two hours in any other mine
(auxiliary fans are not included in this requirement);

i. the collapse of any hoist head frame, hoist engine room, fan machine room or
bunker;

j. breathing apparatus :

1) any breathing apparatus or any other apparatus which has a similar use, or any
individual rescue equipment being used which fails to work safely as designed
and

2) when upon use or during use of any breathing apparatus or any individual
rescue equipment in the mine, any person receives first aid treatment caused
by a health problem or suspected bad health.

k. any accident caused by the use of explosives and any other mine accident where
any person suffers injury caused by the detonation or exploding of materials or
blasting equipment or which causes any person to receive first aid treatment in
the mine ;

l. inrush of gas or water :

1) any inrush of noxious or flammable gas from old workings, or

2) any inrush from any source of water or material which flows when wet.

m. any incident caused by an underground locomotive (not being used for shunting
or testing purposes), which stops suddenly not caused by safety devices or
normal breaking equipment, the occurrence of which may cause an accident.

n. the use of evacuation equipment in an emergency situation : any incident

necessitating the use of any apparatus or arrangements provided for emergency
egress under the requirements of the “means of egress” regulations, except for
training purposes and

38
o. the collapse of safety pillars or support systems which causes the disruption of
normal work over a period of more than 24 hours.

Article 46
Investigation of Mining Accidents
and Dangerous Occurrences

(1) For investigation purposes, the Technical Mine Manager is not permitted to
change the state of the site, and/or the condition of disrepair of equipment caused
by any accident or dangerous occurrence, except in order to provide aid.

(2) Where it is considered necessary in the interests of the continuance of work, the
scene of the accident or dangerous occurrence may be changed with the approval
of the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 47
Mining Accident Statistics

(1) Mining accident statistics shall be submitted annually based on the frequency and
seriousness of accidents that befall mine workers and which shall be calculated by
:

a. the number of accident victims divided by the total number of man hours
worked x 1,000,000 and

b. the total number of lost days divided by the total number of man hours
worked x 1,000,000.

(2) Accident statistics as required in paragraph (1), shall be forwarded by the

Technical Mine Manager to the Chief Mine Inspector no later than one month
after the end of the calendar year.

39
 Part Eleven
Health

Article 48
Change Room

(1) At specific divisions of work, based on health considerations, mine workers shall
change their clothing and clean their bodies before leaving their place of work.

(2) In the implementation of the requirement as specified in paragraph (1), the

Operator/Technical Mine Manager shall provide a change room and a shower
house both of which must always be kept clean.

Article 49
The Provision of Water

(1) Water which is provided to clean and wash the body shall be clean; used water
shall be disposed of into waste facilities.

(2) Drinking water that meets health requirements shall be available free of charge in
a sufficient quantities for mine workers during working hours.

(3) Drinking water containers shall be clean and be equipped with a proper cover
which is capable of closing automatically.

Article 50
Toilets

Toilet facilities shall be provided at the mine and manufactured in such a way as to meet
health requirements.

Article 51
Alcoholic Beverages

(1) It is forbidden to consume alcoholic beverages or any intoxicating beverage while

at work.

(2). Mine workers under the influence of alcohol shall be prohibited from working.

40
 Chapter II
Explosives and Blasting

Part One
The Explosives Magazine

Article 52
Explosives Magazine Permit

(1) Explosives stored at the mine may only be stored in a magazine for which a
permit has been obtained and which has a specified capacity as stipulated by the
Chief Mine Inspector in writing. Where the explosives magazine is located
outside the area of the activities of the mining operation and which will be used
for mining activities, written approval shall be obtained from the Chief Mine
Inspector.

(2) The use of explosives for any other activity shall be approved by the Chief Mine
Inspector.

(3) The explosives magazine permit application as required in paragraph (1) shall
have attached :

a. 1 : 100 scale construction drawings of the explosives magazine showing aerial

and side views as well as anything else required in accordance with the
maximum capacity of the explosives magazine being applied for and

b. 1 : 5000 scale location maps of the explosives magazine showing safe

distances.

(4) Applications for underground explosives magazines shall be accompanied by

maps and specifications showing the construction plans and location.

(5) Detonators shall not be stored in any magazine in which other explosives are
stored, but shall be stored separately in a separate magazine where storage of
detonators is permitted. Detonator magazines must be of the same construction as
explosives magazines.

(6) The requirement to obtain an explosives magazine permit shall be stipulated by

the Chief Mine Inspector.

(7) The period of validity of the explosives magazine permit is:

a. a two year temporary explosives magazine permit;

41
 b. a five year transit explosives magazine permit;

c. a five year main explosives magazine permit.

(8) The Mine Inspector may cancel an explosives magazine permit for any explosives
magazine that no longer fulfils the requirements.

(9) Where mining activities cease or are stopped for a period of more than three
months, the Technical Mine Manager shall notify the Chief Mine Inspector and
the magazine kept on continuous guard.

Article 53
General Requirements
for Explosives Magazines

(1) Surface explosives magazines shall meet the environmental safe distance
requirements.

(2) Where two or more magazines are located in the same area, each magazine shall
meet the minimum safe distance requirements.

(3) Where the distance between two or more magazines fails to conform to the
requirements of paragraph (2), safe distances as specified in paragraph (1) shall
apply for the total number of explosives stored in one unit or group of magazines.

Article 54
Security at the Explosives Magazine

(1) Every explosives magazine shall be equipped with :

a. a thermometer placed in the storage room;

b. “smoking prohibited” and “authorised persons only” signs ;

c. only one entrance ;

d. fire extinguishers located at readily available locations outside the magazine.

(2) The explosives magazine shall be surrounded by lighting and be guarded by a

trustworthy person twenty four hours a day. A guard post shall be built outside
the magazine and must facilitate easy supervision of the magazine surroundings.

(3) A security fence equipped with a lockable gate shall be installed around the
explosives magazine.

42
(4) Entry to the magazine shall only be permitted when using a explosion proof
lamps.

(5) It is prohibited to wear metal soled footwear, carry lighters/matches or any other
good that can produce sparks in the magazine.

(6) The detonator sensitive explosives magazine shall be surrounded by a berm two
meters in height and one meter in width at its highest point. Where the entrance
directly faces the magazine door, a berm shall be built so that entrance can only
be made from the side.

(7) Where the explosives magazine is built by excavating solid materials, the berm
built on all sides shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (6).

(8) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) the following stipulations shall
apply for Ammonium Nitrate and ANFO :

a. magazines with a capacity of less than 5,000 kilograms shall have automatic
fire fighting systems, and

b. magazines with a capacity of 5,000 kilograms or more shall additionally be

provided with hydrants outside the magazine which is connected to a high
pressure water source.

Part Two
Requirements for Surface
Explosives Magazines

Article 55
Arrangement of Rooms

(1) Magazines in the form of buildings to store detonator sensitive explosives shall
consist of two rooms. :

a. a rear room for the storage of explosives and

b. a front room for the receipt and issue of explosives.

(2) The rear room door shall not directly face the front room door and both doors
shall be equipped with strong locks.

(3) Rooms of explosives magazines for other types may consist of one room but a
specific place shall be provided for the examination and/or counting of
explosives. The location shall be in the vicinity of, but not in the same building.

43
 Article 56
Temporary Explosives
Magazines

(1) Detonator sensitive explosives magazines :

a. magazines in the form of a building :

1) must be constructed from fire resistant materials;

2) must be constructed with a roof as light as possible;

3) must be constructed with solid walls;

4) shall be provided with ventilation holes at the upper and lower part of the
building;

5) must have only one door;

6) must be fitted with a lightning conductor with a grounding resistance

lower than 5 ohms;

7) must be free of combustible material within a radius of 30 meters;

8) must have a floor made from non sparking materials and

9) must not have exposed metal within three meters from the floor.

b. magazines in the form of containers :

1) must be constructed from metal plate with a minimum thickness of 3

millimetres;

2) shall be provided with ventilation holes at the upper and lower part of the
building;

3) the interior must be layered with wood;

4) must be constructed in such a way so that rain water is kept out;

5) shall have only one door and

6) must be fitted with a lightning conductor with grounding resistance lower

than 5 ohms.

44
 c. the capacity of temporary explosives magazines shall not exceed :

1) 4000 kilograms for magazines which are buildings and

2) 2000 kilograms for magazines which are containers.

(2) Primer sensitive explosives magazines :

a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),
except letter a item 3) and shall have a capacity of no greater than 10,000
kilograms and

b. magazines which are containers shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),
except letter b item 3) and shall have a capacity of no less than 5000
kilograms.

(3) explosive ingredient magazines :

a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),
except letter a item 3) and shall have a capacity of no greater than 10,000
kilograms and

b. magazines which are containers shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),
except letter b item 3) and shall have a capacity of no greater than 10,000
kilograms.

Article 57
Transit Magazines

(1) Detonator sensitive explosives shall not be permitted to be stored in a transit

explosives magazine and shall be stored directly in the main magazine.

(2) Primer sensitive explosives magazines :

a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of Article 56

paragraph (1), except letter a item 8) of this regulation and shall have a
capacity of no greater than 500,000 kilograms and

b. magazines which are containers shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),
except letter b item 3).

(3) Explosive ingredients magazines :

45
 a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of Article 56
paragraph (1), except letter a items 3) and 8) and

b. magazines which are containers or tanks shall only be placed in a location for
which a permit has been obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector and the said
explosive ingredients shall be stored in the original containers. The capacity
of each container or tank shall not exceed 20,000 kilograms and the capacity
of each magazine shall not be greater than 2,000,000 kilograms.

(4) Magazines which are in a building and for the storage of explosive ingredients
shall meet the requirements of Article 56 paragraph (1), except letter a items 3)
and 8) with the following additional stipulations :

a. (I) the floor shall not be made from wood or any material that absorbs
Ammonium Nitrate.

(ii) the building and surrounding areas shall be dry and

(iii) the interior of the magazine as well as the pallets shall not be made
from galvanised iron, zinc, copper or lead.

b. the capacity of the magazine shall not exceed 2,000,000 kilograms.

Article 58
Main Magazine

(1) Detonator sensitive explosives storage magazines shall meet the requirements of
Article 56 paragraph (1) letter a and have a capacity of no greater than 150,000
kilograms.

(2) Primer sensitive explosives magazines shall meet the requirements of Article 56
paragraph (1) letter a and have a capacity of no greater than 500,000 kilograms.

(3) Explosive ingredients magazines :

a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of Article 56

paragraph (1), except letter a item 3) of this regulation and shall have a
capacity of no greater than 500,000 kilograms;

b. magazines which are tanks shall meet the following requirements :

1) the tank shall not be made from copper, lead, zinc or galvanised iron;

46
 2) the upper area of the tank shall be fitted with an opening for use as an
inspection hole and a special place shall be fitted for the operator to carry
out inspections;

3) the discharge pipe shall be located at the bottom of the tank and

4) the upper area of the tank shall be fitted with a valve to release excessive
air pressure.

c. magazines which are containers shall meet the requirements of Article 56

paragraph (1) except letter b) item 3).

Article 59
Safe Distance

(1) The method for the determination of safe distance for detonator sensitive
explosives magazines shall be as follows :

a. every 1,000 No. 8 detonators shall be equivalent to 1 (one) kilogram of

detonator sensitive materials. Detonators with a force exceeding that of No. 8
detonators shall meet the manufacturer’s requirements and

b. every 330 meters of detonating cord with specifications of 50 to 60 grains

shall be equivalent to 4 kilograms of detonator sensitive explosives.

(2) Magazine safe distance as required in Article 53 paragraph (1), Article 56

paragraph (1) and Article 58 paragraph (1) shall be determined as follows :

47
 Minimum Safe Distances for the
Location of Detonator Sensitive
Explosives Magazines
DISTANCE (IN METERS)
ALLOWABLE CAPACITY (IN I II III
KILOGRAMS)
1 2 3 4 5

1 50 60 24 45

100 71 29 43

500 120 48 90

1,000 152 56 113

2 2,000 191 63 142

3,000 219 71 164

4,000 240 75 180

5,000 260 78 194

6,000 263 81 206

7,000 266 83 217

8,000 270 84 227

9,000 282 86 236

10,000 293 87 244

3 15,000 339 102 280

20,000 383 114 308

25,000 420 126 331

30,000 455 137 352

48
 4 40,000 509 153 388

50,000 545 164 418

60,000 557 167 444

70,000 567 170 467

80,000 581 174 489

90,000 597 180 509

100,000 609 183 527

5 125,000 647 195 567

150,000 700 225 650

Notes :

I. Buildings inhabited by people, hospitals, other buildings/offices.

II. Combustible liquid storage facilities, tanks, workshops and highways.

III. Railway lines, public streets or roads.

(3) Magazine safe distance as required in Article 53 paragraph (2), Article 56

paragraphs (2) and (3), Article 57 paragraphs (2) and (3), as well as Article 58
paragraphs (2) and (3) shall be determined as follows :

49
 Minimum Safe Distances Between
Explosives Magazines.
Maximum Minimum Distance Between Detonator Minimum Distance
Allowable Sensitive Explosives Magazines and Between
Weight for Detonator
Detonator Explosive Primer Sensitive Sensitive
Sensitive Ingredients Explosives Explosives
Explosives Magazines Magazines Magazines
(kilograms) (meters) (meters) (meters)
1 2 3 4
50 1 4 5
50 1.5 3.5 8
300 2 6 10
500 2 7 12
800 2.5 8 14
1,000 3 10 15
1,500 3 11 17
2,000 3.5 12 19
3,000 3.5 13 21
4,000 4 14 24
5,000 4.5 16 26
6,000 4.5 17 27
8,000 5 18 30
10,000 5.5 19 32
12,500 6 21 35
15,000 6 22 37
17,500 7 24 39
20,000 7 25 41
25,000 7.5 27 45
30,000 8 30 48
35,000 8.5 31 51
40,000 9 33 55
45,000 10 36 58
50,000 11 38 61
60,000 11 40 68
70,000 12 44 75
80,000 13 48 81
90,000 14 52 88
100,000 16 57 95
125,000 18 67 111
150,000 21 76 120
(4) Magazine safe distance as intended in article 57 paragraph (4) shall be determined
as follows :

50
 Safe Distances for
Explosive Ingredients Magazines

Safe Distance for

Magazines with Permitted
Object Capacities (Meters)
Less than 50 Between 50 - 150 Between 150 - 2000
Tons Tons Tons
Workshops and 8 12 15
other work places

Main roads 8 8 15

Public places 15 25 50

Mining operation 8 15 50
boundaries

Explosive ingredient
mixing sites 10 10 10

Other hazardous 8 15 15
items (fuel tanks
etc.)

(5) Magazine safe distances as specified in paragraph (4) shall also apply to the
determination of distances between magazines as intended in Article 35 paragraph
(1), Article 56 paragraph (3), Article 57 paragraphs (2) and (3), as well as Article
58 paragraph (3).

51
 Part Three
Requirements for Underground
Explosives Magazines

Article 60

(1) Underground magazines shall be built in a location that is dry, free from the
danger of fire, far from the main intake airway, protected from the possibility of
rock fall and flooding, and shall be separated from work sites in the mine.

(2) The magazine shall be constructed sufficiently sturdy with even walls and be
fitted with air vents which allow sufficient air flow.

(3) The location of underground magazines shall maintain a minimum straight line
distance of :

a. 100 meters from any mine shaft or any other explosives magazines;

b. 25 meters from any work site;

c. 10 meters from any raise or shaft which is used for people and transportation
and

d. 50 meters from the location of blasting operations.

Article 61
Arrangement of Rooms

Underground magazines shall meet the following requirements :

a. be dry and level;

b. have only one door that is both strong and lockable

c. have two rooms joined by a lockable door :

1) the front room near the entrance door shall be used to receive and to issue or
take explosives, and to inspect and count explosives to be used. This room
shall be fitted with a counter or desk and a explosives record book and

2) the rear room shall be sufficiently spacious and be used solely for the purpose
of storing explosives.

Part Four

52
 Explosive Storage Procedures

Article 62
General Requirements

(1) Explosives shall be stored in their original packaging and the date of the delivery
to the magazine shall be recorded clearly and legibly on the packaging without
moving the said packaging.

(2) Detonators shall be stored separately from other explosives in a detonator

sensitive explosives magazine.

(3) Detonator sensitive explosives shall neither be stored in magazines for primer
sensitive explosives nor in magazines for explosive ingredients.

(4) Primer sensitive explosives may be stored in a detonator sensitive explosives

magazine but shall not be stored in magazines for explosive ingredients.

(5) Explosive ingredients may also be stored in a primer sensitive explosives

magazine and or in a detonator sensitive explosives magazine.

(6) Ammunition and other types thereof shall only be stored along with other
explosives in an explosives magazine when stacked separately and any part
thereof made from metal shall be coated with copper or aluminium plate or
covered with concrete to a height of three meters from the floor.

(7) The room temperature for the explosives room for :

a. explosive ingredients must not exceed 55 degrees Celsius and

b. detonator sensitive explosives must not exceed 35 degrees Celsius.

Article 63
Magazine Employees and
Explosives Security

(1) The Technical Mine Manager of every mine at which explosives are used shall :

a. ensure that explosives are securely stored at the mine;

b. appoint a capable person as an administrator of explosives at the mine and the

said person shall possess at the very least a Class II Blaster Certificate and
shall comprehend all the regulations for explosives and

53
 c. ensure that a sufficient number of explosives magazine administrators are
appointed, in order to ensure good supervision of the magazine.

(2) The magazine and explosives shall only be handled by an administrator 21 years
or older, who has experience in handling and using explosives and who has
written authority issued by the Technical Mine Manager to act as the explosives
magazine administrator. His name shall be registered in the Mine Book.

(3) The explosives magazine administrator shall carry out checks on the receipt,
storage and issuing of explosives.

(4) The explosives magazine administrator shall ensure that the explosives magazine
is always locked except when carrying out checks, inventories, and the receipt
and issuing of explosives.

(5) No unauthorised person shall be permitted to enter an explosive magazine, except

for Mines Inspectors and Police.

(6) Only shotfirers and persons in charge of the explosive magazine are permitted to
handle explosives.

Article 64
Explosives Record Book

(1) An explosives log book shall be provided in the explosives magazine containing
the following :

a. the names, types and total amounts of explosives as well as the date of receipt
thereof and

b. the location and amount of explosives in storage.

(2) A log book shall be provided in the explosives magazine to be systematically

updated and in which the following details shall be recorded :

a. the name and signature of the administrator granted authority to receive and
issue explosives whose name shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

b. the total amount of every type of explosives and or detonator entering or

leaving the explosives magazine;

c. the date and time explosives are issued or are returned;

d. the name and signature of the employee receiving explosives;

54
 e. the location of the blasting area or the intended use of explosives being
requested/issued.

(3) a. The Technical Mine Manager shall forward quarterly reports to the Chief
Mine Inspector regarding the stock and use of explosives and

b. the format of the quarterly report as intended in item (a) of this paragraph
shall be determined by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) The requirements as intended in paragraphs (1) and (2) of this Article shall be
kept in archives for no less than one year.

Article 65
The Receipt and Issue of Explosives

(1) When taking explosives, an employee shall reject or return any explosives
considered damaged or hazardous or not fit for use.

(2) The receipt and issuing of explosives shall be carried out in the front room of the
explosives magazine and during such activities the adjoining door shall be closed.

(3) The types of explosives required shall be issued from the magazine in accordance
with the order of the date of receipt.

(4) Explosives and detonators issued from the magazine shall be in good condition
and the number shall not exceed the number required in one work shift.

(5) Unused explosives at the end of a work shift shall be immediately returned to the
magazine. Re-opening the packaging of returned explosives shall not be
necessary, where the said explosives remain in the same original packaging or
boxes as at the time of issue.

(6) Damaged explosives shall be immediately be safely destroyed in accordance with

the requirements of existing regulations.

(7) Data on damaged explosives shall include the amount, type, brand, and any
visible damage shall be reported to the Chief Mine Inspector for remedy
proposals.

(8) Safety fuses shall be inspected at the time of receipt to check the possibility of
damage and check the speed of ignition. Following a specific period of time
safety fuses shall be re-inspected to ensure that the said safety fuses are in good
condition and be checked for their speed of ignition. The proper ignition speed of
safety fuses per one meter is between 90 and 110 seconds or as per the factory
specifications.

55
(9) Empty packaging or other packaging materials shall not be stored in the
explosives magazine or in the detonator magazine.

(10) Opening the packaging of explosives and detonators shall be carried out in the
front area of the explosives magazine.

Article 66
Storage of Detonator Sensitive Explosives

(1) Where detonator sensitive explosives are stored in a magazine which is a building
the said explosives shall :

a. be kept in the original packaging and

b. be placed on a bench no less than 30 centimetres in height from the floor and :

1) be stacked no more than 5 boxes high, 4 boxes across and lengthways

according to the size of the building.

2) wood supports of no less than 1.5 centimetres thickness shall be laid

between each layer of boxes.

3) the distance between stacks shall be no less than 80 centimetres and

4) a space of at least 30 centimetres shall be kept between the various stacks

and the wall of the magazine.

(2) Where stored in a magazine in the form of a container detonator sensitive

explosives shall:

a. be stacked/piled neatly ensuring the free flow of air around the stacks.

b. not have a storage capacity exceeding 2,000 kilograms.

56
 Article 67
Storage of Primer
Sensitive Explosives

(1) Where primer sensitive explosives are stored in a magazine which is a building,
the following stipulations shall be met :

a. shall be kept in the original packaging;

b. packaged explosives whose weight is approximately 25 kilograms shall be

stored in accordance with the requirements in Article 66 paragraph (1);

c. packaged explosives weighing around 1,000 kilograms :

1) shall be stored with the original wood pallet;

2) the receipt and issuing of the said explosives shall not be carried out
manually and

3) shall be stored in stacks with the following requirements :

a) the stacks shall be no higher than the height of 3 (three) packages;

b) an empty space of at least 75 centimetres shall be kept between the

stacks and the walls of the magazine and

c) an aisle free from obstacles shall be provided in order that lifting

equipment may work freely and safely.

d. to exceed the stack requirements of paragraph (1) letter c item 3, prior

approval shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector and

e. no lifting equipment may be left in the magazine without an operator.

(2) Where primer sensitive explosives are stored in a magazine that is a container the
following requirements shall be met :

a. shall be kept in the original packaging;

b. packaged explosives weighing around 25 kilograms shall be stored in

accordance with the requirements in Article 66 paragraph (1) and

c. shall have a capacity not exceeding 5,000 kilograms.

57
 Article 68
Storage of Explosive Ingredients

(1) Storage in magazines that are building :

a. the requirements of Article 66 paragraph (1) will apply to packaged explosive

ingredients weighing 30 kilograms , except that the height of stacks shall not
exceed 10 sacks while the width must not exceed 8 sacks;

b. the requirements of Article 67 paragraph (1), letter c will apply to all

explosive ingredients weighing more than 1,000 kilograms, and

c. motorised lifting equipment shall not be left in the magazine without the
operator.

(2) Storage in magazines that are containers :

a. shall be stacked neatly in order to ensure the free flow of air around the stacks
and

b. shall not exceed 20,000 kilograms.

(3) Storage of explosive ingredients in the original containers shall meet the
following requirements :

a. the container shall be placed only at the permitted location as required in

Article 57 paragraph (3) letter b and c;

b. containers shall be piled orderly and properly in order that the doors can be
opened.

c. prior approval shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector to create
stacks of more than two containers.

(4) Explosive ingredients in the form of liquid or in gel form may only be stored in a
magazine in the form of a tank.

Article 69
Storage of Detonators

(1) The stock of detonators shall equal the stock of explosives.

(2) Damaged detonators shall be immediately destroyed following the requirements

of the prevailing regulations.

58
(3) It is prohibited to stored detonators along with other explosive materials.

Article 70
Underground Storage

(1) All explosives kept underground shall be stored in explosive magazines. Where
the amount of explosives is less than 50 kilograms such explosives may be stored
in a container as specified in Article 60 paragraph (3).

(2) Explosives stored in underground explosives magazines shall not exceed the
quantity needed for two days and two nights, and the amount shall not exceed
5,000 kilograms.

(3) Where no underground magazine is made available and where usage exceeds 50
kilograms in a period of less than 24 hours, a temporary explosives magazine
shall be provided and it shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 71
Magazine Inspections

At least once per week, the contents of explosives magazines shall be inspected in detail
by the Technical Mine Manager or an authorised employee, and the findings shall be
registered in the explosives log book.

Part Five
Transportation

Article 72
Transportation Rules

(1) Explosives shall be delivered and stored in the magazine within 24 hours from
their arrival in the mining operation activities area.

(2) It is prohibited to transport explosives to or from an explosives magazine or

around the mine, except in the original unopened or sealed container used
specifically for that purpose. When there is any balance remaining in the
explosive container, it shall be returned immediately to the explosives magazine.

(3) The Chief Mine Inspector shall issue technical directives to regulate the
transportation, moving or forwarding of all types of explosives and detonators
within or outside the mining operational area.

59
(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall formulate company regulations providing for
the transportation, moving and forwarding of explosives in accordance with the
technical directives as intended in paragraph (1).

Part Six
Blasting

Article 73
Regulations for the Implementation
of Blasting Activities

(1) The Chief Mine Inspector shall issue technical directives regulating the
implementation of blasting work at the mine.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall formulate company regulations providing for
the implementation of blasting work at the mine as required in paragraph (1).

Article 74
Equipment and Materials

(1) At every mine where explosives are used equipment and materials required to
ensure the safe implementation of blasting activities shall be provided.

(2) Equipment provided by the Technical Mine Manager shall be used during
blasting work.

(3) Any Technical Mine Manager or employee handling explosives at any time shall :

a. ensure that all equipment, including vehicles used for any work related to
blasting is :

1) appropriate for the intended purpose thereof and

2) stored, inspected and maintained to ensure continued safe use.

b. ensure that the said explosives are handled safely.

(4) All blasting machines at the mine shall be equipped with a removable handle or
key without which it cannot be operated.

Article 75
Appointment and Qualifications
of the Blaster

60
(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint a person skilled and experienced in
blasting work.

(2) Person as required in paragraph (1) shall be no younger than 21 years old and
possess a Blasting License issued by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) The Blasting License shall only be valid for mines stated on the said license and
the name of the blaster shall be registered in the Mine Book.

(4) The permit will only be granted to a certified blaster.

(5) The Director General shall appoint a permanent committee for the examination of
blasters.

(6) The Director General shall create stipulations relating to the following :

a. working procedures of the examining committee;

b. the implementation of examinations;

c. qualifications of blaster course attendants;

d. blaster examination costs;

e. the classes of Blaster Certificates;

f. materials for the examination of blaster.

(7) Every blaster certificate granted by an authority in Indonesia or abroad may be

given recognition by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(8) Any certificate granted recognition as specified in paragraph (8) shall be equal in
value to a Blaster Certificate and may be used to obtain a Blaster License.

(9) Any blaster in possession of a Blasting License for any mine shall return the said
permit via the Technical Mine Manager to the Chief Mine Inspector no later than
one month after the party concerned is no longer employed.

61
 Article 76
Blaster Courses

(1) In order to obtain experience in blasting work, the Technical Mine Manager shall
provide education facilities to any person who will be assigned to blasting work
particularly those who have yet to show their capabilities as blasters.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall take safety measures to ensure that
prospective blasters work under the continuous strict supervision of a blaster
appointed for the purpose thereof.

(3) The Technical Mine Manager shall formulate a training program to be given to
prospective blasters and shall ensure that the said program is carried out properly.

Article 77
Blasting Work

(1) The Technical Mine Manager at any mine shall develop procedures for the use of
explosives that cover:

a. the proper use and safety of explosives and

b. the specific requirements for the use of explosives as specified by the Chief
Mine Inspector.

(2) The blaster who is assigned to carry out blasting or who supervises blasting work
shall ensure that every stage of the said work is carried out safely and in
accordance with the regulations specified by the Chief Mine Inspector

(3) It is prohibited to carry out blasting work except by a blaster.

(4) It is prohibited to fill a blast hole or blast a previously blasted hole, except for the
purpose of handling a misfire in accordance with the specific requirements.

(5) It is prohibited to remove a detonator lead, safety fuse or any other system from a
blast hole already loaded, and which is charged with a primer.

(6) It is prohibited to smoke or ignite flames within 10 meters of explosives.

(7) It is prohibited to use safety fuses for blasting at underground ore mines after the
date to be determined by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(8) Blasters who handle or supervise blasting shall ensure that no explosion results in
excessive blasting vibrations.

62
 Article 78
Sleeping Blasting

(1) Sleeping blasting may only be carried out in accordance with the following
requirements:

a. no detonator shall be used in the blast hole and

b. the area to undergo the sleeping blasting shall be secured.

(2) Approval shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector where a detonator is to
be used in a blast hole in the implementation of a sleeping blast.

Article 79
Misfires

(1) Where misfires occur the assigned blaster shall contact the supervisor who shall:

a. prohibit any person from entering the said hazardous area except the blaster or
any other appointed person;

b. take appropriate measures to determine the cause thereof and handle the said
misfire and

c. appoint an employee where necessary to take security measures or to prevent

the theft of explosives or triggers thereof.

(2) An incident shall be deemed to be a misfire where :

a. pre-blast testing indicates irreparable broken continuity, or

b. a blast hole or part thereof fails to explode at the point of blasting.

63
 Chapter III
The Working Environment

Part One

Article 80
General Requirements

(1) The Technical Mine Manager of any mine has the duty to ensure that personnel
are not exposed to health risks (due to airborne contaminants or harmful physical
and chemical agents).

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall develop a program for measuring airborne
contaminants, sampling for hazardous solids, as well as monitoring for noise,
lighting and vibrations at the mining work site and any other place in or around
the mine.

Part Two
Dust

Article 81
Prevention

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. take necessary measures to minimise the occurrence of dust caused by

drilling, blasting, crushing of ore and rock material, and other work activities
in the mine, as well as create company policies for dust suppression or
control.

b. require mine workers to wear the appropriate respiratory protective devices;

c. create company procedures on dust control at every work site, every loading
and stockpiling site, where ever materials are moved, every crushing site and
any transport road which may be hazardous due to the impaired visibility.

d. establish company procedures regarding mechanical ventilation for work

areas without airflow, dead-end shafts and any other place with poor
ventilation.

(2) At any time ore or rock material is loaded into trucks or moved at any work site
the said load shall be kept moist with water or adequately covered to prevent dust
becoming airborne.

64
(3) Any equipment used to reduce dust shall only be operated or moved by an
authorised employee.

(4) Where according to the Mine Inspector dust caused by mining work may harm or
endanger health and impair visibility, the said Mine Inspector may stipulate
measures to be carried out to prevent, reduce dust or protect workers from
inhaling such dust. The said stipulations shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

Article 82
Testing

(1) The Chief Mine Inspector may stipulate requirements for dust concentrations at
every work site including on the type of equipment used, the calculable dust
particle size and the allowable threshold values for dust types.

(2) The analysis methods to determine the free silica content in dust shall be
approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 83
Personal Protective Equipment

(1) Protection of workers from exposure to contaminated air shall be carried out as
best as possible by means of pollution prevention, eradicating dust using
ventilation fans or by means of diluting it with clean air. Where such control
measures are yet to be carried out, workers at the said site shall wear appropriate
respiratory protective devices.

(2) Where respiratory protective devices are used, respiratory selection, maintenance,
training, fitting, supervision, cleaning and use thereof shall meet the requirements
issued by a recognized authority.

Article 84
Combustible Dust

(1) Combustible dusts shall be cleaned away and not be allowed to accumulate on the
surface of any electrical equipment, buildings or any other facilities.

(2) The accumulation of airborne combustible dusts shall be prevented from reaching
hazardous levels.

(3) A schedule for the cleaning and disposal of piles of accumulated combustible
dusts shall be stipulated and implemented.

65
 Part Three
Noise and Vibrations

Article 85

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall take steps to reduce noise and vibration to
acceptable levels and shall make hearing protective equipment available.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide for limitations on employee working
hours in accordance with the work place noise levels when hearing protective
equipment is being worn.

(3) Any worker exposed to noise that exceeds threshold levels shall wear hearing
protective equipment.

(4) The Chief Mine Inspector shall stipulate the limits to be used as the criteria or
directive regarding noise and vibration levels permitted in the work place
environment.

(5) Based on the environment of the work place the Chief Mine Inspector shall make
provisions for the following :

a. a work place noise and vibration level measurement programme shall be

instituted and implemented.

b. the measuring carried out and the methods used in the said programme
including equipment and the analysis method used;

c. the time and frequency of measurements and

d. the location at which measurements are taken.

66
 Part Four
Hazardous and Noxious Materials

Article 86
Handling, Storage and Labelling

(1) Where acids or corrosive or noxious chemical compounds or other substances

which may endanger workers are produced, moved, used or stored in any work
area, the Chief Mine Inspector shall develop working guidelines to reduce the
danger to the smallest possible degree for the handling or storage of the said
materials.

(2) At any location where materials as described in paragraph (1) can be found,
conspicuous signs warning of the danger shall be posted and precautionary
measures shall be taken.

(3) Any bottle or any other receptacle containing acids or noxious chemicals, shall be
labelled according to the contents thereof.

(4) Materials that can create hazards if accidentally liberated from their containers
shall be stored in a manner that minimises the danger..

(5) Chemicals, including concentrated acids and alkalis, shall be stored in a manner
to prevent accidental contact between the said substances or with any other
substance which may cause serious reactions or which may produce hazardous
vapours or gases.

(6) Water or solutions at the processing mill or laboratory shall be considered as

poisons except where labelled “Potable Water”.

(7) The handling of chemicals shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures
or instructions from the manufacturer. Any employee handling such chemicals
shall be given instructions regarding the danger as well as the methods of
treatment where injury occurs.

Article 87
Hygiene and Health

(1) The Mine Inspector may request medical checks of workers, where noxious and
dangerous materials are used, particularly at the processing plant when there is
potential for endangering worker health.

(2) Glass and other laboratory equipment shall not be permitted to be used as eating,
drinking or cooking utensils.

67
(3) At any work place at which hazardous and noxious mixtures are used or
produced, neutralising agents and washing agents shall be made available in
sufficient quantities and number and stored in a conspicuous and reachable place
and a eye rinsing water tap must be installed. The packaging of the neutralising
agents and washing agents shall be labelled including instructions for the use of
the contents thereof.

(4) At the work place as required in paragraph (3), every supervisor and a number of
workers shall be trained in the administration of first aid specific to eye cleansers
and neutralising agents, at the very least one person per working shift.

Article 88
Prevention

(1) All hazardous materials and solutions shall be handled with care to reduce the
possibility of spillage.

(2) Containers of liquid ammonium or any chemical substance which may vaporise
and any chemical substance with hazardous vapours s shall not be filled beyond ¾
of their capacity in order to avoid the formation of excessive pressure.

(3) Every spillage shall be cleaned away and disposed of immediately. Spillage of
rapidly reacting or hazardous chemical substances shall be cautiously rinsed or
neutralised and cleaned away immediately.

Article 89
Personal Protective Equipment

(1) Where precautionary measures as stipulated in the company regulations cannot

completely provide for the total eradication of hazards, workers who remain
unprotected from the said hazards shall wear personal protective equipment.

(2) Workers who handle and mix dangerous chemicals shall always wear respiratory
protection and appropriate gloves.

(3) Additional precautionary measures shall be carried out when handling

concentrated lime solutions, pulp and hazardous chemicals to prevent direct
contact with the skin.

(4) Protective clothing for mine workers in laboratories shall be provided free of
charge and shall be kept clean and hygienic.

Article 90

68
 Other Precautionary Measures

(1) Reactive materials shall be stored in a sufficiently spacious room to prevent the
build up of heat.

(2) Assay rooms or any other room in which noxious gases may be formed shall have
a proper ventilation system.

(3) Extreme caution shall be taken when handling combustible chemicals or mixing
acid solutions.

Article 91

(1) Vapours, mist, smoke and exhaust gases shall be suppressed and kept to a level
not exceeding the prevailing Threshold Limit Value prior to disposal.

(2) Poisons used for or produced during any mining and processing activity shall be
labelled in such a way as to clearly describe the type of hazard and the necessary
precautionary measures.

(3) Radioactive materials shall always be properly sealed in order that workers are
protected from the danger of ionising radiation.

Chapter IV
Surface Mining Infrastructure

Part One
Structures, Buildings,
Access Ways and Egress

Article 92

(1) Every structure and building at the mining operation shall be built sufficiently
strong and sturdy and must be maintained to ensure continued safety.

(2) A safe access way shall be provided to every work site in or at any structure or
building.

(3) When any part of a structure or building such as the roof cannot support the
weight of any worker carrying out maintenance, conspicuous warning signs shall
be installed. A platform appropriate for use as a safe path shall be provided.

69
(4) When the traffic way or access way is obstructed by obstacles such as conveyors
or pipelines, an appropriate and permanent means of traversing such obstacles
shall be provided.

Article 93
Protection against Possible Falls
(1) When any person works from a height exceeding 2.5 meters, protection against
the possibility of a fall shall be provided by means of a fence or hand railing.
Where such means of protection are impractical, safety belts or safety harnesses
shall be worn or a safety net must be installed.

(2) When any person must work atop or inside a building and where due to height or
limited space the use of scaffolding, fencing or safety nets is impractical, a sturdy
anchor shall be used to suspend a safety harness, suspended floor or hanging
scaffold.

Article 94
Gantries

(1) The gantry shall be equipped with a gangway the width of which shall not be less
than 1 meter and the floor of which must have no holes or open panels. Where
the height of a gangway exceeds 1.5 meters above the floor, a fence or railing
shall be provided along the open side and the said gangway shall be fitted with
continuous kick boards the height of which shall not be less than 10 centimetres.

(2) If a gantry is used for both transport and walking, the two ways shall be separated
and only authorised persons shall be allowed in the transport way.

Article 95
Stairways, Hatchways
and Wall Openings

(1) Any entry (open hole or hatchway) in the floor of buildings or gantries shall be
fenced with standard hand railings and toe boards or provided with trap doors
opening upwards which protect the hole when open.

(2) Every stairway consisting of four or more steps shall be equipped with hand rails
and standard sized toe boards.

(3) Access ways to ledges or platforms which make falling possible from a height
exceeding 1.2 meters, shall be protected by a latch chain, drop bars or gates and
warning signs shall be posted.

70
 Article 96
The Use of Ladders

(1) Portable ladders shall only be used as a temporary means of reaching a work site
and shall not be used as a platform.

(2) Only portable ladders that conform to safety standards shall be used. Any ladders
that shows signs of damage or cracks shall not be used. All ladders shall be
checked regularly and maintained.

(3) Portable ladders shall be placed on an even and sturdy base and be rested against
a sufficiently sturdy support and the upper extremity shall protrude no less than 1
meter above the floor, except where equipped with safety railings. All ladders
shall be stood at a sufficiently safe incline to prevent sliding and shall be tied at
both the upper and lower extremities. The floors above and below the ladders
shall be free of obstacles while the ladders are being used.

(4) It is prohibited to use ladders in a horizontal position as a platform, gangway or

scaffolding.

(5) Ladders shall be stored away immediately after use.

Article 97
Silos and Bunkers

(1) Doorways or other hatchways used to enter silos, hopper or bunkers shall be
locked at all times and the keys shall be held by the appointed supervisor.

(2) Where the delivery chute becomes clogged, workers shall not be permitted to
enter the silo or bunker except where the supervisor has already made an
inspection to determine whether or not materials have become stuck against the
walls of the said delivery chute.

(3) Open silos or bunkers with bottom discharge shall be provided with metal
gratings completely covering the top opening. The metal gratings shall be
securely fixed and prevent persons from falling into the interior but allow
observation or probing of the material inside.

(4) Silos or bunkers containing combustible materials shall be made from fire proof
materials. Every light installed inside or above the bunker shall be fireproof. It is
prohibited to use electric heaters in silos or bunkers. Special safety measures
shall be taken where any material stored within the silo or bunker is capable of
producing noxious gases, combustible gases or any gas that may cause health
problems, and mixtures of dusts which may be explosive.

71
(5) Repair and maintenance work shall only be carried out when the silo or bunker is
completely empty.

(6) Where it is necessary for a person to enter any silo or bunker that remains un-
emptied, such action may only be carried out upon the order of the assigned
supervisor who shall guarantee that all feed points are closed and locked. Entry
into the silo or bunker shall only be from above and the worker shall remain at all
times above the material contained therein. A safety harness shall be worn at all
times and the safety cable shall be kept taut except in the case of automatic
locking cables.

Part Two
Lighting

Article 98
General Lighting

(1) Where any place is not sufficiently lit by sunlight, such a place shall be provided
with lighting.

(2) Lighting systems shall be maintained and cleaned regularly.

Article 99
Use of Open Flames

It is forbidden to use open flames at any place where flammable or combustible dust, gas,
vapours or dry wood are found. It is prohibited to use or place open flames in any place
where they may come into contact with workers or the equipment they are using.

Article 100
Emergency Lighting

(1) In places such as an engine room, openings, loading and unloading docks and the
like thereof, which without light may be hazardous, emergency lighting in
sufficient amounts shall be provided.

(2) The Mine Inspector may stipulate regulations on the provision of additional
lighting or emergency lighting for every site.

Article 101
Portable Lamps

72
Portable lamps shall be provided in sufficient numbers for the purpose of inspection and
examination in areas where no lighting is available.

Part Three
Prevention and Control
of Fire

Article 102
Classification of Fire

Fire shall be classified as follows :

a. Class A fire: a fire caused by the ignition of combustible material except metal.

b. Class B fire: a fire caused by the ignition of combustible liquids and gases.

c. Class C fire: a fire occurring on electrical equipment caused by an electrical

current.

Article 103
Extinguishing Fires

(1) Any worker observing any fire around him/her shall take immediate measures to
extinguish the said fire.

(2) Where the measures required by paragraph (1) of this Article are not possible, the
supervisor shall be informed immediately and all workers that may be endangered
shall be informed and instructed to escape. A fire alarm shall be set off.

Article 104
Prohibitions on Smoking
and the Use of Open Flames

(1) It is prohibited to smoke or use open flames when using, transporting, storing or
handling flammable liquids or gases including oil lubricants.

(2) Signs prohibiting smoking and the use of open flames shall be installed clearly at
fire or blasting hazardous areas.

Article 105
General Requirements

73
(1) Fire fighting equipment ready for immediate use shall be provided at each mining
company to:

a. extinguish the fire at an early stage;

b. extinguish the fires beyond their early stages.

(2) Fire extinguishers shall :

a. be provided in a type, size and number capable of extinguishing all classes of

fire and

b. be strategically placed, within easy reach, be clearly marked, be maintained,

and ready for use.

Article 106
Selection of Fire
Extinguishers

(1) Selection of fire extinguishers shall be appropriate to the class of any fire which
may occur :

a. Class A : fire extinguishers for Class A fires;

b. Class B : fire extinguishers for Class B fires, but may also be used for Class A
fires and

c. Class C : fire extinguishers for Class C fires, but may also be used for Class
A and Class B fires.

(2) The class, capacity and validation shall be inscribed on every fire extinguisher.

74
 Article 107
Placement of Fire
Extinguishing Equipment

(1) Portable fire extinguishers shall be hung or placed on an conspicuous and

reachable shelf. The top shall not exceed 1.5 meters in height and the bottom
shall not be lower than 80 centimetres from the floor.

(2) When fire extinguishers are not conspicuous, signs indicating the location of and
direction towards the said equipment shall be installed and shall be free from
obstacles.

(3) Spare fire extinguishers shall always be kept in a pre-determined place.

Article 108
Maintenance

(1) Fire extinguishers and any other equipment for the extinguishing of fires, all
supplementary equipment as well as any materials used in emergency situations,
shall always be maintained for ready use.

(2) Fire extinguishers shall always be fully filled to be ready for immediate use at any
time. Any worker using the said fire extinguishers shall report such use in order
that the fire extinguishers can be refilled.

(3) When refilling fire extinguishers, they shall first be completely cleaned.

(4) The date of refilling and the signature of the employee shall be recorded in a log
book and or on a label affixed to all fire extinguishers.

(5) All fire extinguishers shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.

(6) Where used as part of a fire fighting system, hydrants shall always be maintained
for ready use.

(7) Where using outside fire fighting teams Siamese connections shall be provided
that are suitable for use with all hydrants.

75
 Article 109
Inspections

(1) Fire extinguishers shall be inspected at least once per month to guarantee that
such extinguishers are full and ready for immediate use.

(2) At least once per year the working mechanisms, the amount and state of the
extinguishing agent, condition of the hose nozzle, and tank shall be examined to
determine that the said fire extinguisher will operate effectively.

(3) Fire extinguishers shall be hydrostatically tested to a minimum of 20 kilograms

per square centimetre, or 1.5 x the operating pressure, every five years or
according to the manufacturer’s specifications.

(4) A visual inspection for damage to any water pipe, valve, outlet, hydrant or hose
used as part of a fire fighting system shall be carried out at least every three
months, and tests to guarantee that the said fire extinguisher remains in good
working order shall be carried out at least once a year.

(5) Fire suppression systems shall be inspected at least once a year to guarantee that
the said system is functioning well.

(6) Employees who carry out inspections or testing as provided for in these
regulations shall certify that the inspection or testing has been carried out and the
date it was made.

(7) Notices regarding the hydrostatic testing as required in paragraph (3) of this
Article shall be kept on file until the said fire extinguisher is re-examined or is no
longer used.

Article 110
Housekeeping

(1) Cleanliness and orderliness at the work place shall be maintained both in and
around the mine or buildings as well as any other place of work.

(2) It is prohibited to stockpile solid or liquid wastes in large amounts which may
cause a fire hazard.

(3) Waste and rags containing flammable or combustible liquids shall be placed in a
covered fire proof receptacle made from metal.

(4) Spills or leaks of flammable or combustible liquids shall be immediately cleaned

or controlled to avoid a fire hazard.

76
(5) Used carbide receptacles shall be immediately cleaned. It is prohibited to smoke
or use open flames when washing such receptacles. Disposal of carbide residues
shall conform to prevailing regulations and legislation.

Article 111
Fire Hazard Areas

(1) Where, based on the opinion of the Technical Mine Manager or any authorised
employee, a fire hazard may be created at a working place by smoking or the use
of open flame lighting, matches (lighters) or any other apparatus which produces
heat or fire, the Technical Mine Manager or authorised employee shall declare the
said area to be fire hazardous.

(2) It is prohibited to smoke, to carry or use open flame lighting, use matches/lighters
or any other apparatus which produces heat or fire in fire hazardous areas.

(3) At any such fire hazardous area warning signs shall be installed and maintained
for the duration the said area is deemed fire hazardous.

Article 112
Storage of Combustible
Liquids and Materials

(1) Petroleum, lubricating oils, grease and other combustible oil products and liquids
shall be stored in a closed receptacle and separated from other materials.

(2) The facility for the storage of lubricating oils and grease, and any other type of oil
shall be constructed to be fire resistant and be sufficiently ventilated.

(3) It is prohibited to store petrol, lubricating oils, grease, and any other type of oil
together with combustible materials. Where storage in one building cannot be
avoided, a fire resistant partitioning wall shall be installed.

Article 113
Heat

Any source of heat which may cause fire shall be separated from combustible materials.

77
 Article 114
Battery Charging Room

(1) The battery charging room shall be ventilated with sufficient air flow to prevent
the accumulation of hydrogen gas.

(2) It is prohibited to smoke, use open flames or carry out any other activity which
may cause fire in the battery charging room.

(3) Signs prohibiting smoking or the use of open flames shall be installed clearly in
the battery charging room.

(4) When possible electrical equipment shall not be installed in the battery charging
room.

Article 115
Buildings or Rooms for the Storage of
Flammable or
Combustible Liquids

(1) Surface buildings or rooms for the storage of flammable or combustible liquids
including grease, shall be sufficiently ventilated to prevent the accumulation of
ignitable vapours/gases.

(2) The said building or room shall have a degree of fire resistance of no less than
one hour.

(3) The storage of flammable or combustible liquids in buildings or rooms with the
potential for fire endangering human life shall be fitted with early fire detection
equipment and a fire alarm warning any person threatened by a fire.

Article 116
Storage of Oxygen Cylinders
and Combustible Gases

(1) It is prohibited to store oxygen cylinders in any room in which flammable or

combustible gases or liquids or grease are stored. All oxygen cylinders shall be
stored in an upright position.

(2) Gauges and regulators used on oxygen, acetylene, and liquified petroleum gas
cylinders shall be clean and free from lubricants and grease.

78
(3) During the transportation of oxygen, acetylene and liquefied petroleum gas
cylinders not in current use or when welding work is complete, the cylinder valve
shall be closed and the safety cover attached.

Article 117
Preparation for Pipe or
Container Welding

Before welding cutting or applying heat with an open flame on pipe lines or containers
that have contained flammable or combustible liquids and solids, the said piping or
container shall :

a) be dried, be ventilated and cleaned of remaining oils;

b) the covering shall be opened to prevent the increase of pressure when exposed to
heat;

c) be filled with inert gas or water where possible and

d) be examined to determine the presence of ignitable gases using detection

equipment prior to work being carried out on the said piping or containers and
whenever worked upon regular examinations shall be carried out.

Article 118
Refuelling Internal Combustion Engines

All internal combustion engines shall be turned off when being refuelled.

Article 119
Blacksmith Shop

(1) Blacksmith shops shall be at least 60 meters from underground openings and fan
installations used for intake air.

(2) Blacksmith shops shall be equipped with exhaust vents over every forge and
ventilated to prevent the accumulation of products of combustion.

(3) At the end of every working shift, the blacksmith shops and surrounding area
shall be inspected to determine the presence of any smouldering fires.

(4) Heating equipment shall be properly positioned so as not to cause a fire when
overheating occurs. Where considered necessary protective apparel for sparks
shall be provided.

79
 Article 120
Fire Extinguishers for Specific Work

(1) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be provided in close proximity to diesel or

electric engines or any engine driven by electricity.

(2) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be an integrated part of any portable welding
equipment. It is prohibited to perform welding or cutting work unless a fire
extinguishers is provided at the work place.

(3) When destroying explosives, fire extinguishers shall be provided on site.

(4) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be provided in every motorised vehicle of

four or more wheels.

Article 121
Emergency Exits

(1) All buildings shall be provided with sufficient and well maintained means of
escape, easy to travel and having communication with all rooms regularly
occupied by persons, including :

a. emergency exit stairs built to be fireproof and fitted with a fireproof door at
each story including any basement, and

b. a fire escape at the exterior of a building made from metal or any non
combustible material and fitted with railings and landings at any level directly
connected to the interior via a metal door or any other fireproof material.

(2) Where any space, room or part of a building which due to the nature of the
equipment or process found therein, presents the possible danger of fire or the
release of steam, the said building shall be fitted with no less than two separately
located and similar exits.

(3) It is prohibited to obstruct the exits from any building and doors to a stairwell or
smoke proof enclosure shall be open. All doors shall open towards the
escapeway.

Article 122
Fire Fighting Teams

(1) Mining companies possessing fire fighting equipment shall form fire fighting
teams.

80
(2) Every member of any fire fighting team shall be given adequate training.

(3) The fire fighting team shall make regular inspections on all mining activities and
facilities.

(4) No less than one member of a fire fighting team shall be present at every working
shift.

(5) At surface work sites, apart from members as required in paragraph (4) of this
Article, no less than 20 percent of the total number of workers and security staff
shall understand and be capable of using fire extinguishers.

(6) Appropriate rescue equipment shall always be available to those who are
expected to need it, and instructions on the use thereof shall be given.

Article 123
Fire Fighting Methods
and Systems

(1) The Technical Mine Manager or any authorised employee shall stipulate methods
for fighting fires, evacuation and rescues in emergency situations, and carry out
regular training.

(2) The system or method for fire fighting shall be stipulated in order to be able to
provide immediate warnings to any person who may be exposed to any fire
hazard.

(3) Fire hazard signals shall always be well maintained in a condition ready for
immediate use and be tested regularly.

Part Four
Safety in Transport Operations

Paragraph 1
Railway Transport

Article 124

(1) The stipulations in this regulation shall apply to any vehicle designed to travel on
rails and which is drawn by a locomotive.

(2) Railway transport used outside of the mining region which connects to public
transportation of goods and people shall comply with the regulations of the
relevant authorities.

81
(3) Railway employees shall be in possession of all instructions regarding safety and
the work regulations that apply to rail transportation.

(4) It is prohibited to carry passengers on any rail travelling vehicle except shunting
guards or any person undertaking maintenance who boards the rail vehicles or
locomotive as part of his/her duties as a rail worker.

(5) Every worker shall comply with the train transport operation regulations created
by the Technical Mine Manager (Transport Regulations), including the following
prohibitions :

a. it is prohibited to carry people inside rail vehicles transporting minerals or

equipment except for the transportation of the injured;

b. it is prohibited to board or alight from any moving train;

c. it is prohibited to travel on the outside of any rail vehicles except where such
rail vehicles are fitted with a foot board and hand railings and

d. it is prohibited to travel between coupled rail vehicles or between trains.

Article 125
Safe Systems of Transport

The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that the specifications of the transportation
system are made and a duplicate is forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector. Such
specifications shall include :

a. a map of the transport network, including gradients, the radius of curves and other
important data;

b. a detailed description of the amount and type of equipment to be used with

technical details.

c. applications for permits for passenger transportation shall be accompanied by a

fully detailed code of operating practice and the Chief Mine Inspector may
undertake amendments prior to granting the permit.

82
 Article 126
Transport Rules

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall prepare transport rules that cover the
following :

a. track construction, elevation, gradient, rail size, points and the like;

b. curve radius and elevation, including check rails where the radius is less than
25 meters;

c. the rail connection system, number of bolts or welding details;

d. details of track side clearances or freeway which must not be less than 60
centimetres from any part of the vehicle, shall be safe for goods which
protrude and swaying at bends;

e. provision of manned or automatic gates or barriers or other safety measures at

road or pathway crossings or for railway tracks that pass through residential
areas;

f. prohibition of, or arrangements for pushing of trains or the simultaneous

pushing and hauling of trains including communications between drivers.

g. lighting requirements where operating after sunset or during periods of poor

vision caused by bad weather.

h. front and rear warning lights shall be attached. When shunting, the rear lights
shall be removed, where the shunter precedes the said train.

i. stipulations and operation of safety equipment, coupling poles, sprags and the
like. Handling, controlling or moving rail vehicles along rail tracks, point
supervision and operation;

j. the qualifications, experience and age to become locomotive drivers no less

than 21 years old for drivers and 18 years old for guards and shunters.

k. details of fixed signals as well as other signalling system methods and codes,
both visual as well as with audible, both inside or outside the locomotive or
train;

l. rail vehicle coupling and loading as well as stipulations on maximum loads

and train length;

m. speed limits and rules for curves or hazardous places;

83
 n. special prohibitions or regulations for the transportation of hazardous
materials;

o. shunting or overtaking a train on adjacent tracks;

p. measures to prevent derailment of rail vehicles and runaways as well as

measures that must be carried out when such incidents occur to prevent
accidents involving workers or members of the community;

q. collision precautionary measures;

r. regular inspection of all train tracks and signals as well as drainage channels
and the inspection and maintenance of locomotives, rail vehicles and other
mechanical equipment;

s. the movement and control of vehicles by hand and

t. safe methods to return derailed vehicles to the tracks.

(2) Additional regulations for electric rail or electric trolley wire systems,

a. independent continuity connection across all rail joints. The minimum height
to overhead power lines shall be no less than 5 meters.

b. precautionary measures where workers are underneath overhead power lines.

c. prohibitions on loading or adjusting loads on locomotives or trains standing

below live conductors;

d. precautionary measures against short circuiting or the arcing of electrical fires

to surrounding metal objects and

e. means for isolation of overhead power lines or live rails and measures that
must be taken when overhead power lines are broken.

(3) Transport rules as specified in these regulations must be available to the Mines
Inspectors, a copy posted at the mine office and a copy must be issued to every
transport worker employed on the system. The Mine Inspector shall have the
authority to require any changes in the transport rules which he considers
necessary to ensure the safety of the operation.

Article 127
Locomotives

84
(1) Steam locomotives or compressed air locomotives including ancillary
compressors and brake engines shall fulfil the requirements of pressure vessels
and pressurised machinery.

(2) Where two locomotives are coupled with linked controls the two shall be
considered as one unit, whereas where two locomotives without linked controls
are used in tandem, a code of signals between drivers shall be specified.

(3) During operation the locomotive driver shall remain at the controls and shall be
capable of reaching the brakes and shall always monitor pressure in the braking
system.

(4) Where a locomotive is left unguarded or left idle for a long period of time, the
parking brakes shall be used and all controls must be set at neutral. Diesel
engines or petrol driven engines shall be turned off, electricity in electric
locomotives shall be cut off and pantographs or conductor arms shall be released
from live power lines.

Paragraph 2
Aerial Tramways

Article 128

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall be responsible for all installations and the
equipment thereof as well as any buildings related to aerial tramways.

(2) Aerial tramway installations may only be constructed where the Chief Mine
Inspector has approved the route and details of the said installation.

(3) Aerial tramways for the transport of mine workers to or from their work site shall
require the permission of the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 129
Maintenance and Inspections

(1) Stipulations for people boarding aerial tramways for the sole purpose of
inspection and maintenance of any part of the said installation, shall be made with
the condition that the following requirements are fulfilled :

a. a special cable car shall be used that :

1) cannot be tipped;

85
 2) is enclosed for 1.2 meters above the floor in order to prevent any person or
article projecting outside the conveyance;

3) is fitted with sturdy hand railings that are easily reached by any person
inside;

4) is properly made so as to prevent passengers being caught on any part of

the suspension wheel and

5) is fitted with doors that cannot be opened outwards.

b. it is prohibited to board an aerial tramway vehicle alone. The maximum

number of people boarding together in any aerial tramway vehicle shall be
stipulated by a Supervisor responsible therefor.

c. only one vehicle shall be used at any time for the transportation of people;

d. communications equipment between passengers and the operator shall be

provided and

e. it is prohibited to transport people during bad weather.

(2) A daily inspection and maintenance schedule shall be carried out by a person
designated therefor whose name shall be recorded in the Mine Book by the
Technical Mine Manager.

Article 130
Construction of the
Aerial Tramway

(1) Positive action type braking and the equipment thereof shall be of a type which
operates automatically when the electrical current is interrupted, to prevent the
aerial tramway cables and vehicles moving in reverse.

(2) Every connection on the rail cables should be designed to offer minimum
resistance to the passage of trolley wheels.

(3) The towers or pylons shall be protected from the possibility of being damaged by
swaying conveyances.

(4) A bridge, safety net or any other means of protection shall be built where aerial
tramways cross over any road, railway line, pathway or buildings.

(5) Direct communications shall be available between the terminals and immediate
stations.

86
 Article 131
Cables, Pulleys and Aerial
Tramway Vehicles

(1) Hauling cables shall have a safety factor of no less than five times, and the track
cable shall have a safety factor of four times the maximum calculated load under
normal operating conditions.

(2) All cables shall be examined and lubricated regularly in accordance with the
maintenance schedule.

(3) Details of inspections, lubricating, replacement or repair of any cable shall be

recorded in the cable book by an employee whose name shall be recorded in the
mine book.

(4) Based on the records in the cable book, the Technical Mine Manager shall
evaluate the safe life of the ropes and replace them accordingly. The life of ropes
shall not exceed 5 years for hauling cables and 15 years for track cables except
otherwise stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) No rope used in a ropeway shall be knotted or spliced except for the purpose of
joining an endless rope or for forming a thimble splice.

(6) Support pulley wheels on all tramways shall be maintained to rotate freely and to
ensure the haul ropes work properly in the groove.

(7) Any rope clamps on any aerial tramway vehicle that ceases to hold securely shall
be immediately replaced.

Article 132
Aerial Tramway Operation

(1) Cable towers or pylons which exceed 20 meters in height above the surface of the
earth, shall at the highest point be equipped with a red warning light. Cable
towers and pylons above 40 meters shall be equipped with a red warning light at
the mid section. The pylons shall also be painted in alternating red and white.
All lights shall be lit when dark and during bad weather.

(2) Every pylon shall be fitted with a lightning conductor which shall always be in
good working order.

(3) Aerial tramway vehicles shall be evenly loaded and the capacity of which must
not be exceeded. Goods being transported shall not project above the top of the
said aerial tramway vehicle.

87
 a. the feeding chutes shall be regulated so as to prevent spillage during filling;

b. aerial tramway vehicles already loaded shall be operated slowly to prevent

swaying;

c. aerial tramway vehicles shall be cleaned regularly cleaned of sticking material

to prevent imbalance of the aerial tramway when empty.

(4) The driving engine of any aerial tramway installation used to transport people
shall be continuously attended when in operation.

(5) It is prohibited to be below an aerial tramway or any object which is suspended

from any lifting appliance.

Article 133
TRANSPORT RULES FOR ROPEWAYS

The Technical Mine Manager shall stipulate transportation regulations that cover safe
working procedures for any aerial tramway system and copies thereof shall be given to
any person assigned to any part of the operation of the said aerial tramway system.

Paragraph 3
Track Tramways and Inclines

Article 134

(1) This section shall apply to any mining transportation system for vehicles that
travel along tracks, are hauled by cable and any type of motive power including
gravity.

(2) It is prohibited to assign any person to work on any transport system, except
where the said person has been given instructions regarding safety and operation
of the said transportation system.

(3) No person shall be carried by, nor ride upon any vehicle or any other part of the
system except where permitted by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) Any application for a special permit to transport people shall be lodged by the
Technical Mine Manager including detailed specifications of the transportation
system, mechanical and electrical equipment and a code of operating practices to
be adopted.

88
(5) The Chief Mine Inspector may require modifications to any part of the system or
code of practice to ensure safety of persons carried.

Article 135
(Track Tramway) Transport Rules

(1) To ensure the safe operation of any transportation system, the Technical Mine
Manager shall develop detailed transportation regulations covering any aspect
related to the operation of transportation and which shall include special
regulations for :

a. the construction standards for the rail tracks, the rail gauge, gradients, curve
radius, track supports, check rails at curves, rail connections, drainage
channels.

b. the minimum clearances between the vehicle and any track side fixtures or
obstruction which shall not be less than 60 centimetres and must allow for
swinging of the vehicle;

c. preventive measures where the transportation system crosses roads or

travelways;

d. maximum speeds;

e. maximum loads and the maximum number of vehicles in any train;

f. the need for lighting to work after sunset or in reduced visibility in bad
weather;

g. warning lights at the front of the locomotive;

h. the use of safety equipment

i. pushing the tram cars by hand and shunting or overtaking;

j. signalling methods and codes used;

k. the age and qualifications of locomotive drivers and transport employees shall
not exceed 21 years and 18 years respectively;

l. the transportation of loads in large amounts or hazardous materials;

m. precautionary measures against derailed and runaway rail vehicles to prevent

danger to workers and others and

89
 n. daily inspections of all rail tracks, signals, and drainage channels as well as
testing of the driving machinery, rail vehicles and all mechanical, electrical
equipment, ropes, chains and attachments.

(2) Transport rules must be available to the Mine Inspector, the copies shall be
displayed at the mining office, and shall also be forwarded to any transport
worker working on the said transport system.

(3) The Mine Inspector shall have the authority to make amendments to the
transportation regulations, where in his/her judgement such amendments are
necessary to ensure safe operation of the said transportation.

Article 136
Signals and Other
Precautionary Measures

(1) Any transport system operating both on the surface and partly underground in a
mine shall comply with the stipulations and requirements in the surface mining
regulations and every signal ruling shall be consistent with the entire system.

(2) Every system shall be controlled only by audio or visual signals sent to the
driver’s position on the machinery, and at the same time be repeated at every
midway station or terminal. Copies of the signalling regulations shall be
displayed at any place from where signals are normally transmitted.

(3) Every crossing of roads or pedestrian pathways shall be equipped with safety
barriers or other safety devices which shall closed whenever the transport system
is passing and audio or visual warning signals shall be given during the duration
of the crossing.

(4) Safety equipment for runaway tram cars shall work automatically.

90
 Article 137
Self Acting or Gravity System

(1) Any system operated by gravity and controlled by means of braking equipment on
the operating drum or pulley shall meet the following additional stipulations :

a. the operating brake must be separated from the parking brake and both shall
be capable of supporting the maximum load and capable of stopping the
system at maximum speeds and loads.

b. the operating brake shall be of the dead-man type which automatically

assumes the stop position unless held off by the brakeman;

c. the engine and the braking gears shall be made sufficiently strong and be
protected from collisions with vehicles that may damage the said system;

d. during any loading or unloading, the brakes shall always be in use;

e. loading and unloading work on any transport vehicle that makes use of the
gravity system shall not be carried out simultaneously at the top or bottom
sections and

f. the brake operator shall only operate the transport vehicle upon receipt of the
signals from the two stations.

Article 138
Cables and Pulleys

(1) In any system which operates partly underground, the rope safety factors shall
meet the safety factors for shaft hoist cables. For other systems, the hauling
cables shall have a safety factor of no less than 5 times the maximum calculated
load.

(2) All cables shall be inspected and lubricated regularly in accordance with the
requirements of the maintenance schedule, and the findings of such inspections
shall be recorded in the rope book by an employee whose name is recorded in the
Mine Book.

(3) The hauling cable shall be sufficiently supported throughout the length of the
system by idler pulleys which shall be maintained to rotate freely and where
necessary the haul rope must be guided onto the pulleys.

(4) At every curve, bends or undulations support pulleys shall be installed to prevent
the rope rubbing any fittings or swinging dangerously.

91
 Paragraph 4
Other Vehicles

Article 139
General Application

This section shall apply to any vehicle driven mechanically or the like thereof including
vehicles hauled by trailers that are used as mining equipment but which are not :

a. designed to be used on rail tracks or along cables;

b. controlled by a pedestrian and

c. motorcycles.

Article 140
Vehicle Construction
and Equipment

(1) The construction and equipment of vehicles that operate on public roads shall
meet the requirements issued by the authorised authority.

(2) All vehicles shall be constructed in such a way as to meet the standards for
operating load and shall only be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.

(3) Vehicles with a gross weight (including trailers and loads) exceeding 16 tons shall
be provided with dual braking systems to prevent failure on one axle from being
transferred to any other.

(4) Trailers with a gross weight exceeding 750 kilograms or more than half the
weight of the towing vehicle shall be fitted with their own braking system which
shall operate automatically and where the gross weight exceeds 3500 kilograms
such trailers shall be fitted with a braking system that can be controlled from the
towing vehicle.

(5) Every transport vehicle or trailer having a rear end ground clearance exceeding 75
centimetres shall be provided with a protective guard at that height as to prevent
other vehicles or objects from being caught or from running into the
undercarriage.

92
(6) Brakes installed in any vehicle shall be capable of stopping the vehicles when
fully loaded and be capable of safely controlling the vehicle in steep areas when
climbing or descending.

(7) Any vehicle equipped with limited rearward visibility shall be provided with
audible reverse warning which automatically sounds whilst reverse gear is
engaged.

(8) The windows in the driver cabin shall be fitted with safety glass and shall always
be clean. Vehicle windows which may be hit by rock particles shall be fitted with
safety shields on the outside.

(9) It is prohibited to make any changes to the vehicle cabin that may obstruct the
drivers view.

(10) It is prohibited to drive the vehicle between sunset and sunrise or at any time of
reduced vision in bad weather, except where fitted :

a. with sufficient lighting which enables the driver to see ahead and behind to a
safe distance;

b. with lights or signals that shine sufficiently to indicate the size of the vehicle
and

c. with danger warning lights.

(11) The cabin of every vehicle shall be provided with safe doors and where the height
of the cabin floor exceeds 1.8 meters from the ground, two safe exits shall be
provided for the driver.

(12) All vehicles shall be provided with 2 rear view mirrors and on large vehicles with
limited rear visibility additional rear-view mirrors shall be provided.

(13) The vehicle cabin shall be designed or equipped with equipment that is capable of
protecting the driver from excessive noise, dust or exhaust fumes.

(14) Every vehicle or trailer used at the mine that is equipped with a tipping body shall
be fitted with devices to prevent the body collapsing from the raised position.
These devices shall be independent of the tipping mechanism and shall not be
operable from inside the cab.

(15) Vehicles operating in areas where there exists the potential for overturning or
falling objects shall :

a. be fitted with a strong cabin construction;

93
 b. be fitted with safety belts both for the driver and any passenger and

c. be fitted with hand grips for any passenger.

Article 141
Roadways

(1) All roadways to be used by vehicles at mines shall be provided with clear signs.
No vehicles shall operate except on designated transport roads.

(2) The minimum radius and maximum road inclination shall be in accordance with
the capabilities of the vehicles being used.

(3) Adequate berms shall be built at open edges of roads along steep slopes.

(4) Roadway surfaces should wherever practicable be coated to hold back erosion
and or to prevent sliding.

(5) All straight roads should be crosslevel and any elevation on the outside of the
curves shall not be such as to effect the stability of high or loaded vehicles.

(6) Sufficient illumination shall be provided in working areas and at strategic places
on haul roads to ensure the safety of pedestrians, particularly where haul roads
cross travel ways.

(7) Any haul road passing under any overhead obstruction shall have clear notices
giving warning of the obstruction and the vertical clearance. Warning notices and
barriers shall be provided where any overhead electricity line crosses a haulroad.

Article 142
Driver Qualifications and Obligations

(1) A person may operate a vehicles at a mine where the following requirements have
been fulfilled :

a. must be no less than 18 years of age;

b. must have been appointed by the Technical Mine Manager to drive specific
vehicles and

c. must have been given training and have been declared a competent driver by
the Technical Mine Manager.

94
(2) A driver of any vehicle equipped with a tipping body shall ensure that if the body
is raised for any purpose other than routine unloading it shall be secured by the
independent devices provided.

(3) The driver shall make use of any equipment provided at the unloading dock to
prevent the said vehicle from overturning, rolling or moving.

(4) Any driver at any mining operation shall comply with the traffic signs as
stipulated by the Technical Mine Manager.

(5) Before leaving the vehicle, the driver shall be sure that the vehicle is turned off
and locked and safe thus preventing accidental motion.

(6) Prior to travelling along descending roads, the vehicle shall always be driven
slowly and using the lowest gear at all times, except where the said vehicle is
being towed.

(7) A driver shall not set any vehicle in motion before giving audible warning and
ensuring that no person is in the danger area of the vehicle.

(8) At the beginning of every work shift every driver shall undertake an inspection of
the outer parts of the vehicle and test the controls and particularly the braking
capability.

Article 143
Inspections and Maintenance

A maintenance schedule of all vehicles at the mine shall be formulated which regulates
the inspection, maintenance and repair of all vehicles.

Article 144
Safe Working Procedures

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall regulate traffic at the mine and install the
necessary traffic signs to inform drivers of :

a. the direction of traffic;

b. speed limits;

c. vehicle height limits;

d. inclines and descents;

95
 e. parking and non parking areas and other matters related to the safety of the
system of transport.

(2) During loading and unloading work and work involving tipping of loads, road
ways shall be one way.

(3) Drivers may overtake other vehicles along designated roads.

(4) Mine workers permitted to walk or to be along any transport road or at any
loading or unloading site shall wear brightly coloured fluorescent coats.

Article 145
Stockpiles

(1) Whenever waste or minerals are stockpiled, such work shall be supervised to
ensure that the stockpiling vehicle remains only in designated areas.

(2) Over edge tipping by vehicles should be avoided and a berm or heap of material
maintained at the tip edge.

(3) Where over edge tipping is permitted stop blocks should be provided to prevent
vehicles from overturning or over running the tip edge.

(4) Stockpiling work shall be supervised by a stockpiling supervisor who shall

designate stockpiling sites, supervise vehicles moving in reverse and shall be
responsible for the inspection of the sturdiness of the stockpiling cliff edge.

(5) Stockpiling work shall be avoided when dark or at times of an unclear field of
vision except where lighting is provided which guarantees safety and a clear field
of vision.

(6) The driver shall remain in the vehicle at the stockpiling area.

(7) Only stockpiling supervisors shall be permitted to be at the stockpiling area and
the said supervisor shall bear a brightly coloured fluorescent coat.

Article 146
Transport Rules

(1) At every mine the Technical Mine Manager shall determine Transport Rules and
the installation of traffic signs regarding the following transport operating
procedures :

a. methods for the safe use of vehicles;

96
 b. traffic direction, speed limits, load limits;

c. hazardous or unusual loads;

d. vehicle service and towing or pushing vehicles;

e. the distance between vehicles on transport roads;

f. loading and unloading;

g. rules for pedestrians;

h. tire handling;

i. passengers and the transportation of workers and

j. training and driving permits.

(2) Transport Rules must be available to the Mine Inspector. The Chief Mine
Inspector has the authority to make changes to any Transport Rule if he considers
it necessary for the safety of the operation.

Paragraph 5
Belt Conveyors

Article 147

(1) It is prohibited to use production conveyors to transport people.

(2) Where conveyors are used to transport people approval shall be obtained from the
Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Where conveyorways are used as regular travelways, such travelways shall be
adequately illuminated and fences shall be provided to protect persons from
material that may fall from the belt. Such travelways shall be at least 700 mm
wide.

(4) It is prohibited to wall along a conveyor except where necessary for the purpose
of maintenance work and the conveyor shall be turned off and the source of the
current locked out.

(5) It is prohibited to traverse an operating conveyor except at places designated

therefor. Overpasses equipped with hand railings shall be provided at 500 meter
intervals along the length of the conveyor system.

97
 Article 148
Stopping and Warning Devices in an
Emergency Situation

(1) Every operated conveyor shall be fitted with an emergency cord at easily reached
locations along the length of the conveyor, the function of which shall be to stop
the conveyor when pulled.

(2) Where the entire length of the conveyor is visible including from the operating
booth, the operator shall look to ensure that all persons are in a safe place prior to
operating the conveyor. In other cases, an audible or visual warning system shall
be installed and sounded or operated prior to the conveyor being operated.

(3) Where the conveyor is operated by means of remote control or automatically, the
said conveyor shall be operated in order from the sending end to the receiving end
of the system and every conveyor system shall be fitted with warning signals prior
to operation.

(4) All automatic, tele-automatic and remote control systems shall be fitted with a
inter-locking system to cut electricity where damage occurs during the operation.

Article 149
Safety Guards

(1) The head pulley and tail pulley on conveyors shall be fitted with a safety guard of
a height no less than the height of the head pulley or tail pulley.

(2) Overhead belt conveyors shall be provided with safety guards. No person shall be
allowed to be below such belts except for maintenance and cleaning operations..

Article 150
Maintenance

(1) It is prohibited to manually shift a drive belt while in motion unless the machines
are provided with a mechanical shifter.

(2) Belts shall not be guided onto power-driven moving pulleys with the hands except
on slow moving belts especially designed for hand feeding.

(3) It is prohibited to clean any pulley and conveyor by hand where the said conveyor
is in operation. Remote lubricating facilities shall be provided.

(4) It is prohibited to grease any belt by hand when in operation, except where using
remote greasing methods.

98
(5) It is prohibited to clean under any conveyor in operation except where the section
has been fenced off for safety.

Article 151
Conveyor Bridges
and Overburden Spreaders

(1) Structural members of conveyor bridges, overburden spreaders, excavating

machines together with ladders and platforms shall be cleaned prior to the
commencement of every working shift.

(2) Conveyor bridges and overburden spreaders should be equipped with measuring
instruments, limit switches, signalling and intercommunication devices, which
shall always be in good working order. In addition to automatic brakes the bridge
undercarriages shall also be fitted with hand brakes.

(3) Conveyor bridges and overburden spreaders shall be fitted with automatic
instruments to measure wind velocity and direction continuously which shall be
connected to an emergency signalling system and the pulley or support chains
control system of the overburden spreader.

(4) Conveyor lines on conveyor bridges and overburden spreaders shall be provided
with servicing platforms guarded on both sides. Effective guards shall be
installed around every counterweight located close to traffic roads or travel-ways.

(5) When overburden spreaders of the walking or rail-walking type are in motion, it
is prohibited for transport vehicles, machinery or any other equipment or person
to cross under the bridge cantilever.

(6) It is prohibited for any conveyor bridges to approach any building or mining
equipment or transport equipment to within a distance of 1 meter or to operate in
a position above other mining and transport equipment.

(7) The vertical distance between the end of the dumping cantilever of any conveyor
bridges and the crest of any stockpiling stack shall be no less than 3 meters. For
overburden spreaders of the cantilever belt conveyor type which move
periodically, the said distance shall not be less than 1.5 meters. Where the said
stockpile shows signs of collapsing or sliding, the conveyor bridge shall be
immediately moved from the danger area.

(8) In bad weather, storms, heavy rain or fog, or when visibility is less than 25
meters, the passage of workers or work on the conveyor bridge should be
suspended. Conveyor bridge railway tracks shall not be used when they are under
water.

99
(9) When undertaking repair work on conveyor bridges, it is prohibited to
simultaneously disassemble the automatic brakes and hand brakes.

Paragraph 6
Water Transportation

Article 152

(1) Every application to use waterways or piers located in any waterway system for
the transportation of people, goods or minerals at the mine, shall be forwarded to
the Chief Mine Inspector, and shall include :

a. copies of permits issued by the authorised authorities and

b. detailed maps and location maps of the pier.

(2) Any matter not covered in the regulations issued by the authorised water traffic
authorities shall be provided for by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Except where otherwise stipulated by authorised water traffic authorities,

responsibility for construction standards, the maintenance and safety of water
vehicles operated by mining companies in waterways, shall reside with the Chief
Mine Inspector. Such water vehicles shall comply with these regulations and any
other requirements considered necessary in the interests of safety.

Paragraph 7
Air Transportation

Article 153

(1) Every application to use air transport for the purposes of transporting people at
mines, or goods or stipulations on airport facilities for airlines or helicopters shall
be forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector, and must include the following :

a. copies of permits issued by the authorised authorities and

b. detailed maps and location maps of the airport.

(2) Any matter related to air transportation or mining airports not provided for in the
regulations of the related air traffic authorities shall be the responsibility of the
Chief Mine Inspector.

100
 Paragraph 8
Cranes

Article 154
Construction, Equipment and Erection

(1) Every crane shall be of sound construction, suitable material free from defect and
of an adequate strength for the intended loads and shall be well maintained.

(2) Every crane shall be fitted with :

a. a safe means of access and egress for the operator from the cabin installed in
the said crane and ;

b. danger indicators to warn people endangered of any moving crane.

(3) Every crane that is electrically operated shall be fitted with :

a. means by which the power conductors for the crane can be safely
disconnected from the source of electrical supply and

b. an electric switch or circuit breaker which is capable of disconnecting the

electricity safely from inside the cabin despite being at maximum power
except where the collectors can be safely released.

(4) Any crane powered mechanically and used as a lifting tackle at the mine, shall be
fitted with an efficient catch or brake.

(5) The safe work load of every crane shall be written clearly on the said apparatus.

(6) Every crane shall be fitted with an automatic load indicator or other device which
indicates the working loads at the corresponding jib angles and radii of the load.

(7) Loading machines or excavators used as cranes shall in the case of :

a. front bucket types, have eyebolts permanently fitted, tested and marked with
the safe working load, and

b. back hoe types, have eyebolts permanently fitted, and tested at full outreach
conditions and be marked with the safe work load at that radius.

(8) Forks and transport trucks and the like thereof which are capable of lifting work
loads higher than the height of the operator, or are operated in areas where stocks
are higher than the operator’s head shall be fitted with additional overhead
guards.

101
(9) It is prohibited to build or rebuild any cranes once dismantled or relocated except
where carried out by a competent person assigned and in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.

(10) Every rail or railway track upon which moves any crane must be of an adequate
size, shall be properly laid and shall have an even track surface and be well
maintained.

Article 155
Safe Working Procedures

(1) The work place of every crane shall be levelled, cleaned and inspected by the
person responsible therefor.

(2) It is prohibited to use cranes or lifting tackle except in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with the lifting capacity thereof.

(3) It is prohibited to over burden any crane beyond its work load capacity, except for
the purposes of testing and only where carried out by a capable person.

(4) Where more than one crane is needed for one lifting operation, a responsible
person shall be appointed to ensure that no crane is loaded beyond its work load.

(5) Any crane which is capable of moving when transporting a load shall be located
on a solid or asphalt surface and be operated at the lowest gear position
(maximum of 3 kilometres per hour) and the load shall be located directly in front
of the driver. It is prohibited to drag loads using cranes.

(6) Where the outrigger or stabiliser is attached to the crane vehicle, the said
outrigger shall be firmly attached when lifting, slewing or lowering any load.

(7) Whenever a load is being lifted, the movement of the crane vehicle shall follow
the orders of a special employee assigned therefor.

(8) Where audio signals or hand signals cannot be used, the means of communication
between the special employee and the driver shall be radio communication.

(9) Where an overhead travelling crane can be controlled from the ground using a
pendant switches, the path way for the operator shall be clearly marked and must
always be free of obstructions.

Article 156
Precautionary Measures

102
(1) No person shall be lifted by a crane nor ride on loads being moved by a crane.

(2) The stipulations as required in paragraph (1) shall not apply to persons being
lifted for special purposes by a crane equipped for man-riding and under a scheme
of operation approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) It is prohibited other than the operator to be in the crane, except due to his
function he has to be on the crane for repair, testing or maintenance. It is
prohibited to hoist any person by a crane undergoing repair, testing or
maintenance.

(4) Where repair, testing and maintenance work is being carried out on the crane, the
operator shall comply with the orders of the person appointed to carry out such
work.

(5) It is prohibited to be under any suspended load and within the swing radius of any
load.

(6) It is prohibited to operate any crane where the hoisting cable has broken wires in
one lay which exceeds 5% of the total found in the rope, or where there exists
damage which clearly reduces the strength of the rope.

Article 157
Working Near Overhead
Power Lines

(1) Extreme caution shall be taken when operating mobile cranes near overhead
power lines and such work shall be lead by a person who shall be responsible for
supervision of the said work and who shall be located on the ground. Such work
may only be carried out during the day time or during good weather.

(2) No part of the crane or the load thereof shall be permitted to be close to overhead
power lines which voltages higher than the proximity as follows :

Cable Voltage Minimum Distance

in Kilovolts

up to 66 3.0 meters

more than 66 5.0 meters

103
(3) It shall only be permitted to pass overhead power lines at permitted crossings.
The boom jib shall first be lowered and the lifting controls shall be locked or be
tied to prevent the boom jib from unintentionally moving while the cranes is
passing underneath the said overhead power lines.

(4) When any crane is forced to pass under overhead power lines at any place other
than a permitted crossing, the driver of the crane shall first obtain a permit from
the Technical Mine Manager.

(5) When the boom jib comes into contact with overhead power lines, the driver of
the cranes shall remain on the crane until the boom jib is free or until electricity is
cut. The driver of the crane shall be certain that no person is on the ground
touching the said crane and where the driver is forced to alight, it shall be done by
jumping and not by stepping.

Article 158
Inspections and Testing

(1) The shaft of the hoist drive of a crane shall be inspected by a person competent in
using ultrasonic methods to determine whether or not the shaft is in good
condition prior to first time use, and periodically at the same frequency, or greater
than that stipulated by the manufacturer of the said crane.

(2) Equipment that may affect the safe operation of the crane shall be tested,
maintained and inspected by a competent person prior to the said crane being
operated for the first time and periodically at the same frequency or greater than
that determined by the manufacturer of the said crane.

(3) The operator shall inspect the outside of the crane, the functioning of the work
load indicator and safety devices prior to the commencement of work at the
beginning of the work shift.

(4) Inspections of every crane shall be carried out by a competent person namely :

a. for tower cranes no less than after working seven days or after any storm
affecting the stability of the said crane and

b. for other types of cranes no less than after seven days and after moving or
relocation of the work site for stationary cranes.

(5) Every crane and item of lifting tackle at a mine shall be thoroughly examined and
tested to prove its safe working load at intervals not exceeding 12 months by an

104
 authorised mechanical expert or test house appointed by the Technical Mine
Manager the name of which shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(6) Any person or body appointed as specified in paragraph (5) shall issue a testing
description and make a report of any damage found, which shall be recorded in
the Mine Book. Where damage is found that may affect the safety of the use of
the crane or lifting tackle, it is prohibited to use the said apparatus until the
damage has been repaired and re-testing is carried out.

Part Five
Workshops and Factories

Article 159
General Stipulations

Every workshop shall be operated and maintained in a clean and orderly condition so as
not to endanger safety and health as well as not to affect or pollute the environment.

Article 160
The Arrangement of
Equipment and Facilities

(1) Space between machines, mechanical equipment, benches or working tables and
any other working equipment shall be sufficiently wide and free from obstructions
in order that workers may move easily and freely.

(2) One side of any stairway shall be provided at least with a hand railing or sturdy
support. Portable stairs shall be tied or attached safely.

(3) Floor hatches and stair platforms shall be fitted with a frame and a safety fence 90
centimetres in height. Decks and stairways shall be free from obstructions or
slippery objects to prevent hazards.

(4) Permanently open receptacles and containers containing hot or dangerous liquid
substances shall be set apart using a partition or wall with a height of no less than
1.5 meters. Clear warning signs shall be installed at the said place.

Article 161
Precautionary Measures
Against Fire or Explosion

(1) It is prohibited to utilise fires at workshops, except where fire is a necessary part
of the nature of the work and adequate safety equipment shall be provided.

105
(2) In a workshop, clothes soiled with petroleum or other flammable liquids shall be
stored in a place where they do not create a possible fire hazard.

(3) When combustible liquid substances are poured from a receptacle, the
construction of the said receptacle shall be fire proof and have a capacity of no
more than 20 litres. It is prohibited to keep more than ten containers of
combustible liquid substances in one workshop.

(4) Whenever, in a workshop, work is done that may cause danger of explosion, then
the room and other adjoining rooms must be free of fire and open flames and only
illuminated with gas-tight lights. Open flames or non gas-tight lamps shall not be
allowed within a distance of at least 10 meters of such a room. Such rooms shall
be well ventilated, if necessary by mechanical means.

(5) It is prohibited to smoke or carry fire starting materials into any workshop as
required in paragraph (4) of this Article.

(6) Goods and materials in workshops shall be so arranged, not to obstruct worker
escape routes in case of a fire.

(7) Every workshop shall be equipped with fire extinguishers in sufficient numbers.

Article 162
Precautionary Measures Against
Dangerous Gases and Vapours

(1) Workshops shall be fitted with a good ventilation system and the spread of any
dangerous gas or vapour which threatens the safety and health of workers shall be
prevented. When, as the result of a process dangerous gases and vapours cannot
be prevented, a ventilation system shall be designed and installed so as to remove
the said gaseous vapours.

(2) It is prohibited to enter any work room in any workshop which may contain
dangerous gas or vapours prior to carrying out a safety inspection and only after
the said room has been declared safe.

Article 163
Safety Equipment

(1) Any potentially hazardous moving part of any machine or transmission equipment
shall be fitted with safety devices.

(2) Any rotating part of any machine which rotates at high speed shall be safely
enclosed. The RPM of the said machine shall not be higher than that stipulated

106
(3) Every worker shall wear safety glasses when :

a. operating machines that cause hot sparks or flying metal fragments.

b carrying out any work that may emit blinding or eye-damaging light.

Article 164
Using Power Engine
and Machines

(1) Before starting power engines clear warning signals shall be given to any worker
who may be affected by any hazard caused thereby. Machines that start
automatically shall be fitted with an audible warning signal or other hazard
indicator.

(2) Machines installed at point distant from the driving engine shall be provided with
emergency stops, in order that every person may immediately stop the machine or
engine whenever necessary.

Article 165
Grinding Machines

(1) Grinding wheel shall be :

a. equipped with safety rings on installation;

b. protected with a safety cover and

c. equipped with a glass shield..

(2) The size and shape of grinding wheels used shall conform to the standards of the
manufacturer.

(3) The rotation speed of the grinding wheel shall not exceed the manufacturer’s
specifications..

(4) Any person using a grinder shall wear safety glasses.

Article 166
Painting Work

107
Any room or place where painting is done shall be enclosed and have good ventilation
using a fan, exhausting to the outside. The lighting provided shall be airtight and
workers shall wear corresponding masks.

Article 167
General Requirements

(1) Workers exposed to the hazard of radiation from welding light caused by welding
work or from cutting shall wear protective glasses and other safety equipment.

(2) When welding or cutting operations emit harmful vapours from liquid metals an
adequate ventilation system shall be installed or any person not protected from the
said hazardous liquid metal vapours shall wear respiratory protective equipment.

(3) It is prohibited to weld or cut where any person is not protected from welding
light, except where the said person is wearing eye protection or is protected by
means of screens.

(4) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be provided on site while welding or cutting
work is being carried out.

(5) It is prohibited to weld, cut or heat metal close to any combustible or flammable
material or where any combustible gas is present.

(6) During welding, cutting or heating of metals, the flame shall be kept away from
the gas cylinder, regulator valve or hose.

(7) Immediately after finishing welding or cutting work, the gas/oxygen cylinder
valve shall be closed and any pressure in the regulator valve, hose, torch system
shall be expelled before leaving the work site. A thorough inspection shall be
carried out for the presence of any remaining flames prior to leaving the work
place.

(8) The Technical Mine Manager or any appointed person shall issue a permit for
welding or cutting work at any place where conditions are such that unusual fire
or explosion hazards may exist. The said permit shall only apply on the day of
issue and caution against fire must be taken until the said permitted work is
completed.

Working with Welding Equipment

Article 168
Welding with Compressed
or Liquefied Gas

108
 (Oxygen and Acetylene or Propane)

(1) Gas cylinders shall be handled with caution, shall not be allowed to fall or collide
with one another and must be well protected against excessive heat or coldness.

(2) Gas cylinders shall be stored with caution and tied firmly in order to prevent
dropping and shall not be stored close to any source of fire or any combustible
materials, particularly oil and grease.

(3) Full and empty gas cylinders shall be stored separately and empty cylinders shall
be identified. Gas cylinders shall be used in the order received.

(4) Compressed gas/oxygen cylinders, regulator valves, hoses and other cylinder
equipment shall not be touched or polluted with oily or greasy clothes, and shall
be kept well away from oil, grease or combustible material. Cleanliness shall be
exercised in the maintenance of the equipment.

(5) Lifting or moving gas cylinders shall be done with caution by means of special
equipment and must not be dragged or rolled. When moving gas cylinders by
means of a hoist, a secure lifting deck shall be used.

(6) When gas cylinders are not in use, the valve protective cover shall be tightly
closed.

(7) Gas cylinders shall only be used where the said gas cylinder is fitted with the
necessary safety devices, particularly a pressure regulator valve.

(8) After opening the safety valve cover and before fixing the pressure regulator
valve, the valve shall not be pointed at any person. Before opening it shall be
cleaned from any dirt and dust. The valve must be in a closed position before
opening the pressure regulator valve, even when the cylinder is empty. The valve
shall be opened slowly with the key provided and the key shall be hung on the
cylinder during any operation.

(9) All compressed or liquefied gas welding work systems shall undergo inspection
and testing prior to use. Where any cylinder is suffering a leakage which cannot
be stopped by closing the valve or by tightening the connection, the said cylinder
shall be emptied in the open air, far from any source of flames. Repair of the
damaged cylinder shall only be carried out by an authorised workshop.

Article 169
Welding and Cutting Containers

109
(1) It is prohibited to weld or cut any container that was used for the storage of
explosives or any flammable substance except where the following steps have
been taken :

a. the substance and any fume (from liquid metals), gas vapour or dust in the
container shall be removed, or

b. the substance and any fume (from liquid metals), gas, vapours or dust in the
container shall be rendered non-explosive or non-flammable.

(2) It is prohibited to put any explosive or ignitable substances into any container that
has just been welded until the said container has sufficiently cooled to prevent the
risk of ignition of the said substances.

(3) Before welding any holes in oily and greasy containers, the container shall be
filled with water and vented.

Article 170
Open Containers

(1) Every tank, drum or other container holding a liquid substance, the top edge of
which is less than 1.5 meters above any floor, gantry or platform, must be
securely covered or fenced to a height of at least 1.5 meters, to prevent persons
from falling into the container.

(2) It is prohibited to enter any container as specified in paragraph (1) of this Article,
except where adequate precautionary measures have been taken to ensure that :
a. the said tank is empty and the inlets thereto are closed and locked;

b. the said container has been flooded and/or ventilated to neutralise liquid
residues or the possible presence of caustic, irritant substances or any
flammable vapours;

c. all maintenance work on the interior of any container shall be continuously

supervised by a supervisor and

d. any person entering a container shall be wearing a safety belt or safety harness
secured outside the container and shall be monitored by a supervising person.

Article 171
Stockpile Inspections

(1) Stockpiles of ore or any other material shall be inspected by a person authorised
to ensure that work place conditions are safe before any person is permitted to
work at or close to the said stockpile.

110
(2) No person shall be allowed to work on or near any mineral stockpile that may
endanger his safety.

Article 172
Overhead Protection

It is prohibited to work at any place where any person is working overhead, except where
safety measures against falling objects have been taken, in accordance with the nature of
the said work.

Article 173
Passageways

(1) All passageways or other walking surfaces in a plant shall be wide enough to
enable any person to move freely and shall be well maintained and free from
obstructions.

(2) Any opening in any floor or on any other surface of a building or plant which is
used by people shall:

a. be protected by means of a safety fence no less than one meter in height, or

b. be securely covered using planks or any other material capable of supporting

any load likely to be imposed theron.

Article 174
Protection Against Fire Injury

(1) Any person working in a plant who handles molten material shall be provided
with personal protection and other appliances to protect the said worker from
being injured by fire or affected by heat radiation.

(2) Such persons as mentioned in paragraph (1) are obliged to use the personal
protection and other appliances and take care of the equipment.

Article 175
Rescue Equipment

(1) At any place in a plant where an accumulation of noxious or destructive gases or

vapours occurs, detection equipment shall be provided in specific places as well
as approved type respiratory breathing devices and portable resuscitating
apparatus in adequate numbers.

111
(2) On every work shift there shall be one or more employees who are trained in
using breathing and resuscitation equipment.

(3) The employees specified in paragraph (2) must be designated by the Technical
Mine Manager.

Article 176
Pouring Hot Materials

(1) Molten metals or hot materials must not come into contact with any cold, moist or
rusty surfaces where such contact may cause an explosion.

(2) The ladle or slag pot shall be inspected before molten material is placed therein.

(3) When molten metals are transported by means of mechanical equipment, the
containers shall not be filled above 10 cm below the rim.

(4) When the requirements in paragraph (3) is not fulfilled, the said container may
only be moved after the supervisor has warned the person carrying out the moving
as well as every person in the area.

(5) Warning signs shall be given when molten metal is being poured and prior to
containers filled with molten metal are moved.

(6) The operator of any excavating equipment used for molten metal must obtain
authorisation from the supervisor of a blast furnace before beginning to dig any
slag pot.

Article 177
Transporting Molten Metal

Equipment which is used for the transportation of molten metal shall be fitted with
warning signals to be sounded by the operator when the said means of transport is in
motion, or shall have warning signals that operate automatically and the said signals shall
sound whenever the said means of transport is operated.

Article 178
Precautionary Measures
at Furnaces

(1) No person shall go above the casting floor of an operating furnace without the
permission of the supervisor or employee responsible for the said work. The
supervisor shall ensure that the person assigned to keep guard outside is always

112
 present to issue warning signals or to give assistance when there are hazardous
gases or any other hazards.

(2) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall not apply when the place of work is
located far from any operating furnace and where direct access to outside the
building is made available.

(3) Ready-to-use safety belts shall be provided at an easily reached place near the top
structure of a furnace in a plant.

(4) The charging door of a furnace must be provided with a safe working platform
equipped with hand-rails at least one mete in height. The platform shall be
supported to shield the floor plate from excessive heat. A ladder way or stairway
must be provided from the base to the top of the platform.

(5) Two-way communication or a telephone shall be provided from the furnace top or
any other dangerous place to the cast house, supervision room or any place in
which a person is always on duty.

(6) When a charge becomes frozen or jammed in a furnace hopper and a person is
required to dislodge the charge into the furnace, a guard rail shall be provided to
prevent the person from slipping on to the hopper. Safety harness shall be worn
during such operations.

Article 179
Supervision of Hazardous
Work Around the Furnace

(1) Every supervisor shall personally attend or appoint a competent person to

supervise any work around a blast furnace that might involve special accident
hazards.

(2) When working beyond routine inspection duties and carrying out minor repairs to
the furnace top :

a. smelting furnaces shall be extinguished and the area surrounding the said
furnace shall be free from any person working;

b. a work order shall be obtained from the supervisor;

c. before undertaking repair work, the said work place shall be inspected for the
possibility of the presence of hazardous or noxious gases and the said
inspection shall be repeated as required to protect the workers and

113
 d. breathing equipment, a safety cord and any necessary additional aid
equipment shall be provided.

Part Six

Electrical Equipment
and Machinery

Article 180
General Requirements

(1) Except where the Chief Mine Inspector creates requirements or standards
different to those stipulated in this Regulation, all electrical installations shall
fulfil the stipulations of the General Regulations of Electrical Installations
(PUIL), other stipulations related thereto and Indonesian National Standards
(SNI).

(2) All standards and definitions as found in the regulations as required in paragraph
(1) shall also be effective.

(3) The high voltage electrical system layout and the development programme for
every mine shall be submitted to the Chief Mine Inspector with detailed
explanations and any changes or additions shall be reported as they occur.

(4) Any electrical apparatus on the surface of a mine which controls or is on the same
circuit as any apparatus underground shall comply with the requirements of the
regulations for underground electrical systems.

Article 181
Persons in Charge
and Competent Persons

(1) All electrical work shall be supervised by an electrical expert whose name shall
be recorded in the Mine Book.

(2) Electrical work shall only be carried out by a person who possesses electrical
knowledge and experience.

Article 182
Safe Working Systems
and Equipment

114
(1) All electrical systems shall be such construction as to prevent any danger arising
from its use and shall be maintained in a safe condition.

(2) All activities including maintenance of the system or any work near the system
shall be carried out properly to avoid any danger.

(3) Any protective equipment provided to comply with these regulations shall be
suitable for its duty, maintained in safe condition and properly used.

Article 183

Electrical equipment shall be protected against :

a. mechanical damage;

b. the effects of weather, natural hazards, temperature and pressure;

c. the effects of moisture, soiling, dust or corrosive conditions, or

d. flammable or explosive substances including dust, gaseous vapours.

115
 Article 184
Insulation and Protection
of Conductors

(1) All cunductors in an electrical system which may give rise to danger shall be
either:

a. covered with insulating matereal and completely protected or

b. so placed or protected as will prevent any danger.

(2) Where conductors such as resistance banks are difficult to protect individually,
any collective fencing shall be of metal, firmly connected to the electrical
earthing system and so installed to prevent any contact with live parts.

Article 185
Grounding or Other
Precautionary Measures

(1) Precautionary measures shall be taken, either by means of grounding or by any

other means. to prevent any hazard from occurring when any open conductive
section of the system becomes live as the result of incorrect use of the system or
failure of the insulation

(2) If a circuit conductor is connected to earth or to a similar common point, nothing

which may give rise to danger by interfering with or disconnection of that
common point shall be placed in that conductor.

(3) The main ground connection of the grounding system shall be designed by an
Electrical Engineer and shall have an adequate capacity and low resistance.
Multiple ground connections shall be interconnected and at equal potential.

Article 186
Connections

Every connection in a system shall be so constructed as to be mechanically and

electrically suitable for use and shall not cause any danger in normal conditions.

116
 Article 187
Power Surge Safety Devices

(1) Every electrical installation shall be fitted with efficient and well placed power
surge safety devices.

(2) A trailing cable that conducts electricity to mobile equipment shall be fitted with
its own safety devices to prevent over loading or short circuiting.

Article 188
Circuit Breakers and
Isolating Devices

(1) Appropriate equipment shall be provided to cut off the electrical current to and
from any electrical equipment which will ensure the separation of any electrical
equipment from any source of electricity, and shall include appropriate methods
of identifying circuits.

(2) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall not apply to electrical equipment which is
itself a source of electrical energy; however adequate safety measures shall be
taken to prevent any danger.

(3) Apart from circuit breaker switches, each electrical appliance shall have local
means of isolating all parts of the circuit of that appliance. The high and low
voltage sides of a transformer shall be equipped with its own independent means
of isolation.

(4) Light bulbs or other small appliances protected by a single fuse not exceeding 10
amps capacity may be collectively protected by one switch.

(5) Any main relay station and any important surface relay station or any relay station
that controls underground circuits shall all be interconnected by telephone.

(6) Any branch of an electrical system shall be fitted with isolating switches in order
that the branch can be isolated from the main system.

Article 189
Circuit Breakers to
Underground Circuits

(1) A main switch to cut electricity to any underground mine that receives electricity
from any surface source shall be installed on the surface.

117
(2) Appropriate procedures shall be made for the handling of switches as required in
paragraph (1), including communication equipment to enable the main switch to
be used in a dangerous situation.

Article 190
Precautionary Measures
Prior to Working On
Deactivated Electrical Equipment

Prior to working on or working close to any electrical equipment that has been turned off
(deactivated), precautionary measures shall be taken such as locking the main switch and
following the stipulations laid down by the electrical technician.

Article 191
Working On or Close
to Live Power Lines

(1) It is prohibited to work on or close to any bare live power lines, except under
special circumstances. Safe working guidelines as created by the Technical Mine
Manager shall be followed.

(2) Special safety rules shall be made to carry out work involving electrical welding,
shall be created by an electrical technician and approved by the Technical Mine
Manager.

Article 192
Working Space, Access
and Lighting

(1) Adequate lighting shall be installed in all working spaces and access ways
including any area around electrical equipment which is in operation.

(2) All fixed electrical appliances shall be housed in a closed room or suitable houses,
unless exception is granted by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Electrical equipment shall be protected from dripping water and seepage.

(4) Electrical equipment shall be kept clean and dry.

(5) Electrical equipment located in any place exposed to coal dust shall be protected
by dust proof covers.

Article 193

118
 Authority to Operate
Electrical Equipment

(1) The Technical Mine Manager or the person in charge of the electrical division
shall appoint a mine worker to operate and supervise electrical equipment.

(2) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall not apply to any electrical
equipment/machinery fitted with automatic safety devices.

Article 194
Installation of Signs
on Electrical Equipment

(1) All electrical equipment and devices shall be fitted with information written on a
label made from an anti rust metal plate which displays the power, voltage and
current, the name of the manufacturer and the serial number.

(2) In the case of electrical motors aside from those specified in paragraph (1), the
revolutions per minute shall also be displayed.

Article 195
Circuit Diagrams

(1) A schematic diagram of the circuits of any system operated at a mine with a
voltage in excess of 300 volts (250 volts for underground mines) shall be
prepared and show every setting of any protective devices.

(2) All such schematic diagrams shall be kept at the mine office and made available
to the Mine Inspector at any time.

(3) Copies of schematic diagrams related to the use of switchgear in excess of 300
volts (250 volts for underground mines) shall be displayed at the location of the
said master switch.

Article 196
Electric Locomotives

(1) The fuses or any other safety equipment on an electric locomotive and feeders
shall be in a good condition and be inspected regularly by an employee whose
name shall be registered in the Mine Book.

(2) It is prohibited to install automatic circuit breakers which exceed the work load
stipulated by the manufacturer.

119
(3) Locomotives shall only be left unattended where the switch key and control
handle have been removed from the sliding bar and released.

(4) Electrical circuits which originate from trolley wires shall be connected safely to
a grounding circuit.

Article 197
Telephones

(1) It is prohibited to use any telephone while there is lightning.

(2) Any telephone in exposed locations shall be in a water proof case the metal frame
of which shall be earthed.

(3) All telephones on a circuit common with underground telephones shall comply
with all reqirements for underground telephones at the mine.

Article 198
Lightning Safety Devices

(1) A suitable surge diverter shall be provided at the incoming end of all supplies to a
mine.

(2) When it is deemed necessary safety electrical installations shall be fitted with
lightning conductors with an adequate safety capacity.

(3) Lightning conductors shall be inspected every six months or after every severe
case of lightning.

(4) For any telephone or power circuit connected to any underground system, the
lightning conductor shall be not more than 80 metres from the underground
entrance.

(5) The connection of any lightning conductor to ground shall be separated from any
mine earthing system by at least 3 meters in air and 15 meters in ground.

120
 Article 199
Safety of Overhead
Power Lines

(1) The distance between the ground and any overhead power line shall not be less
than :

a. 5.8 meters across public and normal roads or 5.0 meters otherwise for
voltages up to 300 volts AC (600 volts DC) and

b. 6 meters across public roads and 5.8 meters otherwise for voltages above 300
volts AC (600 volts DC)

(2) Warning signs or safety barriers shall be installed on overhead power lines which
cross transport roads and shall be installed no less than 12 meters from the nearest
electrical cable/line in every direction of approach.

(3) It is prohibited to carry out excavation, stockpiling or soil moving work within a
distance of 25 meters of any electrical line, trolley wire/buried cable, except
where the current in the said power line has been cut off or where the Technical
Mine Manager or technician has so permitted and has given instructions on
working procedures and safety.

Article 200
Trailing Cables

(1) Trailing cables shall be attached to machines or vehicles in a manner to protect

the cable from damage and prevent strain on the conductors.

(2) Surplus trailing cable to vehicles and similar equipment shall be stored neatly on
reels installed on the said vehicle or in a cable holder which is capable of
protecting the trailing cable from the possibility of mechanical damage.

(3) Where any trailing cables unavoidably cross haul roads, they should either be
suspended with the clearance as per the stipulations intended for overhead power
lines or protected using metal protectors strong enough to prevent damage caused
by passing vehicles.

(4) It is prohibited to leave unattended any vehicles powered by a trailing cable while
in operation.

(5) Trailing cables which power vehicles shall contain an integrated ground
conductor of adequate capacity.

121
(6) When handling high voltage trailing cables insulated gloves and shoes shall be
worn.

Article 201

(1) Electrical technicians shall ensure that any laser used at the mine shall be of a
type approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) The Electrical Engineer shall issue a code of practice for the safe use of lasers.

Article 202
Hand Held Equipment

No hand-held tool at a mine shall operate at a voltage in excess of 125 volts DC and 220
volts AC.

Article 203
Warning Signs

(1) Every place containing fixed electrical apparatus other than electrical cables,
junction boxes, remote control switches, telephones and signals, shall be provided
with clear notices which can be understood by every worker including :

a. directions to restore consciousness after an electrical shock as well as how to

safely remove a person from contact with an electrical source.

b. notices containing direction as to the procedures in case of fire and

c. notices prohibiting any person from handling or touching the said electrical
equipment except those authorised to do so.

(2) Warning signs shall be installed that indicate any equipment which is operated
automatically as well as signs which indicate the location of a telephone or any
other means of communication.

(3) Any electrical equipment including junction boxes of cables with a voltage in
excess of 1200 volts shall be clearly marked with warning notices displaying the
voltage of operation.

(4) A sign prohibiting open flames shall be installed at the door of any charging
station.

122
(5) All switches and circuit breakers for equipment shall be clearly labelled
displaying what equipment is controlled by or is protected by the said switches
and circuit breakers.

(6) The requirements of paragraph (5) shall not apply to light switches, conveyor
control switches as well as any signal control switch on the said equipment.

(7) Warning signs shall be made from durable materials be installed in visible places
and be well maintained.

Article 204
Inspections, Testing
and Maintenance

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that the Engineer in charge specifies
and carries out the scheme of inspections, testing and maintenance that will
ensure safe operation of all electrical installations.

(2) Electrical installations shall be examined by an expert on a regular basis at

intervals not exceeding six months. The findings of the tests shall be recorded in
the Electricity Book.

(3) Every change made to any electrical installation shall also be recorded in the said
book as well as on the electrical installation blueprints.

Article 205
Duties and Responsibilities

(1) Any person not in charge of tending and supervising electrical appliances,
apparatus or wiring, is prohibited from tending or touching the same.

(2) Repair or other operations to low voltage appliances, apparatus or wiring being
under current may not be done except by, or under the supervision of, expert
personnel applying the necessary safety measures.

123
 Paragraph 2

Machinery

Article 206
General Stipulations

Machinery including every part thereof and the working gears of any equipment shall be
installed and lodged firmly to solid foundations and must be well maintained.

Article 207
Machinery/Engine Rooms

(1) It is prohibited for anyone to enter or to be inside a machinery/engine room,

except concerned personnel.

(2) The restriction mentioned in paragraph (1) shall be clearly marked and installed at
the entrance to the machine room.

(3) Every machine room shall be fitted with an adequate lighting and ventilation
system and shall be kept clean.

(4) It is prohibited to store used cloth and combustible materials or hazardous liquids
in any machine room.

Article 208
Placement of Machinery

(1) Machinery must be placed in a room so as to ensure a sufficiently wide walkway

between the machinery and the walls and which is free from obstructions.

(2) Pipelines for air, steam, water and any other substances shall be properly installed
and protected.

Article 209
Safety Equipment

(1) Moving parts of all machinery must be provided with adequate and suitable
fencing.

(2) Fly wheels, transmission gears, belt and transmission chains, axle and axle drives
and other rotatating parts that may cause danger must be in cage or fenced
securely.

124
(3) Parts of machines with a high velocity rotation that can break apart and fly away
must be covered and well fenced.

(4) When any machine operates without a safety fence or safety equipment during
testing, warning signs shall be installed and safe working procedures shall be
followed.

(5) Any elevated runway or staging used for the purpose of inserting oil or for any
other similar purpose the height of which exceeds 1.2 meters from the floor shall
be fitted with a hand railing.

Article 210
Handling Machinery

(1) Any person working close to any moving machine shall wear tight clothing.

(2) Machines starting with a prime mover shall be able to stop and start separately.

(3) It is prohibited to install or release the transmission belt of any machine which is
in operation.

(4) Any machine operated by means of a prime mover shall only be operated or
stopped after warning signals have been given to every mechanic or machine
operator on duty.

(5) Machine operators are forbidden to leave the machine in operation under their
supervision in operation unattended.

(6) It is prohibited to operate any machine, apparatus or transmission equipment

which may endanger the safety of any person through electrical hazards or
moving parts. Before undertaking repair work on any apparatus powered by
electricity, the person to perform the said work shall be certain that all switches or
power supply switches to the said apparatus are off and tagged or locked.

Article 211
Maintenance of Machinery

(1) It is prohibited to apply grease or lubricants to any machine that is in operation,

except where the said machine is fitted with an automatic grease applicator or a
grease or oil remote applicator.

(2) Cleaning of axle drive while the machine is running shall only be done using
special equipment.

125
 Article 212
Warning Signs

Clear and conspicuous warning signs shall be installed at any place close to any
dangerous apparatus or equipment.

Article 213
Inspections

(1) All machinery and equipment shall be inspected regularly in accordance with the
schedule as required by the Technical Mine Manager.

(2) The findings of the inspection as intended in paragraph (1) shall be recorded in a
book or on record cards.

Paragraph 3

Compressors

Article 214
General Requirements

(1) The air intake for compressors must be as clean and as dry as possible.

(2) All compressors shall be fitted with an air filter.

(3) The temperature of compressed air in the compressor shall not exceed 40 degrees
Celsius below flash point of the lubricating oil used. Reliable thermometers shall
be fitted appropriately for measuring that temperature.

(4) Whenever the compressed air temperature exceeds the limit specified in
paragraph (3) of this Article or some defect is found in the cooler, then the
compressor must be stopped by the operator (if it can not stop automatically).

(5) The flow of compressed air from the compressor to the place of use shall be kept
as dry and cold as possible.

126
 Article 215
Construction and
Safety Equipment

(1) Compressed air vessels under very high pressure must have a safety factor of at
least 5 times the maximum design pressure.

(2) All pipe construction and connections must always be able to withstand the air
pressure and flow.

(3) Every compressor and vessel shall be fitted with safety devices to ensure stability
at the permitted maximum pressure. Such devices include pressure gauges,
temperature monitors and safety valves that are capable of releasing pressure
build up.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall stipulate the maximum operating air pressure
which shall be written clearly on every compressor and compressed air vessel.

Article 216
Lubricants

(1) The compressor lubricating oil must be of high quality with flash point higher
than 200 degrees Celsius.

(2) The Mine Inspector may take used lubricant samples from the compressor to test
its flash point at the cost of the mining company concerned.

Article 217
Inspections, Testing
and Repair Work

(1) Every year or no less than every 8000 work hours, the compressor shall be
inspected and where necessary repaired.

(2) The results of the inspection and repair work as required in paragraph (1) shall be
recorded in a book provided therefor along with opinions and suggestions.

(3) Once every five years, the interior of pressure vessels with a diameter of no less
than 1 meter and which are used for compressed air of maximum 8 atmospheres
must be inspected.

(4) Where necessary based on the findings of the inspection as required in paragraph
(3), the capacity of the vessel shall be tested by pressuring water inside to at least
than 3.5 atmospheres higher than the permitted air pressure in the said vessel.

127
(5) The Technical Mine Manager shall make a report of the findings of the testing for
the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 218
Steam Boilers

All equipment, system of installation and utilization of steam boilers at a mine must
conform with the existing regulations for steam boilers.

Part Seven

Stockpiling Liquid Fuels

Article 219

(1) Liquid fuel storage facilities with a capacity as required in Article 221 paragraph
(2) shall obtain a permit from the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Liquid fuels shall be classified as follows :

a. flammable liquid fuels shall be liquid fuels which have an ignition point
below 37.8 degrees Celsius and steam pressure of not more than 2.84
kilograms per square centimetre and

b. combustible liquid fuels shall be liquid fuels which have an ignition point
equal to or above 37.8 degrees Celsius.

Article 220

(1) Flammable liquid fuels as specified in Article 219 paragraph (2) letter a shall be
classified as follows :

a. Class I A fuels which have an ignition point below 22.8 degrees Celsius and a
boiling point below 37.8 degrees Celsius;

b. Class I B fuels which have an ignition point below 22.8 degrees Celsius and a
boiling point above 37 .8 degrees Celsius and

c. Class I C fuels which have an ignition point equal to or above 22.8 degrees
Celsius and a boiling point below 60 degrees Celsius..

128
(2) Flammable liquid fuels as specified in Article 219 paragraph (2) letter b. shall be
classified as follows :

a. Class II A fuels which have an ignition point equal to or above 37.8 degrees
Celsius and a boiling point below 60 degrees Celsius;

b. Class II B fuels which have an ignition point equal to or above 60 degrees

Celsius and a boiling point below 93 degrees Celsius and

c. Class II C fuels which have an ignition point equal to or above 93 degrees

Celsius.

Article 221

(1) Liquid fuel storage facilities consisting of one tank or a collection of tanks for the
storage of combustible liquid fuels with a capacity of 5,000 to 40,000 litres, and
for flammable liquid fuels with a capacity of 1,000 to 10,000 litres shall not
require a permit from the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) For liquid fuel storage facilities consisting of one tank or a collection of tanks for
the storage of combustible liquid fuels with a capacity above 40,000 litres, and for
flammable liquid fuels above 10,000 litres, a permit shall be obtained from the
Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Permits for storage facilities as specified in paragraph (2) shall be valid for a
period of five years and may be extended.

Article 222

Liquid fuel storage facilities as specified in Article 221 shall meet the requirements as
stipulated in this Ministerial Decree.

Article 223

(1) At every liquid fuel storage facility location the following shall be provided :

a. “Smoking Prohibited” and “Authorised Persons Only” signs;

b. lighting

c. fire extinguishers and

d. lightning conductors.

129
(2) The foundations of tanks shall be constructed from concrete and be capable of
withstanding the weight of the tank and the contents thereof.

(3) For liquid fuel storage facilities consisting of a collection of tanks, the distance
between each tank shall be no less than 10 meters.

(4) Where the distance between tanks as required in paragraph (3) is less than 10
meters each tank shall be fitted with a water spraying installation.

(5) Around storage tanks or collections of stockpiling tanks of liquid fuels a safety
embankment shall be made of cement or an earth mound which is capable of
accommodating :

a. for locations with only one stockpiling tank = maximum capacity + 20

centimetres and

b. for locations with a collection of stockpiling tanks = ½ x the sum total

capacity of all the tanks + 20 centimetres.

(6) The grounding resistance of lightning conductors at liquid fuel stockpiling

facilities shall be measured every six months or after severe lightning.

(7) The top of liquid fuel tanks shall be fitted with a gas discharge outlet equipped
with no less than 3 layers of brass wire mesh.

(8) The casing of liquid fuel stockpiling tanks shall be inscribed with the capacity of
the tank and the type of liquid fuel contained therein.

(9) The filling inlet shall be at a distance of no less than 10 meters from the discharge
outlet at the liquid fuel stockpiling tank facilities.

(10) Liquid fuel stockpiling facilities as specified in Article 221 shall be equipped with
a safety fence at a distance of 5 meters from the safety embankment and which
shall be fitted with a locked door.

(11) The electrical board and pump shall be located outside the safety fence.

130
 Article 224
Storage in Non
Permanent Containers

Where fuels are stored in a drum or any other like container and which has a capacity of
less than 5,000 litres for combustible liquid fuels and less than 1,000 litres for flammable
liquid fuels, the said storage facility shall surrounded with a security fence and fitted with
a lockable door.

131
 Article 225
Minimum Safe Distance

Liquid fuel storage tanks shall meet the minimum safe distance requirements as follows :

Liquid Tank Capacity Minimum Distance Minimum Distance

Fuel from the Safety Fence to from the Safety Fence
a Public Road to Buildings
Class Litres Meters Meters

I-II B - 1,500 1.5 1.5

1,501 - 3,000 3 1.5

3,001 - 46,000 4.5 1.5

46,001 - 115,000 6 1.5

115,001 - 190,000 9 3

190,001 - 380,000 15 4.5

380,001 - 1,900,000 24 7.5

1,900,001 - 3,800,000 30 10.5

3,800,001 - 7,600,000 40.5 13.5

7,600,001 - 11,400,000 49.5 16.5

11,400,001 and above 52.5 18

II C - 40,000 1.5 1.5

40,001 - 114,000 3 1.5

114.0001 - 190,000 3 3

190,001 - 380,000 4.5 3

380,001 and above 4.5 4.5

132
 Article 226
Construction of Tanks

The construction of tanks for the storage of liquid fuels shall meet the following
requirements :

a. must be made of materials that are capable of withstanding fire;

b. must be made from recognised plate metal;

c. must stand upright, sturdy and stable;

d. must be capable of withstanding any liquid stored therein and must not leak for
the period of storage and

e. the joints between the plates of the casing of the tanks shall be welded, be riveted
or bolted or a combination of the two.

Article 227

Underground storage facilities shall meet the following requirements :

a. storage tanks shall be made from anti rust materials or the interior and exterior of
the storage tank shall be layered with anti rust material and shall be equipped with
a discharge pipe.

b. storage tanks set in the ground shall be no less than 1 meter deep calculated from
the top of the tank and the area around the tank shall be filled with sand;

c. storage tanks shall be capable of withstanding pressure to 7 atmospheres;

d. it is prohibited to set tanks below railway tracks or roads;

e. the filling inlet shall be no less than 10 meters from the discharge outlet and

f. open flames or lights shall not be permitted near or in the area of filling inlet.

133
 Chapter V

Drilling

Article 228
Procedures

(1) The Technical Mine Manager or a responsible person for any drilling operation
shall prepare operating rules for each type of drill used.

(2) The Operational Supervisor and Technical Supervisor shall ensure that any
drilling work is carried out according to the operating rules.

Article 229
Site Preparation and
Rig Erection

(1) Drilling sites shall be located at an adequately safe distance from overhead power
lines, underground cables or pipelines.

(2) Drilling sites shall be secure from entry by unauthorised people and only those
people permitted shall be allowed to enter the drilling site and emergency exits
must be provided from the drilling site.

(3) Facilities for washing, changing and storing clothing and personal goods shall be
provided at the drilling site except where such facilities are provided at a nearby
location

(4) Where drilling equipment is to be moved from one drilling location to another
drilling location the drill stem, other fittings and equipment shall be secured, and
the drill mast shall be placed in a safe position. When moving the drill to a new
location, the drill operator shall be given assistance by other drill helpers

(5) It is prohibited to carry out any other work underneath or in the vicinity of any
derrick while being erected or dismantled, or at any time the drill mast is raised or
lowered.

(6) Raising or lowering the drill mast or derrick shall be carried out when there is
sufficient light.

(7) Precautionary measures shall be taken to protect the derrick or drill mast from
damage caused by strong winds during erection, dismantling or raising work.

134
(8) In the case of raising or lowering a portable derrick or drill mast the instructions
from the manufacture shall be followed exactly. It is prohibited to use a derrick
or drill mast with a work load in excess of the maximum work load limit.

(9) Lighting shall be installed so that the drilling work site and pipe racks are
sufficiently well lit and so as to avoid glare in the eyes of the drill operator.
Where necessary, aircraft warning lights shall be installed at the top of the derrick
or drill mast and which shall comply with aviation regulations. Lighting shall be
positioned and equipped to protect the light covers.

(10) Drilling rigs should be operated on a level surface and, if working on a bench, so
arranged that the rig is located at a safe distance of not less than 3 meters from the
bench crest. Wilst in operation, a drilling rig should be so arranged that its
longitudinal axis be perpendicular to the bench crest.

Article 230
Designation of Dangerous Areas

(1) Where drilling work cuts through any layer or deposit which discharges any
noxious compressed or combustible gas or liquid substance, the Technical Mine
Manager or employee in charge of the work shall immediately stop the drilling
work and designate a hazardous area.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall stipulate guidelines for precautionary
measures to be taken at any area declared dangerous as specified in paragraph (1).

(3) Guidelines as required in paragraph (2) shall include a prohibition on smoking or

the use of open flames, restriction on the use of internal combustion engines,
standards for the construction and use of electrical equipment, drilling hole shut
down methods in an emergency situation and shall state the number and type of
breathing equipment and personal protective equipment that must be provided at
the drilling site.

Article 231

(1) For areas where exploration drilling is carried out a situation plan shall be
provided and continually updated on a scale of no less than 1 : 2500, and shall
include astronomical lines of longitude and must include the condition of the area
within a radius of 500 meters of any drill hole or up to the boundaries of the
mining concession where the distance to the boundary of the mining concession is
less than 500 meters.

135
(2) The map as required in paragraph (1) shall show :

a. all buildings, plants and pipelines.

b. the location of all drill holes by consecutive numbers whether finished or

proceeding.

c. all roads, rivers, and springs.

(3) The vertical section of every drill hole shall be shown on a scale of 1 : 1000 for
depth and 1 : 20 for width and the section’s data shall be updated once at least
each month or immediately after a hole is completed.

(4) The sections as mentioned in paragraph (3) shall show :

a. all strata layers drilled through;

b. any mineral deposits;

c. water bearing strata;

d. the type of drill hole casing and

e. means of shutting off water.

(5) A daily log book shall always be provided at drilling work in which shall be
recorded the following :

a. drilling procedures;

b. rock layer conditions;

c. the formation of drilled rock;

d. depths reached and the location of any deposit;

e. daily progress;

f. the diameter of drill holes and drill pipe used;

g. the manner of shutting off water bearing strata, and

h. results of testing the means of shutting off.

136
(6) If artesian water is struck, the situation plan and section and the drilling log book
in relation to the particular deposit shall be updated and copies sent to the Chief
Mines Inspector forthwith.

(7) All drill holes no longer required shall be filled in using solid materials.

Article 232
General Precautions

(1) Prior to the commencement of drilling activities, the drilling site shall be
inspected to guarantee the safety of drilling work.

(2) Portable fire extinguishers of an appropriate type and size shall be provided in
adequate numbers and shall be ready for immediate use and be well maintained.

(3) Safety helmets and shoes as well as any other personal protective equipment shall
be worn by workers at or in the vicinity of any drilling site.

(4) Prior to the commencement of work on any work shift, the mine workers shall
carry out an inspection and ensure that all equipment is safe for use. Any unsafe
equipment or conditions and any preventative measure undertaken therefor shall
be recorded in the drilling log book.

(5) It is prohibited to operate or move any drilling rig, except where all workers are in
a safe location.

(6) All moving parts liable to cause an accident or injury shall be properly guarded.
Guards on all driving chains shall be strong enough to withstand the impact of a
chain breaking under load.

(7) All stairs, stairways, handrails, safety fences on platforms and on drilling rigs
shall be maintained in good condition. It is prohibited to place, store or leave
tools or materials lying on stairs, stairways or on any platform.

(8) It is prohibited for any operator to leave any drilling equipment unattended while
in operation.

(9) Drilling crews and all other persons shall be at a safe distance from any moving
drill stem. It is prohibited to pass over any moving drill stem.

(10) It is prohibited for drilling crews to hold the drill steel or place their hands on the
chuck while drilling is being undertaken.

(11) In the event of a power failure, the drill controls shall be placed in the neutral
until power is restored.

137
(12) Any drill hole not in use shall be covered or fenced off.

(13) It is prohibited to undertake any drilling work using the mud flush system unless
means are installed to give warning of loss of mud.

Article 233
Precaution on Drilling Rigs

(1) The derrick or drill mast shall be inspected before being erected or installed.
Tools and other small articles required for erections shall be tied or otherwise
prevented from falling. Heavy tools and equipment shall never be carried aloft by
hand, hoisting equipement shall be provided.

(2) A recognised system of hand signaling shall be used during load handling and
slinging, and which shall be given by a person appointed therefor. In no
circumstances shall the hoisting equipment be used to raise or lower personnel.

(3) Derrickmen shall wear safety belts at all times when aloft. The safety belt tail
rope shall be securely tied to the derrick mast 3 metres directly above the working
platform and arranged in such a manner that there is no danger of its fouling the
running gear.

(4) Where substructures are used, guard rails not less than 90 centimetres high and
toeboards 15 centimetres high shall be fitted around the rig floor. Walkways and
platforms shall have non-slip surfaces.

(5) Workers who are nervous of working at high levels shall not be sent up a derrick
or mast. Persons working aloft at a derrick or mast shall wear safety belts and
lifelines and they shall be equipped with a belt in which hand tools can be secured

(6) The rig floor area and the draw-works engine floor area shall have not less than
two escape exits placed on opposite sides of the rig to give unobstructed escape.

(7) The safety line at every dangerous platform on any derrick shall be well
maintained.

(8) Electric motors used to drive draw-works shall have a suitable device, in addition
to the regular motor control, which can be used as a means of stopping the motor
promptly in case of emergency. Electric motors and other electrically operated
equipment shall be adequately grounded.

(9) A derrickman shall not be aloft and all personnel shall stand clear off the rig floor
while work on stuck drill pipe or casing is performed. When a line is being run
into or pulled from a drill hole, workers shall be at a safe distance.

138
(10) A box or shelf shall be provided to store all drill bits and other tools.

(11) The crown block sheaves of portable derricks and masts shall be equipped with
guards that will prevent the hoisting line being accidentally displaced from the
sheave grooves.

Article 234
Bangka Drills

(1) When collaring or deepening a drill hole the casing shall always be maintained in
a vertical position.

(2) It is prohibited for more than two persons to be standing on the platform when
when collaring holes and it is prohibited for more than four people to stand on the
platform after the casing has been planted rigidly.

(3) A kick plate 15 centimetres in height shall be installed around the edge of any
rotating platform.

(4) Tools shall not be placed on any rotating platform.

(5) Given that on rotating drill machines, installation and dismantling of the drilling
rig, as well as the cleaning of the mouth of the drill hole is carried out manually,
the drill shall be secured and cut off from the electrical connection or the drive
motor.

Article 235
Warning and Other Signs

Warning notices stating restrictions applicable to unauthorized persons, naked lights,

smoking and other hazards shall be prominently displayed as well as signs indicating the
location of fire extinguishers and first aid kits.

Article 236
Hand Drills

Before any hand drill is moved from one work site to another work site, the compressor
shall be turned off and the hose released.

Article 237
Floating Drill Rigs

139
(1) The working deck on any floating platform shall be no less than 50 centimetres
above the surface of the water on high tide and shall be fitted with a safety fence,
toe boards and other safety equipment. Floating platforms shall be constructed to
be watertight and shall be inspected no less than once a week.

(2) Every corner of the working deck shall be fixed to an adequately heavy anchor.
The anchor lines shall be stretched taut and the length of which shall be five times
the depth of the water. The bottom positions of the anchors shall be marked with
buoys.

(3) Every floating drilling rig shall be fitted with :

a. life vests for not less than 110% of the maximum total number of mine
workers on the deck and stored at easily reached and visible locations;

b. grappling hooks with handles the length of which shall be no less than 5
meters and with a sufficient number of ropes the individual lengths of which
shall not be less than 25 metres.

c. no less than 3 life buoys with cords of no less than 25 metres.

(4) For the entire duration of work shift life-rafts with a capacity of no less than 150
percent of the total number of mine workers on the said shift shall be provided.

(5) Where a large wave is thought or expected to occur, the floating drilling rig shall
be moved to a distance no less than 40 meters from the original drilling location
and from the original anchor site.

(6) A two way radio communication system shall be provided between the floating
drilling rig and the land station.

Article 238
Drilling Ships

(1) Every ship and supporting vessels used for drilling work shall comply with
prevailing shipping regulations.

(2) The derrick or drill mast on drilling ships shall be fitted with :

a. the flag of the company and appropriate warning signs that shall be clearly
visible during the daytime;

b. a red light at the top of the ship which shall be clearly visible at a distance of
no less than two nautical miles and

140
 c. one or more normal lights installed between a height of 6 metres and 30
metres above the surface of the sea and which shall be clearly visible from a
distance of no less than 5 nautical miles in darkness.

(3) Lights as intended in paragraph (2) letter c shall be designed to be capable of

sending Morse code letter U (..__) simultaneously and continuously for 15
seconds.

(4) Every drilling ship shall be equipped with an auxiliary electrical generator.

(5) Every drilling ship shall be equipped with safety equipment adequate enough to
be capable of extinguishing fires, rescues at sea and for drilling work.

Chapter VI

Surface Mines

Part One
Safe Working Procedures

Article 239
General

(1) Any mine which is still in use or which has been abandoned and which may be
hazardous, must be guarded off with a safety fence of no less than 80 centimetres
in height or warning signs shall be installed.

(2) Access ways into the working site of any mine activity shall be properly
maintained

(3) Every access way as required in paragraph (2) which has an inclination of more
than 40 degrees shall be equipped with a permanently installed stairs or ladder.
Where a ladder is installed at a gradient of more than 75 degrees a back cage shall
be installed.

(4) Permanently installed stairs as required in paragraph (3) shall be both safe and
sturdy.

(5) Permanent ladders which exceed 10 metres in length shall have a landing at every
10 metre interval and the upper extremity of the said ladders shall protrude 90
centimetres past each floor.

(6) A permit shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector for the use of cable
ways or vehicles which travel on rail for the transportation of people.

141
(7) The opening of any shaft, hopper, forge or the chute shall be guarded with a
safety fence.

Article 240
Working Methods

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall guarantee the stability of the mining slopes,
the stockpiles and that other materials have all been taken into account in the
planning of the mine.

(2) Stockpiling of overburden shall only be done at a distance of no less than 7.5
metres from the end of the bench above the mine.

(3) It is prohibited to undertake any undercutting activities at any working face,

bench or gallery, except where approval has been obtained from the Chief Mine
Inspector.

(4) All working faces shall be safe from overhanging rock, and at any time scaling is
being carried out all workers at the location in question shall evacuate.

(5) When any work is required to be carried out manually at any working face which
exceeds 2.5 meters in height from the working bench, all mine workers shall wear
safety belts or safety harnesses.

(6) The working face of any surface mine at the upper area of any underground
mining operation shall only be made after approval has been obtained from the
Chief Mine Inspector.

(7) It is prohibited to work or be on active stockpiles of shattered rock, except :

a. when ordered by a mine supervisor;

b. when discharge of rock to and from the stockpile has been stopped;

c. when it has been guaranteed that the chute at the base of the stockpile is
closed and

d. when the worker is wearing a safety belt connected to a rope of adequate

length which is firmly and safely attached to a fixed point above.

Article 241
The Height of Working Faces
and the Width of

142
 Working Benches

(1) The inclination, height and width of benches shall be both secured and well
constructed to ensure the safety of workers from falling materials or objects.

(2) The height of benches for work being carried out on layers containing sand, clay,
gravel and other loose material shall :

a. not exceed 2.5 meters when undertaken manually;

b. not exceed 6 meters when carried out mechanically;

c. not exceed 20 meters when carried out by means of a clamshell, dragline,

bucket wheel excavator or any like equipment except where approval has been
obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) The bench height for work carried out on solid material shall not exceed 6 meters
when undertaken manually.

(4) When excavation is carried out entirely by means of mechanical equipment

equipped with sturdy safety cabins, the maximum bench height for all types of
solid material shall be 15 meters, except when approval has been obtained from
the Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) A stability study of the slopes shall be carried out when :

a. the height of the benches at any bench mining system exceeds 15 meters and

b. the height of each bench exceeds 15 metres.

(6) The width of the bench working platform shall be no less than 1.5 times the bench
height or less determined by the equipment used. To ensure working safety, a
safety berm shall be built at the open edge, and shall be inspected every work
shift for the possible presence of cracking or stress marks or any other signs of
weakness.

143
 Article 242

(1) When constructing any shaft, trenching or any like work, and the wall opening
exceeds 1.2 metres, a support shall be installed or the said shaft, trenching etc.
shall be made on an incline at a safe angle.

(2) The construction of any embankment or water dam either temporary of permanent
shall be adequately strong and shall fulfil prevailing requirements.

Article 243
Drainage and Dams

(1) Every surface mine shall have a drainage system designed with an adequate
capacity.

(2) In order to reduce water flow into open cut areas, diverting embankments and
drainage systems shall be constructed.

Part Two

Hydraulic Mines

Article 244
General

Planning for hydraulic mines shall provide details on the water circulation system, water
channels, dams and waste pools etc.

Article 245
Dams

(1) All dams shall be constructed according to the designs of a competent technician.

(2) The width of the base of embankments made from sand material shall be no less
than 6 times the height of the embankment and the angle of inclination of the
walls shall not exceed 60 degrees against the flat plane, or shall not exceed the
angle of the stockpile of material contained therein.

(3) Any wood used in the construction of an embankment shall be sufficiently strong
and shall be installed sturdily.

144
(4) Dams shall be equipped with a pipe or canal installation that is capable of
carrying water and of limiting the surface of water to no less than 60 centimetres
below the surface of the embankment.

Article 246
Operation of the Monitor

(1) Manually operated monitors shall be equipped with an counterweight device.

When being operated the monitor shall be continually controlled by an operator.
The distance between the monitor and the walls of the mining bench shall be at
the very least, the same as the height of the said bench walls.

(2) The area within a radius of three metres of the monitor shall be free of wood, rock
chunks and other obstructions.

(3) It is prohibited for any person to be in front of any monitor that is operating.

(4) Mine workers being trained to operate the monitor shall be supervised by an
experience mine worker.

(5) The water pressure of the monitor shall be adequate enough to spray the walls of
upper benches.

(6) The height of mining benches shall not exceed 6 meters, except where otherwise
stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 247
Pumps and Pipes

(1) Water pumps installed above water shall be equipped with a mechanical device to
raise the said pump when necessary.

(2) The end of ground pump suction pipe shall be suspended from a tripod or any
other instrument with a similar function and be equipped with a floating device
and be fenced off.

(3) The ground pump room shall be equipped with sound indicating instruments
controlled by the pump operator.

(4) The pump room shall be covered by a roof and always be kept dry and clean.

(5) Spray pumps shall be fitted with indicator meters.

(6) Prior to operating a spray pump the pump employee shall first inform the monitor
operator.

145
(7) The end of the suction pipe of the spray pump shall be guarded off with a safety
fence and danger warning signs shall be installed.

(8) Mud pumps shall be properly installed and shall not be used as pathways for
people.

Article 248
Electricity and Machinery

(1) Every electrical motor, lights in the pump room, jig installation and classifier
shall be waterproof.

(2) All electrical installations shall be equipped with proper grounding.

(3) Overhead power line poles and or standard light poles shall be located so as to
avoid spaying by the monitor and shall not be placed close to the edge.

(4) Electrical cables shall not be laid over metal or steel pipes.

(5) Spot lights shall be installed at locations that are both dry and free from flooding
and be behind the monitor and be directed at the mining face.

(6) Removable spot lights shall be fitted with leakage breakers.

Part Three
Earth Moving Equipment

Article 249
General

(1) The type and construction of earth moving equipment used at any mine shall be
appropriate to the kind of work to be performed thereby, the work site conditions
and the nature of the soil or rock to be moved.

(2) Every modification made to the construction of earth moving equipment from the
standards of the manufacturer which may impact on the safety or stability of the
said equipment shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

146
 Article 250
Operator Requirements

(1) Operators of earth moving equipment at any mining operation shall meet the
following requirements :

a. be no less than 21 years of age;

b. have been declared both mentally and physically in good health by a doctor
and

c. be in possession of an operating license issued by the Chief Mine Inspector or

by any other authorised employee on behalf of the Technical Mine Manager.

(2) The operating license as required by paragraph (1) letter c may only be granted
after the person applying has successfully passed an operation examination
carried out by the mining company concerned.

(3) The operating license shall only apply in the mining operations area where the
said document was granted.

Article 251
Prohibitions Against
Passengers

(1) The operator shall prohibit any person from being on any earth moving equipment
in operation, except for the purposes of inspection, supervision, maintenance,
repair work or upon the instruction of an authorised trainer.

(2) It is prohibited for any person to board or to alight from any earth moving
equipment which is still operating.

Article 252
Parking Earth Moving Equipment

(1) It is prohibited to leave unattended any earth moving equipment except when the
parking brake has been applied, the bucket or knives have been lowered to ground
level and the machine turned off.

(2) When an earth moving equipment is parked on an incline, chocks shall be used
under the wheels or the said equipment shall be directed toward the roadside or
embankment and the bucket and knives shall be lowered to ground level.

147
(3) When an electrically operated earth moving equipment is to be left unattended,
the master switch shall be turned off and all of the controls shall be set to neutral
and the parking brakes shall be applied.

(4) When any earth moving equipment is parked at any place which may be
dangerous to other traffic the parking lights shall be turned on as well as other
hazard indicators.

Article 253
Inspections and Maintenance

(1) The machinery and any mechanical part on earth moving equipment shall be
inspected prior to being operated and regular inspections must be carried out.

(2) The employee in charge of engineering shall appoint a technician and stipulate a
schedule for inspections as required in paragraph (1).

(3) The findings of inspections and maintenance as required in paragraph (1) shall be
recorded in a book provided, which shall be signed by the appointed technician.

(4) It is prohibited to cross or work underneath the boom or any part of an earth
moving equipment that is raised or suspended except when safety measures have
been taken to prevent the lowering of the boom or any part of the equipment.

(5) It is prohibited to carry out lubrication of any earth moving equipment which is
still operating except where the said equipment is equipped with an automatic
lubrication system.

(6) It is prohibited for any person to carry out repair work on any earth moving
equipment which is still operating except where the said operation of the
equipment is necessary for the purposes of repair and maintenance work and the
person undertaking the said work shall be positioned so as to not be exposed to a
hazard and be equipped with the necessary equipment.

Article 254
Equipment

(1) The soil conditions at the location where the earth moving equipment is operating
shall be adequately strong and in a safe and stable condition. To prevent
accidental movement during loading, the loader shall be secured with safety
chocks.

(2) The area within the work radius of any earth moving equipment shall be free from
obstructions and is prohibited for any person to be within the said area.

148
(3) Prior to operating any earth moving equipment, the operator shall first sound an
audible warning.

(4) Earth moving equipment shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions with regard to the work load, speed, engine Rpm’s and inclination of
work sites.

(5) It is prohibited to swing the dipper or the bucket above the cabin of any transport
vehicle until the operator has left the cabin and is in a safe place, except where the
said vehicle is specially designed to protect the operator from falling objects.

(6) It is prohibited to use earth moving equipment to lift or transport hazardous

materials.

(7) Where earth moving equipment is moving to another location, the digging
equipment or excavating bucket shall be lifted just above the ground so as not to
interfere with the operator’s view. In the case of draglines, the bucket shall be
kept as close as possible to the boom.

Article 255
Bulldozers

(1) Where bulldozers are working on steep cliffs precautionary measures shall be
taken such as tying the bulldozer with a strong cable to prevent rolling or sliding
over the edge.

(2) It is prohibited for any person to be in any area where bulldozers are clearing
trees and where trees may be falling.

(3) Bulldozers used for work as required in paragraph (2) shall be fitted with a sturdy
canopy.

Article 256
Precautionary measures

(1) It is prohibited to ride in the bucket of any earth moving equipment for the
purpose of transportation.

(2) It is prohibited to work or cross under the bucket of any loader which is operating.

(3) At night and at times of reduced vision earth movers shall be fitted with adequate
lighting.

Part Four

149
 Evacuation in an
Emergency Situation

Article 257

(1) When any person assigned to take charge of any division of any mining activity
becomes aware of any impending dangerous situation, the said person :

a. must inspect or order the inspection of the conditions of the area threatened by
danger and must take precautionary measures;

b. must immediately order every worker in the said area to evacuate where the
situation cannot be secured;

c. after having carried out the stipulation as intended in letter b, shall then
inform his/her direct superiors that a danger exists and that all workers have
evacuated.

d. it is prohibited to enter the said danger area until declared safe.

(2) Any mine worker who knows of or suspects impending danger shall :

a. order every person to evacuate the said danger area and

b. immediately inform the person in charge of the said danger area.

(3) The dangerous situation and any actions to overcome the situation already taken
shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

150
 Chapter VII

Dredges

Part One
Person in Charge

Article 258
Responsibility

(1) Every dredge must have a dredge master, who shall be responsible for the
supervision, direction and control of the dredge operation including other
works/places within his supervision.

(2) The dredge master is responsibile for the safety and health of every person on the
dredge as well as any other place under his/her supervision.

(3) The dredge master shall be assisted by several shift leaders who shall be
responsible for the operation of the dredge on every shift.

(4) It shall be prohibited for any dredge to operate without the dredge master and or
the work shift leaders on board the dredge.

(5) In order to be appointed to the position of dredge master and or shift leader the
qualifications as stipulated by the Technical Mine Manager shall be met and the
names of those accepted shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

Article 259
Dredge Code
Regulation Book

(1) On every dredge a Dredge Code Book and Dredge Log Book validated by the
Technical Mine Manager shall be provided and shall be in accordance with the
format as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Every mine worker on the dredge shall understand the contents of the Dredge
Code Book.

(3) The following shall be recorded in the Dredge Code Book :

a. A copy of the Mining Dredge Order;

151
 b. all orders, prohibitions, and instructions regarding the dredge that has been
recorded in the Mine Book;

c. the findings of inspections and measuring carried out during every work shift
of every compartment and tank filled with water or fuel;

d. the results of measuring of the height of the free board at each corner of the
dredge at each work shift;

e. the findings of inspections of the ballast pumps and the pipelines which shall
be carried out every weekly;

f. the findings of inspections carried out by the Technical Mine Manager or a

representative or expert employee thereof.

g. emergency signals and work signals

(4) A copy of the Dredge Code Book shall be available at the mining office on shore
and all entries made in the original book shall be immediately recorded in the said
copy.

Article 260
Mine Workers on Dredges

(1) All mine workers who work on a dredge shall be capable of swimming.

(2) Mine workers who work temporarily or any person permitted by the Technical
Mine Manager or the dredge master who is not capable of swimming shall at all
times wear a life vest while on the dredge.

Article 261
Duties of the
Dredge Chief

(1) The dredge master shall notify immediately the Technical Mine Manager when :

a. a fire occurs which may interrupt the operations of the dredge;

b. any damage which may endanger the dredge and workers;

c. any listing of the dredge of more than 2 degrees;

d. bad weather which may endanger the dredge;

e. any accident involving the fall of a person around the dredge.

152
(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall give a response to every report from the
dredge master as required in paragraph (1) and shall issue immediate orders or
instructions for the safety of the mine workers and the dredge.

(3) Orders and instructions given as required in paragraph (2) shall put the safety of
the mine workers in the first priority.

Article 262
Dredge Requirements

(1) Every dredge shall be stable and sea worthy of operation.

(2) Every dredge shall have a control room and a room for the operator of the
electrical generator which shall be soundproof, and a dining hall that must meet
health requirements.

(3) Every dredge shall have a ballast pump which shall always be kept in good
condition.

(4) The construction of the deck of the dredge shall be constructed so as not to allow
water to remain on the decks.

Article 263
Dredge Operation Permit

(1) Based on the evaluation of a dredge inspection result the Chief Mine Inspector
shall issue a dredge operation permit which shall be valid for a period of ten years
and it can be extended.

(2) Extension of the permit as specified in paragraph (1) may be granted after the
implementation of an inspection by the Mine Inspector or any expert staff
appointed by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) It is prohibited to make any modifications to any dredge which may affect the
stability of the dredge except where approval has been obtained from the Chief
Mine Inspector.

153
 Part Two
Placement of Dredges

Article 264
Mooring

(1) The head, bow, and stern lines of any dredge operating at sea or on land shall
each be properly fixed to the anchor or poles.

(2) Every connection on the mooring lines which uses connection clamps shall be
fitted with safety nuts and pins.

Article 265
Installation and Control
of Mooring Cables

(1) Every mooring cable shall be free from any obstructions and shall be stretched
directly between the dredge and the anchors or poles.

(2) In the case of an obstruction that cannot be removed, the mooring cables shall be
overpassed by using safe methods.

(3) It is prohibited to do any work within a distance of less than 20 metres of the
mooring cables while a dredge is in operation.

(4) Before pulling up the mooring cables, the cable operator shall be certain that no
person is within a distance of 20 meters of the said cables.

(5) At least 2 rolls of mooring cable shall be left on the mooring cable drum when the
said cable is pulled out to its maximum length.

(6) Making of the cable eyes shall only be done by a competent person specially
appointed by the Technical Mine Manager.

(7) Every anchor or pole shall be marked clearly and visibly.

(8) Mooring cable lines at sea shall be clearly and visibly marked.

154
 Article 266
Mooring Cable Holder

(1) It is prohibited to be on the buoy mooring line while the swing winch is in
operation.

(2) Any employee working on a buoy mooring line or performing repair work on any
cable at sea shall be supervised by two other employees in a rescue boat.

(3) All employees as specified in paragraph (2) must wear life vests.

(4) Rescue apparatus shall be provided on the rescue boat.

(5) The rescue boat shall not be necessary where the buoy or work barge as required
in paragraph (2) is sufficiently stable and accommodating.

Article 267
Mooring Lines Crossing
Roadways or Water Ways

(1) Warning signs shall be installed and precautionary measures taken where mooring
cables cross roadways or water ways.

(2) Any mooring cable support where the cable crosses over any road shall be
adequately strong and safe.

(3) Where mooring cables cross water traffic ways, the Technical Mine Manager
shall appoint an employee to ensure the safety of the waterway.

(4) Water traffic way users as specified in paragraph (3) may only be permitted to
pass after the mooring cables have been lowered into the water.

(5) Mooring cable as required in paragraph (4) shall be weighted down to enable the
cable to be lowered more rapidly and deeply.

(6) Where any access-way to a dredge crosses any mooring cable, the Technical Mine
Manager shall stipulate special safety rules therefor.

155
 Part Three
Dredge Pontoons

Article 268
Compartment Inspection Hatches

(1) Every compartment shall be fitted with an inspection hatch with a cover or door
which is capable of being closed tightly and of being water tight, and shall be at
least 50 centimetres in height having a diameter or width of at least 60
centimetres, and be well maintained.

(2) When the construction of the dredge makes closing of the inspection hatches
impossible the Chief Mine Inspector, following consultation with the Technical
Mine Manager shall stipulate other provisions for the inspection of hatches.

Article 269
Compartments

(1) Every compartment shall be water tight and shall always be kept dry and clean,
except where the said compartments are used to store reserve fuel or fresh water.

(2) It is prohibited to make any hole in the wall-plates between compartments, except
upon the permission of the Technical Mine Manager.

(3) Permission to create a hole in the wall plates between compartments shall be
recorded in the Mine Book.

(4) Safe working procedures with regard to paragraph (2) shall be stipulated by the
Technical Mine Manager and recorded in the Dredge Code Book.

(5) Upon completion of the work, any hole created in the walls of any bulkhead shall
be immediately closed.

(6) Every part of the pontoons on the port and starboard sides of the dredge as well as
those close to the bucket ladder shall be protected by means of a safety tank.

(7) It is prohibited to store any materials in any compartment for storing or for the
stability of the dredge except where special permission has been obtained from
the Chief Mine Inspector.

156
 Article 270
Ventilation of the
Compartments

(1) The compartments on every dredge shall be provided with a proper air ventilation
system.

(2) Every dredge shall be equipped with one or more blower.

(3) Air pressure in the last compartment of the air circulation system of any series of
compartments shall be at least 20 centimetres water columns higher than the air
pressure outside the said compartment.

(4) The height of the air pipe at the edge of the deck of any dredge in operation at sea
shall be at least 80 centimetres, and at any other place 40 centimetres.

(5) The height of the air pipe at the edge of the deck of any dredge in operation on
land shall be at least than 60 centimetres, and at any other place 40 centimetres.

(6) Air pipes shall be provided with a watertight plug suspended from the said
ventilation pipe readily available for use.

(7) Air pipes as required in paragraphs (4) and (5) shall be free from any obstacle,
and shall be easily visible and reachable.

(8) A diffuser shall be installed on the end of any air pipe used to ventilate
compartments.

Part Four
Inspections

Article 271
Routine Inspections

(1) At the beginning of each shift all compartments shall be inspected and the
contents of the cooling water tanks, fuel tanks and ballast tanks shall be
measured.

(2) No less than once a week ballast pump installations or bilge including the
pipelines and control valve shall must be inspected and tested.

(3) The report of the said inspections shall be signed by the inspecting employee.

157
(4) When ballast and bilge pumps are incapable of functioning well, immediate repair
work shall be carried out in at least 48 hours.

Article 272
Compartment Inspection
Methods

(1) Inspections of compartments shall be carried out by at least two employees, one
of whom shall stay on the outside of the compartment on the deck close to the
inspection hatch.

(2) The employee who enters the compartment, shall be provided with radio
communications equipment or shall wear a safety belt connected to a safety line
of adequate length and strength in order to be able to signal to the employee on
the outside of the compartment to go for help.

(3) Prior to entering the compartment, fresh air shall be blowed into the said
compartment for at least 30 continuous minutes.

(4) Every portable lamp used for the inspection of the compartments shall be gas tight
and shall not have an electrical voltage in excess of 24 volts.

Part Five
Dredge Safety

Article 273
Pontoons
Above the Surface
of the Water

(1) The freeboard of the pontoons of a mining dredge shall not be less than 50
centimetres at any point around the deck and in an emergency situation not less
than 25 centimetres.

(2) In order to facilitate readings of the height of freeboard above the surface of the
water as required in paragraph (1), the four corners of the dredge shall be fitted
with measuring scales.

(3) Exemption on the stipulations for the height of the freeboard above the surface of
the water as required in paragraph (1) shall be granted following prior approval
from the Chief Mine Inspector.

158
(4) On every work shift the height of the freeboard above the surface of the water at
the four corners of the dredge shall be recorded as well as the position of the
bucket ladder.

Article 274
Listing of the Dredge

(1) Every dredge shall be fitted with an inclinometer which is easily read and
installed in a central vertical position in the control room.

(2) When the permanent list of the dredge exceeds 2 degrees :

a. excavation and pumping work shall be stopped;

b. every effort must be made to realign and rebalance the dredge;

c. the Technical Mine Manager shall be immediately informed;

d. any employee not directly related to re-balancing or realignment efforts shall

prepare for the possibility of evacuation.

(3) Where the constant list of the dredge is more than 5 degrees, the Dredge Master
shall immediately order all persons to evacuate, except those employees directly
related and responsible for re-balancing and realignment efforts.

(4) Where the dredge is at a constant list of more than 7 degrees all employees shall
evacuate.

(5) Based on the studies of the balance system of the dredge, the Technical Mine
Manager may request exemption as intended in paragraph (3) and paragraph (4)
from the Chief Mine Inspector.

(6) The Technical Mine Manager shall set up an evacuation procedure from the
dredge in times of an emergency situation.

Part Six
Safety Equipment

Article 275

A safety rope with attached rings shall be provided around the pontoon of every dredge,
at a hight not exceeding 40 cm above the normal water level.

Article 276

159
(1) Every dredge shall be provided with :

a. life vests that comply with Indonesian National Standards, for at least 110
percent of the total maximum number of people at one time on the dredge.
The life vests shall be positioned where they are immediately available and
clearly visible;

b. at least 6 grappling hooks with handles not less than 5 metres in length..

c. at least 6 small anchors and each has a 25 metres rope, and

d. at least 6 life buoys and each has a 25 metres rope.

(2) The equipment as required in paragraph (1) shall always be available and
maintained in good condition.

Article 277
Rescue Chains in the
Waste Chamber

(1) The waste chutes of every dredge shall be provided with no less than three chains
hung crosswise or lengthways.

(2) About 25 centimetres from the end of such chutes there shall be provided two
chains with an iron ring at the lower end hanging down to within 10 centimetres
above the water level.

Article 278

Dredges which have conveyors for the purpose of waste disposal shall be fitted with
emergency stop switches connected to easily reached cords along the length of the
conveyor.

Article 279
Fire Prevention

(1) Every mining dredge shall be provided with a sufficient number and capacity of
fire fighting equipment of the type that can extinguish fire of any class.

(2) Fire extinguisher shall be placed at areas which have the potential for fire and
shall be conspicuous, easily reached, easily used and clearly marked. Each fire
extinguisher shall be maintained properly to be always ready for immediate use.

160
(3) Beside the fire fighting equipment as required in paragraph (1), every electrical
generator room shall be provided with powder fire extinguishers of substantial
capacity and set on trolleys or other means for mobility in use.

(4) All employees and supervisors in the electrical generator and transformer room
shall be trained to be capable of using fire extinguishers effectively and safely.

(5) It is prohibited to place anything in front of or around fire extinguishers which

may prevent ease of reach of the said fire extinguishers

(6) The liquid fuel pipeline in the machine room shall be made from copper or iron.

(7) It is prohibited to place anything, especially combustible materials, inside or

around electrical panels or transformers.

Article 280

(1) At every dredge operation a boat or motor boat shall be provided for transporting
employees or for the purpose of providing assistance.

(2) All boats or motor boats supporting the mining dredge operation shall be subject
to the provisions of this decree (order) as long as it is not contrary to the maritime
law.

(3) Every boat or motor boat supporting the dredge operation shall be provided with
life vests for not less than 110 percent of the maximum number of people on such
boat. Fire fighting equipment in sufficient numbers shall be provided on motor
boats.

(4) Motor boats supporting the dredge operation shall be provided with radio
communication.

(5) Any motor boat supporting the operation of only one dredge which operates at sea
shall always be at the such dredge.

(6) The working barge used as part of any dredge operation shall be considered as
part of the dredge.

161
 Article 281
The Stern Anchor

Every dredge operating at sea must be fitted with a safety anchor chain attached to the
stern of the dredge and shall be ready for immediate use at any time.

Part Seven
Machinery and Electricity

Article 282
Machinery

(1) Before starting any electrical generator or restarting any machinery on the dredge,
an audible pre-start warning shall be sounded throughout the dredge.

(2) Before any machine, equipment or any moving part of a dredge is operated or
restarted after a stoppage, the shift supervisor or a machine employee shall
inspect and ensure that no other person will be endangered by the operation of the
said machinery.

(3) Any moving part of any machine or transmission equipment on a dredge which
may be dangerous shall be properly guarded.

(4) It is prohibited to store any combustible materials or liquid substances in the

electrical generator room.

(5) Any revolving screen drive engine, upper tumbler drive engine, winch ladder
drive engine, and winch mooring line drive engine shall be provided with an
emergency stop switch and local switch with the capability of being padlocked by
any person doing repairs to the equipment.

(6) Emergency stop switches and local switches as required in paragraph (5) shall be
positioned for ease of visibility, ease of reach and use and shall be clearly marked.

Article 283
Electrical Requirements

(1) Every off-shore dredge shall be provided with an auxiliary electrical generator
with a capacity to be able to provide electricity for lighting, ballast pumps and
radio communication. The said auxiliary electricity generator shall be maintained
in good condition and shall always be ready for immediate use.

(2) All electrical panels, switches and lights on the dredge exposed to water must be
of a kind that is water proof.

162
(3) Electrical cable installations on a dredge shall be supported by a tray.

(4) Electrical cables that cut through a steel platform shall be guarded.

(5) The Technical Mine Manager shall create special rules for every type of work
using electric arc welding on a dredge and which shall include the following :

a. designation of a location that is safe for welding work;

b. the use of earth return conductors to the welding transformer independent of

the earth connector on the job being welded.

c. provisions regarding the storage and maintenance of electrode welding,

welding cables and electrode holder and

d. electric welding cable connections shall be properly insulated and be

waterproof.

(6) It is prohibited to use any welding machine which utilises an AC electrical current
on any dredge.

(7) Trail cable connections of electrical power lines from an electrical generator on
land to the dredge shall be waterproof and be supported by means of buoys.

(8) Every off-shore dredge shall be fitted with fog lights (yellow lights) at the very
least at the bow and stern.

Part Eight
Safety Measures

Article 284
Man Overboard

(1) If there is any person falling into the water around the dredge :

a. emergency signals shall be immediately sounded;

b. excavation and pumping work shall be immediately stopped;

c. assistance shall be given immediately.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager may order excavation and pumping work to be
restarted after the man overboard has been found or after a maximum search
effort has been made.

163
 Article 285
Diving Team

(1) Every off-shore dredge or group of off-shore dredges operating in a close area
shall provide a trained and organized sub-aqua rescue team being capable of using
sub-aquatic breathing apparatus except if otherwise stipulated by the Chief Mine
Inspector.

(2) The sub-aqua rescue team as required in paragraph (1) shall be under the
supervision of one Technical Mine Manager.

(3) Every member of the sub-aqua rescue team shall be trained and shall possess a
certificate of proficiency in the use of sub-aqua breathing apparatus awarded by a
training school or other institution recognised by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) Every member of the sub-aqua rescue team :

a. must ensure his availability at home or at his place of work for ease of contact
where necessary;

b. must receive periodic refresher training underwater;

c. must undergo regular health examinations.

(5) The rescue team shall be so organised that sufficeint team members are available
to render effective assistance during all working periods.

(6) Sufficient numbers of sub-aqua breathing apparatus and air cylinders shall be
provided and maintained and kept at a place designated by the Technical Mine
Manager.

Article 286
Emergency Signals

(1) All dredges shall be equipped with both audible and light emergency signalling
systems.

(2) Audible and light emergency signals as required in paragraph (1) shall be
stipulated by the Technical Mine Manager and recorded in the Dredge Regulation
Book.

(3) Every person on a dredge or any person who has a work relation to the dredge
shall understand the meaning of the emergency signals as required in paragraph
(1).

164
(4) In the case of any danger, only the Dredge Master or the shift supervisor or any
person appointed especially for this purpose can give or activate the danger
signals.

Article 287
Work Signals

(1) Every dredge shall be provided with a suitable audible signal system as working
communication.

(2) The code of working signals to be used shall be stipulated by the Technical Mine
Manager and every person on a dredge shall understand the meaning of such
signals.

(3) The code of working signals shall be posted at a prominent place at every
working area on a dredge.

Part Nine
Towing a Mining Dredge

Article 288

(1) A dredge can only be towed from one location to another by a written permission
of the Technical Mine Manager. The permit shall include the provision of such
towing.

(2) A copy of the towing permit as required in paragraph (1) shall be forwarded to the
Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 289
Safety Precautions

(1) Before towing a dredge from one location to another across the open sea, the
following safety precautions must be taken :

a. every compartment of the pontoons is in a safe condition;

b. every man-hole must be closed and made watertight;

c. ballast pump and the pipelines are in good working condition;

d. all ventilation pipes must be closed and made watertight and

165
 e. all loose equipment is secured to prevent movement.

(2) On every dredge being towed there shall be provided :

a. equipment to patch the pontoons;

b. portable pumps equipped with its own motor;

c. sufficient cooling water and fuel;

d. welding machines and apparatus

e. food and drinking water, in sufficient amount for all persons on the dredge
during the period of towing plus 100% as a reserve for emergency.

Article 290

(1) When towing a dredge across the open sea, the number of persons on such a
dredge, shall be limited to the work needed during the period of towing. The
names of those persons shall be entered in the Dredge Log Book.

(2) If any barges or floating devices are towed along with a dredge, no person shall
be allowed on the barges or floating devices and the tail attachment to the dredge
shall be such as to allow easy release or severance in emergency.

Article 291

Communication between the Towing Master of the dredge and the Captain of the Tug
Boat shall be by means of a two way radio communications system.

166
 Part Ten
Docking of Mining Dredge

Article 292
Docking

(1) Every dredge shall be in dock at least once every ten years, unless it is otherwise
stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Whilst any dredge is undergoing repair or overhaul in a dockyard owned by the
company concerned, the dockyard manager shall have responsibility for the safety
and health of workers.

(3) During docking of a dredge all steel plates in contact with water and any electrical
equipment shall be dismantled and replaced.

(4) Any changes made to the dredge which may affect stability or balance shall be
approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) When docking is complete, the Mine Inspector shall make an inspection of the
repairs of the said dredge.

Part Eleven
Auxiliary Facilities

Article 293

A building, located on land near the working area of the dredge, shall be available for the
purpose of carrying out recording of the presence of workers at the commencement and
completion of working hours.

Article 294
Bridges and Piers

(1) The construction of bridges and piers shall be adequately strong and be equipped
with safety fences.

(2) Pier as specified in paragraph (1) shall enable any person to board /alight any
water craft safely in any weather conditions both at low and high tide.

(3) Bridges and piers shall be fitted with lighting and direction signals.

167
(4) Any dredge operating inland shall be fitted with a bridge 60 centimetres in width
with an adequate length and fitted with hand railings to connect the dredge to
land.

Chapter VIII

Underground Ore Mines

Part One
Mine Administration

Article 295
Division of Mines

Underground mines that are close to each other and have connected ventilation systems,
shall be treated as one mine and shall be under the supervision of a sole Technical Mine
Manager except where otherwise stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 296
Underground Mine Manager
and Supervisors

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint an Underground Mine Manager
whose name shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(2) In carrying out supervision in the mine the Underground Mine Manager shall be
assisted by an operational supervisor and a technical supervisor.

(3) Where there exists more than one underground mine or where the underground
mining area is a large area, a regional supervisor may be appointed who shall be
delegated responsibility based on the area.

(4) The boundaries of areas as required in paragraph (3) shall be indicated on an

underground mining map and made clear at the Mining Office and a copy of the
map must be forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector.

168
 Article 297
Qualifications

(1) The Technical Mine Manager may act as the Underground Mine Manager except
where the Mine Inspector objects in the interests of occupational safety and
health.

(2) The Underground Mine Manager along with the supervisors shall have technical
capabilities, qualifications and experience as stipulated by the Chief Mine
Inspector.

(3) It is prohibited for any mine worker to undertake any activity in any mine
underground where the Underground Mine Manager or any other person
appointed as representative thereof is not present in the mining area.

(4) The requirements of paragraph (3) and Article 296 shall not apply where the
number of people carrying out any activity in an underground mine at any time is
less than 20 people for mechanical mines or less than 100 people for manual
mines.

(5) The Technical Mine Manager in appointing the supervisors as required in Article
296 paragraph (2) and paragraph (3) shall inform in writing the parties concerned
of their responsibilities and duties based on the area and time.

(6) The requirements of Article 12 shall also be required for the appointment of the
operational and technical supervisors for underground mines.

Article 298
Duties of the Underground Mine Manager
and Supervisors

1. The duties of the Underground Mine Manager shall be as follows :

a. to organise all activities in the operation of the mine in accordance with the
stipulations prevailing in this regulation and the instructions of the Technical
Mine Manager.

b. to guarantee the supply and flow of materials needed to support underground

mining activities, and to ensure safe and uninterrupted work.

c. to conduct inspections of all ventilation systems and any section of

underground mining that requires ventilation, at least once every three
months.

169
2. Inspect equipment, instruments, machinery, electrical equipment and work in any
underground mine, in accordance with the duties of the supervisor concerned.

3. The Underground Mine Manager or his representative may request a written order
from the operator or Technical Mine Manager for any work that may affect
his/her obligations as provided for in this regulation.

4. In an emergency situation the Technical Mine Manager may directly give orders
to underground mine workers bypassing the Underground Mine Manager.

5. The Technical Mine Manager shall be certain that detailed recording of the
number of people starting on every shift in the underground mine is carried out.

Article 299

(1) The operational supervisor and the technical supervisor shall be directly
responsible to the Underground Mine Manager.

(2) Where appointed, the regional supervisor as intended in Article 12 and Article 13
shall be responsible to the Underground Mine Manager.

Article 300
Mine Inspections

(1) On every shift the operational supervisor shall :

a. inspect every work site where work is being performed, every road or travel-
way used by workers during the said shift and any blasting site and

b. inspect every outlet, stairway to be used by workers that day.

(2) In carrying out inspections as required in paragraph (1) the operational supervisor
shall take corrective measures for any safety hazards found.

(3) At least every 7 days the operational supervisor or the technical supervisor shall
inspect the condition of the shaft, raise, winze or any emergency means of egress
to the surface.

(4) The operational supervisor shall carry out :

a. inspections of the entire ventilation shaft system at intervals of at least every

30 days;

170
 b. inspections of the entire length of roads that are not normally used but which
may be used as alternative emergency exits at intervals of at least three
months and

c. inspections of the potential danger of accumulated water or mud and carry out
safety measures as needed.

(5) The technical supervisor shall :

a. carry out inspections of the facilities and infrastructure used for any hoist in
underground mines at intervals of at least 24 hours for any hoist used to
transport people and at intervals of at least 7 days for any hoist used to
transport goods;

b. carry out inspections of facilities used for the transportation of people and
materials at every level;

c. carry out inspections of mine de-watering pumps and

d. carry out inspections of the condition of supports.

Article 301
Duties and Obligations
of Underground Mine Workers

(1) Apart from the stipulations of Article 32 and 33, every worker :

a. must work co-operatively and in compliance with instructions given by the

supervisor or employee in charge of any activity;

b. must not cause any other worker to not be able to work;

c. must not move or damage any safety fence, cover, barrier, warning sign or
any other infrastructure installed for safety purposes;

d. shall be prohibited from walking to, and from any other work site aside from
the designated routes;

e. shall be prohibited from forcibly crossing any barrier or danger sign except
with the permission of the supervisor;

f. shall be prohibited from sleeping while in the underground mine and

g. shall be prohibited from forcibly opening any locked door, entering any
machine room or control room except with the permission of the supervisor.

171
(2) During any mining activities :

a mine workers shall make detailed inspections of :

1) the working face

2) any road that is being dismantled or repaired and

3) any support being installed or dismantled;

particularly where blasting has only recently been carried out.

b. mine workers shall ensure that any work site left at the end of a working shift
is safe, however, where this cannot be carried out, the said area shall be
fenced off and a report made to the Underground Mine Manager and

c. mine workers shall take any necessary measures to overcome interruptions to

the ventilation of the mine.

(3) It is prohibited to leave any lamp or any other combustible goods at the
underground mine site without supervision.

(4) It is prohibited to handle or operate any electric motor that is more powerful than
7.5 kilowatts, except :

a. when carried out by an operator;

b. when carried out by a mine worker acting on written orders and

c. in an emergency situation to turn the motor off.

(5) It is prohibited to release any noxious or combustible gas in any underground

mine.

(6) On hoist installations for the transportation of mine workers it is prohibited to

climb on top of the roof of the conveyance skip except where permitted by the
supervisor.

(7) When climbing on top of the conveyance it is prohibited to :

a. attempt to or try to open the gates of the conveyance and

b. attempt to leave the conveyance prior to coming to a complete standstill at the

stop.

172
 Part Two
Means of Egress

Article 302
General

At underground mining works two separate exits shall be provided except during shaft
development, the construction of exits to the surface, the construction exploration shafts,
or any shaft not intended for production and which was commenced from a shaft or exit
to the surface with the stipulation that the number of workers shall not exceed 30 people.

Article 303
Exits from the Mine

(1) Shaft or exits as specified in Article 302 shall be separated by at least 30 metres
so that any interruption in one of the said exits will not affect the use of the other
exit.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall stipulate evacuation procedures for the use of
one exit where one of the exits cannot be used due to an interruption.

(3) Where an interruption as indicated in paragraph (2) occurs, the Technical Mine
Manager shall :

a. carry out the procedures for evacuation from one exit

b. order securing measures to be carried out and

c. make a report for the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) Where an interruption as indicated in paragraph (2) occurs, all underground mine
work shall be stopped and the Technical Mine Manager shall limit as much as
possible the number of mine workers under the ground namely :

a. only those mine workers carrying out securing work of the exit affected and

b. only those mine workers who are providing accident assistance and equipment
repair work.

(5) Repair work of the affected exit as specified in paragraph (2) may be carried out
after approval from the Mine Inspector is obtained.

Article 304
Equipment and Auxiliary Apparatus

173
(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide additional equipment where the
normal equipment used for the exit is damaged or jammed.

(2) Additional equipment as required in paragraph (1) shall :

a. be maintained, inspected and tested by a competent person to always be ready

for immediate use and

b. shall be inspected and tested by a competent person.

(3) The Technical Mine Manager shall create adequate and effective requirements for
the use of equipment and shall ensure that the said guidelines are known and
abided by and that the copies thereof are displayed at the mining office.

Article 305
Access between Exits

Apart from the requirements of Article 302, every landing at any shaft or exit to the
surface shall be equipped with a access way or ladder that leads to the landing at the shaft
or exit way to another surface.

Article 306
Construction and Maintenance
of Roads and Ladders

The Underground Mine Manager shall ensure that :

a. any road connecting to any place of work shall :

1) be adequately constructed and well maintained;

2) be safe and easy to use for walking and the height of which must not be less
than 1.7 metres and

3) free from obstructions.

b. every ladder or stairway shall be constructed for strength and be well maintained

Article 307
Means of Egress from Work Sites

174
(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 302, every work site shall be equipped
with two separate means of egress, one of which leads to the shaft and one which
leads to the surface.

(2) The means of egress which leads to the shaft or means of egress to the surface
shall be clearly marked.

(3) A clear scheme shall be provided at the means of egress from any work site which
leads to the mine means of egress.

(4) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall not apply to :

a. work sites with less than nine workers where the possibility exists for up to
three additional temporary workers for such duties as inspections,
examinations, testing or taking samples and

b. approval has been obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 308
Guards or Barrier Requirements

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall install adequate guards at any area declared
dangerous.

(2) An employee working at any dangerous area as specified in paragraph (1) shall
check that the barrier or guards is installed in good condition.

(3) It is prohibited to change or move any barrier or guards at any dangerous area
without the permission of the Technical Mine Manager.

Article 309
Intake Airways

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that the fresh intake airway to any
work site is well maintained and that where possible materials used along the
intake airway are fireproof.

(2) In the fresh air intake airway it is prohibited to :

a. bring any combustible goods and

b. carry out any activity which may lead to fire.

Part Three
Shafts and Hoisting

175
 Article 310
Shafts and Their Use

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that every shaft, raise, winze and
incline including the equipment thereof is installed for strength and safety.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that the operation of the shaft, raise,
winze, incline and including the equipment thereof is carried out safely.

(3) The Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. appoint competent workers to carry out inspections, testing and maintenance of

the shaft, raise, winze, incline and the equipment thereof;

b. stipulate in writing and in detail what needs to be inspected, tested and

maintained as intended in letter a and

c. record the findings of inspections and testing.

(4) In carrying out work as required in paragraph (3) letter a :

a. safety belts shall be provided in adequate numbers as well as hanging

facilities and

b. employees shall always wear safety belts.

(5) It is prohibited to enter the bottom of any shaft which is not fitted with shaft
covers, except for the purpose of carrying out work or to sink the shaft and only
where adequate safety measures have been taken.

(6) Any landing at a shaft shall be equipped with a safety gate to prevent material
entering the shaft and the said gate shall be closed except when loading and
unloading.

(7) Every landing at a shaft shall be equipped with an adequately large space to
enable the movement of people, goods and equipment.

(8) Positive stop blocks or derail switches shall be installed on any rail track leading
to the collar of or the landing of any shaft.

(9) Loading and unloading facilities shall be built in such a way as to prevent any
material falling into the shaft.

Article 311

176
 Transportation through the Shafts,
Winzes, Raises and
Inclines

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide adequate and safe equipment for mine
workers while using any shaft, winze, raise, and incline.

(2) Any shaft, winze, raise and incline with depths of more than 45 meters shall be
equipped with a hoisting machine.

Article 312
Transportation of Materials and Minerals
through Shafts, Winzes, Raises
and Incline Roads

The Technical Mine Manager shall implement safety measures when transporting
materials and minerals through any shaft, winze, raise and incline roads.

Article 313
The Hoisting Machine and
Equipment Thereof

The hoisting machine and equipment thereof shall meet the following stipulations :

a. made to prevailing standards;

b. be 5 percent more powerful than the required level of power to lift a conveyance
at maximum load;

c. be equipped with brakes capable of stopping the conveyance at maximum load at

the lowest point in the shaft, and be capable of withstanding the pull at maximum
power from the machine, and be equipped with a brake lock as well as integrated
safety facilities;

d. be equipped with a conveyance position indicator;

e. be equipped with an emergency button in the hoist operator room;

f. be equipped with automatic equipment to prevent the hoisting machine from

moving beyond designated limits and exceeding stipulated speeds, except where
stipulated otherwise by the Chief Mine Inspector;

g equipped with automatic brakes capable of safely stopping a load when the
hoisting machine is not capable of lifting a load;

177
h. be equipped with signals which sound automatically at a distance of two
revolutions from the rope drum or at a specified distance prior to the conveyance
arriving at the landing.

i. there shall be no less than 3 rolls of remaining cable on the rope drum when the
conveyance is at the lowest landing

j. all equipment on the hoisting machine shall be easily operated by the hoist
operator from the seat and

h. safety equipment shall be provided to absorb collisions where the conveyance

slides freely at the bottom of the shaft.

Article 314
Lifting Equipment
at the Shaft

(1) It is prohibited to use any conveyance for the transportation of people where the
construction of the said conveyance makes it possible for people to come into
unintentional contact with the walls of the shaft.

(2) In order to prevent the conveyance being pulled beyond the maximum limit of the
top of the shaft, equipment shall be installed to stop and withhold the conveyance
safely.

(3) The design of a conveyance shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector prior
to the said conveyance being built and operated.

Article 315
The Rope Book

(1) At any mine where hoisting machines are used, the Technical Mine Manager shall
provide a book to be called the Rope Book in which shall be recorded all
technical details regarding cables, shafts, winzes, raises and any conveyance used
in the operation of the mine, including as well as the findings of cable testing and
inspections.

(2) The Rope Book shall always contain the latest data and may be inspected
frequently by the Mine Inspector.

Article 316
Cable Inspections and
Safety Equipment

178
(1) Hands-on inspections of the exterior of the hoist cable and tail cable shall be
made in order to determine the presence of any damage at least once a day and the
findings shall be recorded.

(2) At least once a month the section of the hoist cables which are continually
measured and coiled, as well as the tail cables, guide cables and the rubbing
cables shall be inspected after cleaning and the diameter of the cables shall be
measured at a selected points and the findings of the inspections recorded.

(3) Once in a month the section of the cable remaining on the drum when the
conveyance is at the lowest position shall be inspected and lubricated. Where
during the said inspection, damage is found, the damaged section of the cable
shall be cut out while still complying with letter i. of Article 313.

(4) At least once a day the emergency safety catches shall undergo an inspection
which must entail the state of cleanliness, gripping power and distance in
accordance with the instructions of the Technical Mine Manager.

(5) At least once every three months the emergency safety catches as required in
Article (4) shall be inspected and tested by means of suddenly releasing the empty
conveyance from stopping position to enable the safety catches the opportunity to
grip the guides.

(6) When the emergency safety catches as required in paragraph (5) are not
functioning the conveyance shall not be used until repair work is complete.

(7) Measuring and recording of the following shall be carried out at least once a
month for friction hoist installations :

a. stretching of the cables;

b. the diameter of the cables;

c. the position and number of broken wires in the cable.

(8) The findings of the inspection and testing as required in paragraph (1), paragraph
(2), paragraph (3) and paragraph (7) shall be recorded in the Rope Book and the
implementation of paragraph (4) and paragraph (5) shall be recorded in the Hoist
Book.

(9) At least once a year a detailed inspection shall be carried out on any damage to
any part of the hoisting machine, namely the headgear pulley, deflecting sheaves,
the shafts and bearing blocks as well as the hoist cables. None destructive testing
equipment shall be used. The date of the test shall be recorded in the Hoist Book
and be reported to the Technical Mine Manager.

179
 Article 317
Criteria for Cables
to be Discarded

(1) It is prohibited to use any hoist cable at any shaft, raise or winze where :

a. the strength of which has fallen 10 percent from its original strength;

b. stretching tests indicate that stretching is more than 60 percent compared to

the original stretching tests;

c. the number of broken wires in one strand exceeds six;

d. the cables are rusted or

e. where the degree of lengthening of the cable of the friction hoist exceeds the
normal degree of lengthening.

(2) No tail cable, guide cable or rubbing cable shall be used if :

a. their strength has fallen by 25 percent from the original strength;

b. lengthening of the stretching tests exceeds 60 percent compared to original

testing;

c. the number of broken wires in one strand exceeds six or

d. the cables are rusted.

180
 Article 318
Cable Strength

1) A new installed hoisting cable for a skip shall have a safety factor of 5 of the
maximum loaded capacity of the skip.

2) the strength of the cable being used to calculate the safety factor, shall be taken
from the strength of the cable noted in the testing certificate issued by laboratories
for cable testing.

3) a safety factor of the cable shall be calculated using data from the dead load,
acceleration, friction factor, movement factor, and bending strength.

Article 319
Hoisting Cables

1) A safety factor of new installed hoisting cables shall be calculated as follows:

a) calculation based on static condition resulting from the strength of the cable
compared to the maximum loaded skip, with at least a safety factor of 6.

b) calculation based on dynamic conditions resulting from considering the effect

of the dead load, acceleration, friction, and bending strength, with a safety
factor of 5.

2) It is prohibited to make use of hoisting cable as specified in paragraph (1) for

more than 2 years.

3) When results of an inspection and testing of a cable meet any requirements of

Article 316, the cable shall be changed, even if it is less than 2 years.

Article 320
Hoist Cable Connections

(1) The connection device between the hoist cable and the conveyance shall not be
capable of coming loose itself and it shall be prohibited to use a open hook.

(2) The connecting device as required in paragraph (1) shall be approved by the
Technical Mine Manager.

181
 Article 321
Cable Use Limits

(1) It is prohibited to use any cable that has been spliced for hoisting purposes.

(2) It is prohibited to use any cable which does not possess a testing certificate from a
certified laboratory.

(3) It is prohibited to use any cable not equipped with specifications.

(4) It is prohibited to use any used cable for hoisting, except with the written
approval of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) It is prohibited to use used hoisting cables for hoisting purposes unless the cable
has been well maintained and the Technical Mine Manager has ensured that the
said cable is still safe for use.

(6) It is prohibited to reverse the ends of the cable that has been attached to the drum,
and attach it to the conveyance mechanism, or vice versa except with the written
approval of the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 322
Rope Capping

(1) It is prohibited to use rope capping for any hoist, except where the said capping
was made six months prior to use.

(2) No capped rope shall be used unless the type of capping withstands a load at least
90 percent of the breaking strength of the rope, and the capping was made under
supervision of a competent person.

Article 323
Rope Re-capping

(1) It is prohibited to re-use any rope capping except where the original rope capping
was cut no less than 2 meters.

(2) The strands of the cut of cable as specified in paragraph (1) shall be opened up
and the condition of the section in the cable shall be tested by a capable person
appointed by the Technical Mine Manager and the results of testing shall be
recorded in the Rope Book.

182
 Article 324
Rope Capping Methods

Any cable which has the end strands opened up and folded back forming a cone shall not
be used in any hoist except where a wedge shaped cover made from soft metal is between
the unopened cable and opened cable and the end is folded back. The length of the wedge
shaped cover shall not be less than eight times the diameter of the cable.

Article 325
Lubrication of the Cable

Lubrication of the cable on the operating drum shall be carried out in accordance with the
operating conditions and such maintenance shall be done at least once a month, or as
frequently as possible in order to ensure that the lubricant on the cables remains is good
condition.

Article 326
Inspections of the Hoist Cable

After 18 months of service and thereafter at intervals of six months, the hoisting rope
shall be cut off no less than 3 meters from the lower end measured from the clamp or the
like for testing and the results of the said testing shall be recorded in the Rope Book.

Article 327
Inspections of Attachments

(1) On newly installed hoist cables, the connecting attachments between the cable
and the conveyance mechanism, and between the cable and the hoist drum, shall
be inspected by a competent person as appointed by the Technical Mine Manager.

(2) Equipment as specified in paragraph (1) shall not be used prior to the required
tests which require that two trips of the conveyance skip be done, up and down at
maximum work load, and only after the connection attachments have been re-
tested with good results.

(3) The hoist operator shall record the results of the tests as required in paragraph (2)
in the Hoist Book and the findings of inspections of the connection attachments
must be recorded in the Rope Book.

183
 Article 328
Hoist Operator Room

(1) The hoist operator room shall be properly constructed to ensure that the noise of
the machine or any other noise does not prevent the hoist operator from hearing
sound signals.

(2) The hoist operator room shall be fitted with emergency lighting.

(3) It is prohibited to enter the hoist operator room except where permitted by the
Underground Mine Manager.

Article 329
Hoist Head Frames, Sheaves
and Drums

(1) The construction of the hoist head frame shall be capable of withstanding total
dead load, either live or wind loading.

(2) The hoist head frame shall be high enough to give adequate clearance for the
conveyance to stop in the event that it travels beyond the designated limits.

(3) The head sheave and deflection sheaves shall be appropriate for the size of the
cable and the said sheaves shall be properly maintained.

(4) The dimensions of the drums shall suitable for the type and length of cable used
for hoist installations,.

(5) The hoist head frame shall provide an escape exit in the event that the conveyance
moves through the safety limit switches into the head frame.

Article 330
Requirements of the
Hoist Operator

(1) The hoist operator shall be at least 21 years of age and be adequately educated
and granted authority.

(2) Every hoist operator shall be physically and mentally healthy as evidenced by a
doctor’s certificate and shall be free from the effects of alcohol and narcotics.

(3) It is prohibited to operate any equipment which may impact on the movement of
the hoist or hamper the operation of the hoist, except where so authorised.

184
(4) The hoist operator is prohibited from transferring his/her duties to any other
person except to a competent person in an emergency situation, or a person who
was trained under the supervision of a hoist operator granted authority by the
Technical Mine Manager.

(5) While any person is underground, the hoist operator shall always be in the hoist
operator’s room.

(6) The hoist operator is prohibited from working more than 8 hours a day except in
emergency conditions.

(7) A maximum extension of four hours of the working hours may be granted and
shall only be granted for Sundays or holidays but rest time of no less than 8 hours
must still be available before returning to work.

Article 331
Speed of the Hoist

(1) The hoist speed during the transport of people shall not exceed 5 metres per
second, except in an emergency situation.

(2) The hoist speed during the transport people for any shaft shall be determined by
the Technical Mine Manager and the said speed limit must not be passed.

(3) Maximum normal operating acceleration and deceleration rates shall not exceed
1.5 meters per second square (m/s2) unless stipulated otherwise by the Chief Mine
Inspector.

(4) An automatic control shall be installed to ensure that the acceleration and
deceleration do not exceed 1.5 meters per second square (m/s2).

Article 332
Signals

(1) Every mine shaft shall be equipped with communication equipment, signals that
connect the hoist machine room with the base of the working shaft, working level,
shaft collar and every landing deck.

(2) Where the hoist is equipped with electric signals, the hoist operator shall repeat
the same signals.

(3) Signalling equipment as required in paragraph (1) shall only be installed or

operated on the conveyance.

185
(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall create uniform rules regarding hoist signals
from the hoisting machine which shall be posted in the hoist room and at every
landing level.

(5) Any worker handling a conveyance, skips and any other vehicle used to transport
people or materials must understand the signalling regulations.

(6) It is prohibited to give a signal to operate or stop a conveyance or skip except by

an authorised person.

(7) Apart from the signals as specified in paragraph (1) voice communication such as
a telephone shall be provided at each station and the hoist room.

Article 333
Hoist Specifications

(1) A drum hoist unit shall be certified by the manufacturer for the allowable
maximum pull and maximum suspended work load.

(2) A friction hoist unit shall be certified by the manufacturer for the allowable
maximum rated suspended load.

(3) It is prohibited to increase the capacity of the work load of the hoist except where
written approval from the Chief Mine Inspector is granted.

Article 334
Permits for Hoists for the
Transportation of People

(1) Written permission shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector prior to using
any hoist for the transportation of people.

(2) A hoist permit as required in paragraph (1) may only be issued where the hoist
complies with the requirements as stipulated in these regulations and the Mine
Inspector has carried out an inspection and testing thereof.

(3) A hoist permit for transporting people shall only be valid for a period of two
years.

(4) Where the use of the hoist for the transportation of people fails to meet the
stipulations of these regulations at a later date, the permit shall be deemed legally
invalid.

186
 Article 335

It is prohibited to enter any underground mine through any shaft, raise, winze and incline
that is no longer used except where such entry is possible in a safe manner.

Article 336
Shaft Sinking

(1) Protection from falling objects shall be provided above any person working in a
shaft.

(2) The hoist bucket shall be stopped 5 meters above the shaft bottom to wait for a
signal from the workers at the bottom, before the hoist bucket is lowered further.

(3) A refuge hole shall be provided at the bottom of the shaft for workers during work
which involves lowering or lifting of the hoist bucket.

Article 337
Safety in Shaft Sinking

(1) Supervision shall be carried out to ensure that the sinking of shafts is in
accordance with previous requirements, plans and designs.

(2) The shaft sinking supervisor shall ensure that work is carried out safely.

(3) Every shaft or winze shall be equipped with wall supports made of wood or
cement or by other safe means while shaft sinking is being carried out, and
installation of wall supports of the shaft shall be carried out at all times at a
distance of no more than 1 ½ meters from the bottom of the shaft.

Article 338
Shaft Inspection Record Book

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide an inspection book for every shaft,
raise, winze and incline which shall be used for the recording of inspection notes
and which shall be signed by the person carrying out the inspection.

(2) At least once a week the findings of the inspections of every shaft shall be made
known and signed by the supervisor in charge of carrying out maintenance of the
shaft.

(3) The findings of inspections of dangerous conditions and those already overcome
shall be recorded and signed by the supervisor in charge of carrying out
maintenance of the shaft.

187
(4) The inspection book for all shafts, raises, winzes and inclines, shall always be
available when requested by the Mine Inspector and the name of the employee
carrying out the inspection shall be registered in the Mine Book.

Article 339
General Inspections, Tests
and Shaft Maintenance

(1) Inspection, testing and shaft maintenance procedures including hoisting

equipment shall be developed and revised as necessary.

(2) When any part is found or believed to be defective through the inspections
required in paragraph (1), the hoisting machine shall not be used before repair
work is carried out.

(3) After repairs required in paragraph (2), the employee carrying out the inspections,
testing and maintenance of the hoist shall :

a. include a signature that indicates that the said work was completed and carried
out properly;

b. record and provide the data of parts not functioning properly;

c. store the certificates and records for a period of one year.

(4) Spare parts used for the repair of the hoisting machine shall meet the quality and
standards of the original parts.

(5) At the start of every work shift, the hoist operator shall inspect the hoist machine
including testing of the over travel, the dead man pedal, position indicators and
the conditions of the brakes.

(6) At the completion of all repair work on the hoist machine, and after the
completion of blasting in the vicinity of any shaft, or when the hoist is not
operated for one or more work shifts, the hoist machine shall be tested by means
of one entire trip empty of a load before being used to transport people. The said
tests shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(7) The connection between the hoist cable and the hoist operating drum, and the
anchorage with the conveyance used for the transportation of people shall be
inspected by a competent employee at least once every 24 hours.

(8) Sheaves used at the shaft, raise and or winze shall be inspected every week and be
lubricated.

188
(9) The findings of inspections as required in paragraph (8), shall be registered in the
shaft inspection book.

(10) The name of any employee who carries out an inspection as intended in this
Article shall be registered in the Mine Book.

Part Four
Emergency Situations

Article 340
Mine Surface

(1) When any employee who works on the surface of an underground mine sees
anything dangerous, the said employee shall :

a. immediately order all other people working in that section to leave the said
place;

b. inform his/her direct superiors of the danger and the evacuation of the mine
workers and

c. after ensuring that no one enters the danger zone, an appointed employee shall
inspect the condition of the said area and carry out safety measures.

(2) It is prohibited to enter danger zones before the said area has been declared safe
by an employee in charge therefor, except the person carrying out the inspections
and safety measures.

(3) Mine workers not assigned to carry out inspections or safety measures in the
danger zone shall :

a. leave the danger zone;

b. order people to leave the said danger zone and

c. inform the employee in charge of the said danger zone.

(4) Measures taken to overcome the situation and the time taken to declare the area
safe shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(5) Any action taken as required paragraph (1) which may endanger the safety of
workers who carry out activities in underground mines shall be reported to the
Underground Mine Manager.

189
 Article 341
Evacuation Due To Risk Of
In-rush or Fire
in Underground Mines

(1) In accordance with the provisions for prevention of fire where it is suspected fire
may break out, the Technical Mine Manager or any other person at that time with
assigned duties at the mine shall ensure that workers :

a. are evacuated from the area at risk of fire breaking out and

b. in accordance with the provisions for prevention of fire or where it is

suspected fire may break out, where there are indications that a fire has
already started all workers shall be evacuated from any area which may be
affected by fire or impacted by the effects of the said fire.

(2) Except for the requirements in paragraph (5) all persons are prohibited from
entering a danger area, and all effort shall be taken to prevent all persons from
entering any area already evacuated in accordance with paragraph (1) before the
said area is declared safe by the Technical Mine Manager or the Underground
Mine Manager.

(3) The Technical Mine Manager or the Underground Mine Manager shall carry out
inspections, make reports of the incident and the findings of the inspections for
the Chief Mine Inspector, as well as make inspection reports which shall include a
map that indicates the affected area as intended in paragraph (1).

(4) The findings of inspections and the maps as required in paragraph (3) shall be
attached or displayed at a specific place in order to be known by workers.

(5) The requirements of paragraph (1) and (2) shall not apply to :

a. emergency rescue employees ;

b. fire extinguishing and control employees;

c. employees assigned to secure the said area and

d. employees carrying out inspections prior to the return of workers.

(6) The requirements of paragraph (1) letter b shall not apply to any person assigned
to prevent the spread of fire although it may not be directly dangerous.

Article 342
Evacuation Caused by

190
 Inadequate Ventilation,
Outbursts or Other Emergencies

(1) Areas affected by inadequate ventilation include:

a. any area in the mine where the ventilation is inadequate as specified in the
general requirements for ventilation and ventilation standards and the
regulation thereof;

b. any area where an outburst occurs or where there is the risk of an impending
outburst;

c. an area affected by any other hazard included in-rushes or fire as specified in

Article 341.

(2) As required in Article 341 paragraph (1), employees who are assigned with duties
in the affected areas shall :

a. order all workers to evacuate the affected area for a safe place;

b. take any necessary measures to inspect and to secure the affected area;

c. prevent or prohibit any worker from entering the affected area as required in
paragraph (1) until the said area is declared safe.

(3) The Underground Mine Manager or his representative shall ensure that all
employees in charge of the various sections of the mine are informed of
inadequate ventilation, outbursts and other hazards.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall record in the Mine Book the following :

a. the reasons for any evacuation;

b. the condition of the affected areas and
c. any precautionary measures taken.

(5) Records as required in paragraph (4) shall be displayed at specific locations in

order to be known by workers.
(6) Situations specified in paragraph (2) letter a and paragraph (3) shall not apply to
any mine worker permitted to enter any affected area as specified in paragraph (1)
where :

a. such entry is necessary in order to rescue a worker;

b. such entry is necessary to implement duties in implementation of duties being

carried out as required in paragraph (2) letter b;

191
 c. such entry is necessary in order to make the affected area safe;

d. such entry is necessary in order to determine the effectiveness of

precautionary measures taken and

e. such entry is necessary in order to determine whether or not it is safe for a

person to return.

Part Five
In-rushes, Emissions
and Outbursts

Article 343
Data and Information
on the Mine Area

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall be in possession of the most up-to-date
information on any work area and any planned work area including :

a. any abandoned work site and surrounding areas (whether the said site is an
opening to a mine or not);

b. any strata that contains or is suspected of containing water or gas and

c. any material that when wet will flow.

(2) When any work is affected by the presence of the sea, lakes, rivers and any other
surface water (accumulated naturally or not), the Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. determine the composition and thickness of the entire layer located between
the opening of the mine and the surface water and

b. ensure that the layer is protected to prevent the occurrence of gushing water
from the surface

Article 344
Prevention Efforts

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall identify any sources of potential in-rushes,
emissions, or outbursts, and shall take preventative action against such in-rushes,
emissions or outbursts into the mine :

192
(2) a. it is prohibited to carry out any work at any area that is potentially dangerous
except where the Technical Mine Manager has taken measures to secure the
area for workers;

b. apart from the requirements of letter a, the Technical Mine Manager shall
ensure that any work carried out in any area of the mine that is potentially
dangerous is carried out in accordance with plans for :

1) the prevention of in-rushes, emissions or outbursts and

2) for the preparation of any precautions to reduce the danger of in-rushes,

emissions or outbursts where the such in-rushes, emissions and outbursts
occur.

c. where the requirements of letter b are enacted, the Technical Mine Manager
shall ensure that copies of the working system and any amendments thereto
are:

1) stored at the mine office;

2) displayed at a location easily known about by workers and

3) forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector no later than 30 days prior to the
commencement of work, or less in the case of any special circumstances
as permitted by the Chief Mine Inspector;

d. the requirements of letter b shall not apply where the Technical Mine
Manager makes a report to the Chief Mine Inspector of any precautionary
measures not required and no later than 30 days prior to the commencement of
work or in the case of special circumstances as allowed by the Chief Mine
Inspector.

(3) Where conditions indicate the potential for an in-rush, emission or outburst, and
where work is being carried out or where work will be carried out, the Technical
Mine Manager shall inform the Chief Mine Inspector as soon as possible.

Article 345
Inspections by Drilling

Apart from the provisions of Article 344, it is prohibited to continue any work within a
distance of 45 meters from any area where it is suspected that there is the potential for
any in-rush hazards, except where drill holes have been made that are adequate to release
the water or gas.

Part Six

193
 Ground Control and Supports Methods

Article 346
General

The Technical Mine Manager shall undertake control of the movement of the strata in
the mine and where necessary supports shall be installed to support the ceiling and walls
of any opening at any work site.

Article 347
Safety Pillars

(1) Safety pillars shall be provided to protect the shaft and exits.

(2) Safety pillars shall be provided for safety when there are lakes, rivers and dams
above the mine.

(3) Safety pillars shall be provided where there are public facilities above the said
mine.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall forward mine planning maps, geological maps
to the Chief Mine Inspector where there are any conditions as specified in
paragraph (1), paragraph (2) and paragraph (3).

(5) The Chief Mine Inspector may amend the size of safety pillars as required in
paragraph (1), paragraph (2) and paragraph (3) including any other requirements.

(6) It is prohibited to add to and reduce the size of safety pillars except where
approval has been obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector.
Article 348
Mine Boundaries

(1) A safety pillar of mineral layer shall be left along the intersection of a mineral
layer and bedrock, unless such bedrock is adequately solid and strong.

(2) A layer of minerals for use as pillar support shall be provided between one level
and another and between one mining block and another including crown pillars.

Article 349
Working face

(1) It is prohibited to undertake mining by means of under cutting where

minerals/rocks may suddenly cave in.

194
(2) The distance between the working face and the filled space shall be as close as
possible, but must still enable workers to carry out work.

Article 350
Mine Worker’s Duties

(1) Underground mine workers shall be given training on the recognition of

impending ground collapse.

(2) Where an impending cave in is suspected, warning signals shall be sounded and
all workers shall leave the said area.

(3) Mine workers shall inspect the condition of any work site at the commencement
of work.

(4) Loose rock shall be cleared away or supported prior to work in the said area is
carried out.

(5) The operational supervisor shall oversee the implementation of work guidelines
and inspect the conditions at work sites. Conditions of haulage roads at the mine
including travel-ways shall be tested periodically.

Article 351
Supports

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall create guidelines for supports for every type
of opening.

(2) Any opening that requires supporting shall be made in accordance with the type
of rock and mining methods.

(3) It is prohibited to remove or modify any support already installed, except where
so ordered and such action shall be supervised.

(4) It is prohibited to remove or modify any flooring, roofing, matting, logging or

timbering and the like thereof where such action would cause the opening to be
dangerous except under strict supervision.

(5) Materials used for supports shall be adequately strong and be supplied in
sufficient amounts and be ready for immediate use.

(6) When materials used for supports are not supplied and conditions at the work site
are dangerous, all activities at the work site must be stopped.

Article 352

195
 Timbering

(1) Wood to be used as supports at any active work site shall be installed correctly.
When necessary wedges shall be installed for added strength to ensure that the
maximum function of the supports is achieved.

(2) Every prop set for any ceiling or wall of any working face or mine shaft shall be
installed on a sturdy base.

(3) Any damaged, loose or loosened wood support which may be unsafe shall be
immediately repaired or replaced.

(4) Any mine worker who works at any stope where square sets are used shall be
careful that the floor is in line with the cap especially after blasting and where it is
considered necessary such wooden square sets may be nailed.

(5) Square sets installed at stopes shall be fitted with blocks and wedges installed in
the wall and roof and at the uppermost section of the square set top lagging shall
be installed, while the open space between the top lagging and the rock roof shall
be supported using pigsties or blocks installed above the upright supports of the
square sets.

Article 353
Rock Bolting

(1) Where rock bolts are used as supports, the rock bolting shall be carried out as
quickly as possible after any opening is formed.

(2) Anchorage testing procedures shall be created in order to know the anchorage
capabilities and the results of such testing shall be put down in writing and stored
at the mining office.

(3) Where torqued rock bolts are used, the torque strength thereof shall not exceed
the manufacturer’s specified torque rating.

(4) It is prohibited to allow a degree torquing greater than that of the strength of
anchorage.

Article 354
Loose Rock and Rock
Prone to Cave Ins

196
(1) Mining through loose ground shall be strictly supervised and shall follow the
spiling system in accordance with the use of boards or any other material to
prevent loose rock from falling and the cave in of roof material.

(2) The spiling system shall first be installed on rock or soil prone to caving in before
mining is advanced.

(3) Lagging with a thickness of no less than 5 centimetres shall be installed at any
roof that is cracked and broken.

(4) The rear and sides of any stope shall be inspected as often as possible and any
cracked rock or soil shall be cleared away or blasted or properly supported as
quickly as possible prior to the commencement of work.

Article 355
Overcoming Dangerous
Conditions

(1) Rock prone to caving in shall first be cleared away or supported prior to the
commencement of the next working operation.

(2) Before work required in paragraph (1) is completed, signs shall be installed at the
affected area prohibiting entry and where no person is waiting obstacles shall be
installed.

197
 Article 356
Barring Down

(1) Barring down shall be carried out from a safe place.

(2) When barring down is done manually a scaling bar in the appropriate shape shall
be provided for the said work.

(3) Where barring down is done mechanically adequate protection shall be provided.

(4) Where barring down is done with mechanical equipment which is fitted with a
bucket and platform, and which is capable of being raised and lowered, the
movement of the bucket or platform shall be controlled only by the person at the
controls.

Article 357
Drilling Safety

(1) Prior to starting drilling work at the working face or roof, a detailed inspection
shall be carried out for any loose rock and then be barred down or supported as
necessary.

(2) In carrying out his/her work, the drill operator shall be protected from falling
rock.

(3) Any person assisting with collaring work shall be at a safe place.

(4) Drilling work may only be carried out where supports have been installed at the
work site, and where temporary supports need to be installed, such temporary
supports shall be installed continuously from the area already supported.

(5) Any re-locatable drill rig shall be fitted with protecting apparatus for the operator
and any other employee.

(6) Where the drill machine used is fitted with a bucket or platform which is capable
of being lowered or raised it shall meet the provisions of Article 356 paragraph
(4).

198
 Article 358
Safety Measures
Against Rock Bursts

(1) After an outburst has occurred, the Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. inform the Chief Mine Inspector within 24 hours where the said rock causes :

1) the evacuation of workers;

2) the disruption of ventilation;

3) disruption to any of the mine shafts and

4) disrupts any activity in the mine for more than one hour.

b. make and implement rock burst control plans within 90 days of the said rock
burst.

(2) Rock burst control plans as required in paragraph (1) letter b shall include :

a. the mining method and working procedures planned to reduce the occurrence
of rock bursts;

b. monitoring procedures and

c. other measures carried out to reduce any dangers that may befall workers in
rock burst prone areas.

(3) Rock burst control plans as specified in paragraph (2) shall be updated in
accordance with conditional developments and the Chief Mine Inspector may
amend the said plans and implementation procedures.

Article 359
Examinations of the
Condition of Rock

The name of the operational supervisor appointed by the Technical Mine Manager to
inspect and test loose rock shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

199
 Article 360
Warning of Unsafe
Conditions

(1) When work shifts are not continuous, written warning of the any unsafe
conditions shall be made for the next shift and which must be signed.

(2) Warnings required in paragraph (1) shall be read and then signed by the employee
in charge of the next work shift prior to the commencement of work.

Article 361
Company Regulations
for Supports

(1) At any mine that requires the installation of supports, the Technical Mine
Manager shall develop company regulations for supports in the form of front
view, side views, aerial view diagrams or diagrams of the support system
including the installation and removal procedures which shall be easily
understood by any mine worker carrying out such work.

(2) Copies of the company regulations as required in paragraph (1) shall be posted at
the access shaft to any work section where supports are used.

Part Seven
Protection at the Work Site

Article 362
Overhead Protection at the Work Site

(1) It is prohibited to work at any place in a mine where any mine worker is working
in the upper section thereof, except where safety precautions have been carried
out.

(2) It is prohibited to send a mine worker to work at any place where the condition of
the roof, side and wall rock is such that due to the height, an inspection is not
possible.

(3) No loading machine or LHD shall be permitted to enter any place if the position
of the driver is not protected from rock falling from the roof, walls or ore stacks,
which cannot be inspected. If remote control facilities are provided so that the
driver may operate from the outside the machine, the driver must be able to
remain where he can see the machine clearly.

200
 Article 363

The size of the ore chute or the like thereof shall be adequate to prevent blocking and the
chute must be fitted with safety devices to prevent people from falling in.

Article 364
Guarding at
Shafts and Openings

The upper section of the shaft shall be guarded or fitted with safety devices with a guard
rail and any opening that is dangerous due to its depth shall be fenced off or safety
devices installed.

Article 365
Shaft Entrances

Openings at every level connected to the shaft or winze shall be provided with a guard
gate as required in Article 310 paragraph (6) and a safety fence.

Article 366
Enclosures and Warning Signs

Apart from the provisions of Article 308, warning signs shall be conspicuous and shall
indicate the nature of the danger as well as necessary safety measures.

Article 367

At the manway of any shaft that is being repaired or which suffers dangerous conditions
“No Passing this Point” signs shall be installed.

Article 368
Closing the Mine

(1) All openings or shafts to be abandoned shall be closed by means of filling or

capping.

(2) Any part of any abandoned mine area which may be dangerous shall be fenced off
to a height of no less than 80 centimetres.

(3) Closing of underground mines shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Part Eight

201
 Ventilation

Article 369
General Provisions

(1) At any underground mine :

a. the Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that an adequate supply of fresh air
is available at every work site with the requirement that the oxygen content in
air shall be no less than 19.5 percent and the carbon dioxide content shall be
no more than 0.5 percent;

b. it is prohibited to send any employee to work at any work site that contains
dust, smoke or vapours in concentrations that may be disruptive to health and

c. airflow shall be sufficiently adequate to reduce or remove concentrations of

smoke from blasting as soon as possible.

(2) When the presence of combustible and explosive gases is detected in any mine
ventilation system, the Technical Mine Manager shall take appropriate corrective
measures.

(3) The volume of fresh air passing through the ventilation system shall :

a. be calculated based on the maximum total number of workers at the work

location with the requirement that no person shall receive less than 2 cubic
meters per minute for the duration of work and

b. an additional 3 cubic meters per minute for every degree of horse power
where a diesel machine is being operated.

(4) The Mine Inspector may order the Technical Mine Manager to increase the
quality and volume of fresh air flow at any section of the mine.

(5) It is prohibited to re-circulate air in any ventilation system.

202
 Article 370
Ventilation Standards

(1) The air temperature in any underground mine shall be maintained at between 18
degrees Celsius and 24 degrees Celsius with maximum relative humidity at 85
percent.

(2) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) letter a the ventilation conditions at
the work site shall :

a. for an average of 8 hours :

1) have a carbon monoxide (CO) volume of no more than 0.005 percent;

2) have a methane (CH4) volume of no more than 0.25 percent;

3) have a hydrogen sulphide (H2S) volume of no more than 0.001 percent

and

4) have a nitrous oxide (NO) volume of no more than 0.0003 percent.

b. over any 15 minute period :

1) CO must not exceed 0.04 percent and

2) NO2 must not exceed 0.0005 percent.

(3) Flame safety lamps or any other suitable device shall be used to test for any lack
of oxygen.

(4) Any location that does not require ventilation shall be sealed and signs
prohibiting entry thereto shall be installed.

(5) In every sealed area, stoppings shall be provided with a pipe and a valve to permit
sampling of the atmosphere and measurement of the pressure behind such seal.

(6) The ventilation velocity shall be no less than 7 meters per minute and shall be
increased in accordance with work requirements and after blasting.

(7) All airways shall be of adequate dimensions for the quantity of air they are
designed to pass.

(8) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint an employee who shall be in charge of
supervising ventilation of the mine and the name of the said employee shall be
recorded in the Mine Book.

203
(9) The quantity and quality of air being distributed to every work area shall be
determined at intervals of at least once per month

(10) The locations at which measurements are taken shall include:

a. every main intake airway, as near as practicable to the entrance of the shaft or
outlet;

b. at every split where air leaves the main airflow, as near as possible to the
junction;

c. where the split serves a working district : 50 meters from the first working
place at which the air enters, and 50 meters from last working place at which
the air leaves the district;

d. in the district return airway, as near as practicable to the junction with the
main return airway.

e. any other place stipulated by the Mine Inspector.

(11) Sampling to determine the oxygen content (O2), carbon dioxide content (CO2),
carbon monoxide content (CO) and nitrous oxide content (NO2) of the air taken
under normal working conditions shall be implemented at intervals of at least
once per month at the following places :

a. 30 meters from the working face of development headings;

b. 15 meters from the winzes and shafts and

c. at the base of the up-cast shaft and at any stope with only one access way.

(12) Sampling for the purpose of determining the carbon monoxide content (CO) and
nitrous oxide (NO2) content at any location or at the end of any shaft where a
diesel machine is being operated shall be carried out at intervals of at least every
seven days.

(13) Results of findings of the requirements of paragraph (11) and paragraph (12) shall
include the time and location of where the samples were taken as well as the time
of the most recent blasting.

(14) Temperature shall be measured regularly at locations as required in paragraph

(10) letter c and d, and where the temperature exceeds 24 degrees Celsius, the
said place shall be inspected every week.

204
(15) Measuring for dust concentrations at lower than 10 microns shall be carried out as
often as practicable but no less than once every three months except where
otherwise stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(16) When any changes are made to the direction or distribution of airflow which
affects the amount of air entering or leaving and area, air measurements shall be
carried out as soon as possible after the said change is made.

(17) The results of air measurements as required in paragraph (16) shall be recorded in
the ventilation book.

(18) Ventilation measuring shall be carried out by a competent person.

(19) Sampling as specified in paragraph (1) and paragraph (2) shall not be required
where according to the judgement of the Chief Mine Inspector the condition of
ventilation in the mine is adequate.

Article 371
Natural Ventilation

(1) Use of natural ventilation shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) When every part of the mine continuously makes use of natural ventilation, the
requirements of Article 369 and Article 370 shall be fitted with a ventilation fan
at the surface which shall be used when required.

(3) Based on the size of the mine and the condition of the environment of work sites
at the mine the Mine Inspector may require that an auxiliary ventilation fan is
necessary with a capacity of no less than what is required to distribute an
adequate quantity of air which is required to workers when evacuation must be
carried out.

Article 372
Ventilation Fans

(1) When ever practicable, surface ventilating fans (main fans) shall be equipped with
the following :

a. an alternative power source;

b. a water gauge;

c. either an automatic fan rotation indicator or an automatic air pressure

indicator;

205
 d. an efficient air lock;

e. a fan drive and fan house both of which must be fireproof;

f. fireproof air ducts and pressure relief devices;

g. equipment that is capable of reversing the direction of the flow of air and on
which regular testing must be carried out and

h. other safety devices which shall be stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide instructions to the operator of the
ventilation fan about the rotation speed of the said fan.

(3) The operator as required in paragraph (2), shall test the ventilation fan, and
observe the water gauge and the automatic indicators at intervals of at least every
2 hours.

(4) When the measuring devices and the automatic ventilation pressure recorder are
not available, the operator of the ventilation fan shall record the rotation speed of
the wind fan and the pressure as indicated on the water gauge every two hours.

(5) As required in paragraph (2), the operator shall make a report to his/her
supervisor of the following :

a. any damage, deviations or the stopping of the ventilation fan and

b. unusual variations in pressure as indicated by the water gauge.

(6) Every ventilation fan at the surface of a mine that is not attended, shall be fitted
with permanent monitoring equipment which sends early warnings of the
presence of any defects in the operation of the ventilation fan to a location that is
always manned.

(7) The intake (suction site) of fans shall be provided with an adequate guard or
screen.

(8) Depending on the size and the environmental conditions of the mine, the Mine
Inspector may determine the need for a reserve ventilating fan available for
immediate use and capable of producing sufficient airflow.

(9) The ventilation fan housing, the air duct connections, the fan house, and other
buildings in the vicinity of the ventilation fan, shall be constructed of non
combustible materials, However, where made from combustible materials the
wind fan and surrounding buildings shall be adequately protected from fire.

206
(10) The up-cast shaft connected to a drift or air duct to the ventilation fan shall be
fitted with an airlock which prevents the occurrence of short circuits of airflow.

(11) It is prohibited to build any combustible structure within a distance of 50 meters

of the ventilation fan house.

(12) The auxiliary ventilation fan shall be installed underground while other
ventilation fans may also be installed after approval is obtained, to ensure that
disruptions to the safety and health of underground mine workers will not occur.

(13) All underground main fans shall have controls placed at a suitable protected
location remote from the fan, preferabley on the surface. An independent
alternative power supply from the surface shall be provided.

(14) It is prohibited to stop a ventilation fan except where approval has been obtained
from the ventilation supervisor.

(15) It is prohibited to install an booster fan underground except where a ventilation

survey has been conducted.

(16) All ventilating fans installed and used to ventilate active workings of the mine,
shall be operated continuously while persons are underground in the active areas
except for scheduled production-cycle shutdowns or planned fan maintenance or
adjustment. All persons underground in the affected areas shall be advised in
advance of such scheduled fan shutdowns. No blasting operations shall be
allowed during any fan stoppage.

(17) In the event of a fan failure due to malfunction, accident, power failure or any
other such unplanned or unscheduled events, all mine workers shall leave any
area ventilated by the fan, except any employee who is repairing the said
ventilation fan.

Ventilation shall be repaired and restored to normal before any mine worker
enters any area affected by the ventilation system.

(18) All ventilation fans shall be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions or the written schedule as specified by the Technical Mine Manager.

207
 Article 373
Ventilation Fan Systems

(1) Before any auxiliary fan is installed below ground, the Underground Mine
Manager must be satisfied that a sufficient quantity of air is reaching the fan to
prevent recirculation of air, and this air is not polluted by dust, smoke, or
hazardous gases.

(2) Auxiliary ventilation fans shall be equipped with grounding devices.

(3) Auxiliary ventilation fans may only be activated, operated and turned off by the
authorised employee.

(4) Auxiliary fans shall be installed at a point at least 5 metres from the nearer side of
the entrance to the place to be ventilated by it.

(5) When two or more auxiliary fans are installed in a series the requirements of
paragraph (4) shall only apply to one of the said fans.

(6) Any forcing type auxiliary ventilation fans shall be installed at the intake airway
and exhaust type auxiliary ventilation fans shall be installed at the return airway.

(7) There shall be installed and maintained with every auxiliary fan an air duct to
within a distance from the working face of 5 times the square root of the roadway
cross-section, measured in metres.

(8) When an auxiliary fan fails to function all workers shall be prohibited from
entering any place ventilated by the fan until the said place is declared safe
following an inspection by the operational supervisor.

(9) Compressed air may not be used solely for ventilation except in narrow and steep
raises.

(10) Air for ventilation in raises shall be provided such that the flow can be controlled
from a valve at the foot of the raise. Development raises shall be provided with
two air valves, one at the foot of the raise and one at the end of the steel pipe
inside.

(11) Ventilation pipes for raises must be independent of service pipes and fitted at the
outlet with a diffuser.

(12) Where compressed air is used for ventilation, the air shall be sampled at monthly
intervals to determine CO, NO2 and oil mist content. No air shall be used if the
analysis exceeds the limits specified in paragraph 2 of Article 370.

208
 Article 374
Ventilation Circuits

(1) The main intake airway and the main return airway shall be made in separate
shafts or adits.

(2) The Chief Mine Inspector may grant exemption of the requirements in paragraph
(1).

(3) Ventilation in the shaft may only be made with the following provisions :

a. vent tubing may be used at the same opening at the time of development of
the shaft or slope and

b. the intake airway and return airway at the single shafts shall be provided with
air curtains.

(4) Fresh air that enters through the downcast shaft shall be properly distributed to all
work places as required.

(5) Where any abnormality occurs to the ventilation circuit or any abnormal change
occurs in the flow of air, the underground mine workers shall inform the
operations supervisor.

(6) All airways shall be kept clear to permit free passage of air.

Article 375
Prevention of Air Leakage

(1) Any shaft or outlet to the surface that is connected via a drift to ventilation fans at
the surface and which are normally used for hoisting or transportation shall be
fitted with efficient air locks and be well maintained.

(2) Every drift which connects main intake airways to the main return airway or
which connects the intake and return airways shall be fitted with two adequate
doors and shall be well maintained to reduce leakage of air to a minimum. Where
this is not possible other means must be used.

(3) Any drift which requires prevention from short circuiting of air flow shall be
fitted with no less than two adequate doors and be well maintained. Where this is
not possible one door is allowable with one or two ventilation curtains.

209
(4) A space shall be provided between the ventilation door or ventilation curtain in
order that when one door or ventilation curtain is opened the other door or
ventilation curtain remains closed to prevent air from passing.

(5) Ventilation doors shall be capable of closing automatically and ventilation

curtains must be fireproof.

(6) It is prohibited to prop a ventilation door open except where and for so long as it
is necessary to allow a vehicle to pass through it. Any door no longer required to
be shut shall be removed and placed in a position in which it will not obstruct the
airflow.

(7) Every person shall properly close any door or ventilation curtain through which
he/she passes.

(8) Only authorised employees shall change ventilation regulators.

Article 376
Ventilation Plans

Apart from the requirements of Article 19, the ventilation plan shall include the following
information :

a. the name of the mine and

b. the most up-to-date map or series of maps with the scale no larger than 1 : 5000,
and which includes :

1) the direction and distribution of airflow;

2) the location of the main ventilation fan, the booster ventilation fan, and
auxiliary fans;

3) the location of the air regulator doors, stoppings, and ventilation doors;

4) the location of undercasts or overcasts, and other crossings;

5) the location of seals at abandoned work site areas;

6) the location of areas not ventilated;

7) the location of workshops, fuel storage areas, the hoist room, compressors,
battery charging rooms, and explosive magazines and

8) air measuring stations and the latest ventilation measurements taken.

210
c. data on the main fan, the booster fan and auxiliary fans including the name of the
manufacturer, the type, the size of the fan, the speed of the fan, the size of the
blades, pressure at several points and motor brake horsepower rating;

d. the number and type of vehicles using fuels underground including the
horsepower of the said machines and

e. any other information requested by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Part Nine
Underground Drainage

Article 377
General Precautions

(1) Any underground work place shall :

a. be free from the accumulation or flow of water which may endanger workers
in the said area and

b. have a water drainage system to dispose of excess water by means of pumps

in the mine.

(2) Any positive displacement water pump shall be fitted with a relief valve or any
other system.

(3) Precautions shall be taken to guard against the accumulation of water in rock
chutes or raises where any material in the chute or raise may cause a blockage of
the flow of water.

(4) At any stope or caved area where ore is stockpiled prior to being loaded, a water
drainage system shall be provided except where such material is capable of
effective drainage of the water.

(5) When rain water affects the rate of water flow in the mine the Technical Mine
Manager shall monitor rain fall and measures shall be taken to prevent an increase
in the rate of water flow in the mine.

(6) Transport roadways shall be provided with effective water drainage ducts to
ensure that rails and sleepers are not inundated.

Article 378
Dams and Bulkhead Doors

211
(1) When preventative measures are taken to prevent flooding or any other dangerous
situation, such precautionary measures shall be carried out by means of
construction of bulkheads or dams for water control or protection of the mine and
roadways for rescue efforts.

(2) Bulkhead means any structure built for the purpose of impounding water or
confining air under pressure in a drift, crosscut or any other mine opening and
constructed in a manner as to completely close off such areas.

(3) Dam means any structure built for the purpose of impounding water in a drift,
crosscut or any other mine opening and constructed in such a manner as to permit
an unobstructed overflow of the water.

(4) It is prohibited to construct any dam with a capacity to retain greater than 75 tons
of water in any mine, until the location and designs are approved by the Chief
Mine Inspector.

(5) When blasting is carried out at any working face in any mine in the vicinity of
any work place and which enables the accumulation of water, bulk heads or dams
as required in paragraph (1) shall be properly sealed.

Article 379
Measures to
Prevent of Noxious Gas

When the accumulation of water held in any winze is being drained, precautionary
measures shall be carried out to prevent the pollution of the air in the mine by noxious
gas which may result due to reactions with the water.

Article 380
Safety Devices at
Shaft Sumps

Barriers shall be installed at the base of any shaft to prevent any conveyance that is
lowering people into the shaft from travelling into the water in the shaft.

212
 Part Ten
Transportation

Article 381

Any cable transport system used in any ascending roadway or descending roadway at an
incline of more than 3 degrees with a engine located at the surface shall be enacted as a
shaft hoist system as required in Articles 310 to 339.

Article 382
Transportation Regulations

(1) Apart from the requirements of Chapter IV part four, the Technical Mine
Manager shall develop company regulations for underground regulations capable
of guaranteeing :

a. safe operation of every transportation system and

b. prevention of injuries caused by the transportation system employed.

(2) The Mine Inspector may amend the company regulations for underground
transportation where it is considered necessary in the interest of the safety of
workers to the extent that any such amendment does not conflict with this
Ministerial Decree.

(3) Regulations as required in paragraph (1) shall be displayed at the mining office
and copies thereof must be given to all transportation employees. Translations
shall be made by the Technical Mine Manager where language represents a
difficulty.

Article 383
Transportation Shafts

(1) Any roadway within a mine that is used for a system of transportation shall be
planned, constructed and maintained in order that :

a. no sudden changes in the height, direction, width or elevation occur that may
be dangerous and

b. the dimensions of the roadway are wide and high enough so that clearance
between the side and walls and roof and any part of a locomotive, vehicle or
load in the said roadway is capable of preventing danger in accordance with
minimum sizes as provided for in this decree.

213
(2) It is prohibited to walk along any roadway in a mine that is used as a system of
transportation except where along the said roadway there is adequate clearance
enabling safe passage.

(3) Any locomotive or vehicle that is driver operated shall be prohibited from passing
any walking person except where the said person is in a safe place.

(4) Clearance as required in paragraph (1) letter b must be :

a. 300 millimetres vertically from the roof of the locomotive or vehicle or goods
being transported. and for 2.1 metres vertically calculated from the floor of a
locomotive without a cabin.

b. 600 millimetres across from the walls of the roadway to the walls of the
locomotive or walls of the vehicle or goods being transported. Where the
clearance is less than 600 millimetres for any roadway that comes to a dead
end, the length shall not be less than 30 meters and at the end of the said
roadway warning signs shall be installed.

c. for operational systems that make use of duel carriageways the distance
between the flatcar or the material being transported shall not be less than 600
millimetres and at the loading site or coupling site the said distance shall not
be less than 900 millimetres.

d. for approved transportation systems transporting people in open vehicles the

vertical clearance shall be no less than 2.1 metres calculated from the floor of
the said vehicle.

e. for transportation systems using locomotives or vehicles suspended on rails

the vertical clearance between the base of the roadway and the base of the
vehicle shall be no less than 300 millimetres and

f. for the width of any roadway used for free steered vehicles, the minimum
clearance within said roadway shall be no less than the maximum width of the
said vehicle plus 1200 millimetres.

(5) Transport lanes used for free steered vehicles shall be free from obstacles and the
surface must be constructed as best as possible to reduce the risk of sliding and
any cross gradients of the road must be limited and the degree of the turning angle
must be adequate to ensure clearance and that the vehicles remain stable at all
times.

(6) Where ever two or more roads meet, a berm shall be installed to prevent vehicles
from colliding with supports.

214
(7) Up to a distance of 250 metres from any working face the requirements on
clearance on any transport lane as intended in this article shall not apply.

Article 384
Railroad Construction

(1) All rails must be installed for strength and sturdiness in the mine.

(2) The weight of rails shall be no less than 17 kilograms per meter, where the weight
of every axle of the locomotive or loaded vehicle exceeds 5 tons or the speed
exceeds 20 kilometres per hour, the weight of the rails shall be no less than 25
kilograms per meter.

(3) Rails shall be properly connected and supported on sleepers at intervals of no

more than every 800 millimetres. The sleepers shall be positioned on a flat and
dry surface.

Article 385
Inclined Roadways

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that a transport system in a mine does
not operate on a gradient which :

a. will render its operation unsafe or

b. exceed any gradient stipulated by the supplier of that system or vehicle as

being the maximum gradient on which it is safe to use that system or vehicle.

(2) Apart from the requirements of in paragraph (1) no iron wheeled locomotive
transportation system shall be permitted to be used in any roadway with grades in
excess of 1 : 20.

(3) The maximum load that may be hauled by a system or vehicle on any gradient
shall not exceed that, which can be safely retarded, stopped and held when
travelling down the gradient.

(4) Any vehicle run on rails at a grade of more than 1 : 4 shall be fitted with a rail
braking system.

(5) Free steered vehicles should not operate on gradients steeper than 1 : 5. The
ability of the brakes to operate on this gradient should be tested at intervals not
exceeding three months and should include any trailers where applicable.

Article 386

215
 Refuge Holes

(1) When considered necessary at a specific distances along any roadway through
which passes any system of transportation, easily reached refuge holes shall be
installed.

(2) The distance between the refuge hole as required in paragraph (1) :

a. any rail system controlled by an operator located at the front most part of the
chain of vehicles shall :

1) not exceed 90 meters for vehicles with a speed of no more than 25

kilometres per hour and be fitted with spot lights and

2) not exceed 40 meters where the speed is greater than 25 metres per hour
the grade of the roadway is greater than 1 : 30 and where the operators
view is limited.

b. not exceed 20 meters for any other transportation system which utilises rails
and

c. driver operated transportation systems :

1) must not exceed 90 meters where the speed does not exceed 20 kilometres
per hour and

2) must not exceed 40 metres where the grade of the roadway is greater than
1 : 15 or the drivers view is limited due to bends.

3) refuge holes shall be no less than 1.8 meters in height or the same height
as the roadway, the width shall be no less than 1.2 metres and the depth
shall be no less than 1.5 meters.

4) refuge holes shall always be safe and free from obstructions and on the
exterior thereof a sign shall be installed which must be visible from a
distance of no less than 50 metres using workers’ lamps.

5) Refuge holes shall be as close as possible to the rail vehicle coupling area,
ventilation doors and to any location at the end of a bend in the roadway
where the view is limited.

6) Any intersection used for entering any space or any other place with
adequate area along the roadway may be considered a refuge hole.

216
 Article 387
Transportation System
Equipment

(1) No locomotive, free steered vehicle or stationary haulage engine shall be used
underground except where in accordance with the design and construction
guidelines as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Prior to any transportation system being operated the following shall be made
certain :

a. the transportation system is in accordance with the intended purpose and use ;

b. the transportation system shall be equipped with equipment capable of

stopping and supporting every part of the said system and

c. all equipment used as part of the transportation system shall be properly

designed, constructed and installed.

Article 388
Internal combustion engines

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. ensure that no internal combustion engine is used as the power source of any
transportation system except diesel engines;

b. develop procedures to ensure that exhaust gas emissions from any diesel
engine are monitored at intervals of no more than seven days and

c. ensure that exhaust gas from any diesel engine is not dangerous.

(2) Monitoring requirements as required in paragraph (1) letter b shall apply to

exhaust gas samples not yet mixed with the air in the mine with the conditions
that :

a. low idle without load and

b. high idle without load;

(3) The findings of sampling as required in paragraph (2) shall be recorded in a

special book.

217
(4) It is prohibited to operate any diesel engine where the exhaust gases as intended
in paragraph (2) letter b contain more than 0.2 percent of carbon monoxide or
more than 0.1 percent of nitrous oxide or exceed the concentrations determined by
the manufacturer.

(5) Exhaust gases in the air in the mine from diesel engines shall after being cooled
and thinned contain no more than 0.01 percent of carbon dioxide and 0.0005
percent of nitrous oxide.

(6) It is prohibited to operate any internal combustion engine at any place or roadway
which creates carbon dioxide in excess of 0.005 percent, or nitrous oxide in
excess of 0.0003 percent.

Article 389
Refuelling, Recharging
and Storage of Vehicles

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that all vehicles in the mine with an
engine is maintained at a specific place and stored at a safe place when not in use.

(2) The vehicle storage facility, the battery charging room and the refuelling area
shall be used in accordance with the intended purpose and aim and shall be
separate from each other.

(3) Every vehicle storage facility or refuelling station shall as much as possible be
built from fire resistant materials and have :

a. no less than two separate exits;

b. ventilation adequate enough to reduce concentrations of exhaust gases

produced by the machines or any gas produced by batteries;

c. adequate lighting;

d. even concrete flooring;

e. facilities to inspect the underside of locomotives or other vehicles;

f. clean water supplies;

g. waste disposal facilities;

h. smoke, heat or detectors of any other hazards capable of emitting a signal

where a fire occurs;

218
 i. an adequate numbers fire extinguishers, suitable for any type of fire shall be
visibly located close to the entrance, be easily reached and ready for
immediate use and

j. a fuel overflow berm at the refuelling station.

(4) Refuelling of diesel engine vehicles or locomotives shall be carried out at the
designated refuelling station and :

a. the vehicle tank refuelling equipment shall be capable of preventing spillage;

b. it is prohibited to start the engine of any vehicle when refuelling with fuel or
lubricants.

(5) Battery charging for locomotives shall be carried out at the battery charging
station and the said station shall meet the requirements of paragraph (3) except
letter e and the battery charging equipment shall :

a. be positioned at the entrance side of the battery rack;

b. detection devices shall be provided to detect leakage of the current between

batteries and the battery charging equipment and the box thereof and

c. battery maintenance equipment shall be provided which is capable of reducing

electrolyte liquid spillage.

(6) The requirements of this Article shall not apply to traction locomotive batteries
which are charged using electricity from overhead conductors with the stipulation
that for the duration of charging no electrical danger or combustible gas is caused.

Article 390
Fuel and Lubricant
Supplies and Storage

(1) Fuel may only be stored at underground refuelling stations in quantities that will
be used in at least 48 hours.

(2) The type of fuels used underground shall be reported to the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Transportation of fuels and lubricants underground shall be carried out using
metal drums sealed tight or clearly marked tanks.

(4) Used fuel and lubricant drums shall be immediately removed from the mine.

219
(5) Lubricants used underground may only be stored in a vehicle storage facility or
refuelling station and the total amount of each type of lubricant stored may only
be for one weeks requirements.

Article 391
Transportation of People

(1) Any vehicle for the transportation of people shall be designed, installed,
maintained and used in accordance with the guidelines for the transportation of
people as required by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) After a period of two years after this regulation is enacted, any existing human
transportation system shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1).

(3) Mine workers who ride on any vehicle used to transport people shall be
prohibited from carrying any work equipment except hand tools

Article 392
Preventing Runaway
Vehicles

(1) To prevent accidents which may be caused by any transportation system sliding
uncontrollably, becoming a runaway, the Technical Mine Manager shall carry out
the following :

a. must install an adequate number of automatic devices in every transportation

system to stop any vehicle when running uncontrollably;

b. where men are working on a road where there may be danger from runaway
vehicles, adequate arrrangements shall be made for their protection;

c. must provide equipment to prevent any vehicle in a transportation system

from colliding with another at any intersection of roads;

d. any energy absorbing runaway devices installed shall be independent of any

roadway support;

e. at assembly or coupling points there shall be an adequate supply of devices to

prevent vehicles moving inadvertently when not connected to a transport
system.

(2) Every transportation system shall be equipped with devices of a type that are
capable of absorbing any dangerous shocks when the vehicle slides out of control.

220
 Article 393
Communication

(1) Any road which makes use of a wire rope transportation system shall be fitted
with:

a. equipment that can stop the system safely ;

b. equipment that is capable of preventing any transport vehicle from moving by

itself installed at intervals of no more than 50 meters and

c. equipment which is capable of transmitting signals and which is connected to

the control room and which is installed at intervals of a specific distance.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall guarantee that :

a. every transportation roadway is equipped with a communications system

between the stops, coupling stations, control stations and at every boarding
and alighting point and

b. suitable and effective means of visual signalling equipment or radio control

for driver operated vehicles shall be provided.

(3) Vehicles may only be operated after the operator receives the signal with the
following requirements :

a. the Technical Mine Manager shall require uniform signals to be used at the
mine ;

b. the signal for “stop” shall be consistent;

c. for all transportation systems transporting people, a special signal shall be

used to mean begin moving;

d. all signals shall be capable of being seen and heard by the operator and

e. when the vehicle comes to a stop, the operator shall ignore any unclear signal
and the said vehicle shall not move on until a clear signal is received.

(4) For wire rope transportation systems, both endless rope systems and main and tail
rope haulage systems shall be fitted with an audible warning signal prior to
operation which shall be installed on the return drum and any other place along
the said system as well as on any machine using a remote control system.

Article 394

221
 Inspections and Testing
of Transportation Systems
Prior to Operation

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall be assisted by competent employees in

adequate numbers in carrying out inspections and testing of the installation and
operation of any transportation system used in the mine.

(2) Employees as required in paragraph (1) shall :

a. inspect, carry out testing and ensure that the transportation is safe for
operation and

b. make reports of the findings of inspections and testing and forward such
reports to the Technical Mine Manager.

(3) Apart from the requirements in paragraph (1), the Technical Mine Manager shall
prohibit any transportation system from being used for the first time until the
Technical Mine Manager is certain that the said system is safe for use.

Article 395
Operation of the
Transportation System

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that any transportation system used at
the mine is adequately safe.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall be assisted by competent employees to

supervise the operation of the transportation system.

(3) Transportation systems shall be operated by or under the supervision of a capable

person as required in paragraph (2).

(4) The haulage engine operator :

a. is prohibited from leaving the cabin of the vehicle where the vehicle is still
moving and

b. must ensure cleanliness and lubricate any haulage vehicle being operated.

(5) Where the operator becomes aware of any defects of the equipment it shall be
stopped and prohibited from being operated.

(6) Locomotive operators :

222
 a. are prohibited from starting any locomotive until the operator is in position;

b. are prohibited from leaving the cabin except when stopped and the ignition
key is disengaged;

c. must sound warning signals prior to the locomotive being started and

d. must reduce speed where ;

1) any person is in the way;

2) passing a bend, at unloading or loading at stations or shafts;

3) passing any work site, or landing station,

4) passing any ventilation doors.

(7) Locomotives are prohibited from passing any landing station in a shaft where
mine workers are entering or leaving the conveyance or skip.

(8) It is prohibited for any free steered vehicle to be used to move any vehicle that
travels on rails.

Article 396
Testing, Inspections and
Maintenance

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint in writing a number of competent
people to make regular inspections and develop procedures to guarantee that
testing and inspections and maintenance work is carried adequately on :

a. transportation roadways and railways in the mine and

b. any equipment that is part of a transportation system.

(2) Testing results as required in paragraph (1) shall be properly recorded and stored.

(3) The Mine Inspector may make changes to the company regulations as required in
paragraph (1).

(4) The frequency of inspections and testing shall meet the following requirements :

a. transportation roadways, rail tracks and clearances shall be inspected no less

than seven days and every work day when transporting people;

223
b. the exterior of every locomotive, hoisting machine permanently positioned at
any location, or free steered vehicle shall be inspected every work shift prior
to the commencement of work;

c. the machine and electrical parts of locomotives, hoisting machines

permanently positioned and free steered vehicles shall be inspected no less
than once every seven days;

d. every fire preventative device on any diesel engine shall be properly inspected
and cleaned, and where the said equipment is defective, replacement shall be
made within 24 hours;

e. testing of the parking brakes, emergency brakes and the locomotive brakes
and free steered vehicles shall be inspected in order to ensure efficient brake
maintenance every seven days and

f. when any transportation system hauled by wire rope is used to transport

people :

1) the over travel indicator shall be inspected every seven days ;

2) inspect and adjust the train and speeding indicator every seven days;

3) test the over-travel controls every seven months;

4) test the engine and braking of the train every seven days and

5) dynamic testing of the engine and braking of the train every six months.

224
 Article 397
Cables and Pulleys

(1) New haulage cables for any transportation system which is operated entirely
underground shall meet the requirements in the work guidelines as taken from the
design and construction standards for underground transportation systems.

(2) All cables shall be inspected and lubricated at intervals designated by the
maintenance schedule and the findings of the said inspections shall be recorded in
the rope book by an employee whose name is recorded in the Mine Book.

(3) Transportation haulage cables along the transportation system shall be properly
supported using idler pulleys. The said idler pulleys shall be maintained to ensure
free rotation and where necessary a guide to the pulley shall be installed on the
haulage cables.

(4) At any curves, bends or undulations, support pulleys shall be positioned to

prevent the rope swinging dangerously or rubbing any support facilities or other
roadway fittings.

(5) All capped haulage cables used in the mine shall be recapped at intervals not
exceeding six months under the supervision of an appointed competent person.

(6) On transportation systems using endless cables or for vehicles coupled with
cables using clips, chains or any other apparatus, the said connections shall be
inspected regularly in accordance with the maintenance guidelines as required by
the Technical Mine Manager.

(7) On any endless-rope systems , where a man-riding train is permanently attached

to the rope, the train shall be moved on the rope with a distance of at least the
length of the train and inspected every three months.

Article 398
Continuity of Electricity

(1) All rails shall conduct electricity continuously and :

a. at every rail joint electrically conductive copper joints;

b. the electrical resistance of any rail connection shall not exceed the electrical
resistance of 10 metres of rail.

c. at intervals of every 100 metres, two rails that form one line shall be joined by
a copper conductor the diameter of which shall be the same as for overhead
power lines;

225
 d. two separate rail lines shall be connected electrically at every 200 metres and

e. every rail in a line shall be grounded to the surface of the mine.

(2) Only the negative poles of any DC supply shall be connected to the rail track and
there shall be no switches or electrical fuses installed in the said connection.

(3) Where two or more overhead power lines are installed parallel from the same
pole, the said power lines shall be connected electrically at intervals of every 30
metres.

Article 399
Clearance to
Overhead Power Lines

(1) The vertical clearance between the upper part of the any rail and overhead power
lines shall not be less than 2.2 metres.

(2) Uninsulated joints and current collectors on overhead power lines shall always
have a free distance of no less than 110 millimetres from the roof or the side of
the roadway and from any other equipment installed in the said roadway.

(3) The free distance between overhead power lines conducting electricity, to the top
of the any locomotive, vehicle or load shall be no less than 300 millimetres except
for current collector systems on trolleys.

Article 400
Safety Measures

(1) It is prohibited for the operator to leave the cabin of any trolley locomotive except
where the ignition key has been disengaged the control lever released, and where
the current collector from the overhead power lines has been detached and
secured.

(2) The automatic circuit breaker of any locomotive shall not exceed the operating
current as determined by the manufacturer.

(3) Overhead power lines shall be installed in such a way so that rock movement that
occurs, narrowing the height of the roadway by up to 10 percent, the said power
lines shall still be considered safe.

(4) No loading and unloading station, coupling area and boarding and alighting
station shall be below overhead power lines, except where the said power lines

226
 are protected by or fitted with safety devices and have an adequate clearance to
prevent the danger of unintended contact.

Part Eleven
Transportation by Conveyor

Article 401
General

(1) The requirements of Articles 382 up to 397 shall also apply to transportation by
means of conveyors underground.

(2) It is prohibited to travel on any chain conveyor, belt or bucket except where the
said apparatus is designed for the transportation of people and is in accordance
with regulations as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Where conveyorways are used as regular travelways, such travelways shall be
adequately illuminated and fences shall be provided to protect persons from
material that may fall from the conveyor.

Article 402
Conveyor Transportation
Shafts and Clearance

(1) Each conveyor shall have a clearance of no less than 600 millimetres on the side
used for the passage of people and 100 millimetres on the other side. At transfer
points or places where conveyor attendants work, there shall be a clearance of
900 millimetres.

(2) If a vehicle transport system operates along-side a conveyor, then the clearances
shall be those specified for that transport system and the conveyor shall be
considered as a roadway fixture.

(3) Where only a conveyor is used as a means of transportation in any road, refuge
holes shall not be required.

(4) Crossovers shall be provided where it is necessary to cross conveyors. It is

prohibited to cross over a conveyor except where such facilities are provided.

(5) At elevated conveyors frequently used as a means of access by people shall be

fitted with walkways and railings, and the floor of the said walkways shall be
made from non slip materials and the crossing point underneath the conveyor
shall be fitted with safety devices.

227
(6) Where people or vehicles pass underneath any elevated conveyors the said under
section of the conveyor shall be fitted with cleats or a safety guard.

Article 403
Inclined Conveyors

(1) Inclined conveyors shall be fitted with brakes to prevent the conveyor from
moving downwards.

(2) It is prohibited to install any conveyor at an incline which may pose the danger of
rolling material falling backwards.

Article 404
Communication and Signals

(1) Where the entire length of the conveyor is clearly visible from the switch
location, the operator shall look to ensure that all persons are in a safe place prior
to operating the conveyor.

(2) Where the entire length of the conveyor is not visible from the switches or the
conveyor can be operated automatically, audio and visual warning signals shall be
installed.

(3) The warning signals shall be activated moments before the conveyor is operated.

(4) The warning signals shall be audible or visible at both ends of the conveyor and at
every transfer, loading or crossing point.

(5) Where a conveyor is operated by remote control or automatically, the said

conveyor shall operate in order from the sender to the recipient of the system and
shall be fitted with warning signals prior to being operated.

(6) Along the full length of the conveyor, emergency stop cords shall be installed at
easily reached locations, which when activated will stop the conveyor in an
emergency situation.

(7) Emergency stop cords as required in paragraph (6) shall :

a. be easily seen and reached and

b. have a manual reset switch which shall be installed at intervals of no more

than 100 meters and capable of stopping the conveyor. and which shall signal

228
 the employee at the conveyor controls except where stipulated otherwise by
the manufacturer.

(8) At every control, sending or receiving point and at any place as intended in
paragraph (4) along a chain of conveyors verbal communication equipment shall
be provided.

(9) Prior to the conveyor being operated, warning signals shall first be given, and
interlocks shall be installed to prevent the conveyor from starting before the
warning signal is given.

(10) Communications equipment shall be properly installed to be easily seen and shall
be equipped with clear instructions for use.

(11) The requirements of this article shall not apply to any conveyor that is part of any
mobile machine.

Article 405
Safety Devices on the
Conveyor

(1) A safety guard shall be installed around the motor, and head and tail pulleys of
any conveyor.

(2) Safety guards shall be installed underneath any suspended conveyor which may
pose a danger to people in the event that a belt is severed.

(3) All conveyors in underground mines shall be fitted with :

a. excessive slipping detectors between the belt and the drive except where an
employee is supervising continuously.

b. heat and smoke detectors and automatic fire extinguishers at the drive;

c. instruments capable of detecting when the belt slips, the belt is torn and
blockages in the chute and

d. temperature monitoring equipment and brake and clutch position regulators

where possible.

(4) Equipment as required in paragraph (3) letter a, letter c and letter d shall be
capable of stopping the conveyor automatically and the detectors as required in
paragraph (3) letter b shall be capable of issuing warnings to any place
continuously manned.

229
(5) When any conveyor is stopped as the result of a safety device, the said conveyor
may only be reactivated automatically. Where the said safety devices indicate
normal conditions, not more than three attempts will be made to start said
conveyor.

Article 406
Chain Conveyors
at Coal Faces

At every chain conveyor installed at any working face or where preparation for a coal
working face is being carried out :

a. at intervals of no more than 7 meters a stop button shall be installed or the like
thereof fitted with a lock-out and from which a signal shall be capable of
being given to the operator;

b. shall be fitted with audible warning signals along the entire length of the chain
conveyor and

c. prior to the chain conveyor being operated and before material is loaded onto
the chain conveyor a warning signal shall be sounded in advance.

Article 407
Maintenance

(1) It is prohibited to carry out repair or maintenance work on any conveyor while it
is operating.

(2) Where repair work is being done, the conveyor shall be stopped and the engine
turned off and tags shall be affixed and locked, except where the said repairs
require the conveyor to be moving and safety measures are taken to prevent any
worker from being injured from any moving part :

(3) Where any conveyor is still moving :

a. it is prohibited to clean any pulley and roller manually;

b. it is prohibited to carry out belt dressing manually except where fitted with a
grease fitting or aerosol type and

c. it is prohibited to pass over or underneath the conveyor, except where fitted

with safety guards that are capable of protecting people.

230
 Article 408
Inspections and Testing

(1) At least every 24 hours inspections shall be conducted the entire length of the belt
by the operational supervisor or any capable person appointed by the Technical
Mine Manager.

(2) Inspections as required in paragraph (1) shall be primarily in order to ensure that
the conveyor is free from obstructions, free from damage and does not overheat
due to friction during operation.

(3) In any coal mine or other mine where combustible material is conveyed, the
roadway shall be examined for accumulations of dust or incipient heating.

(4) Equipment and fixtures for the prevention of fire along the length of the conveyor
shall be inspected and maintained.

The said inspections shall be conducted :

a. after any major maintenance of the conveyor system;

b. two hours after the conveyor stops;

c. prior to the commencement of any days off and

d. at intervals as determined by the Technical Mine Manager.

(5) Where any employee conducting the inspections discovers damage or heating
which may lead to a fire, the said employee shall take steps to overcome the
situation or inform the Underground Mine Manager as soon as possible.

(6) Prior to the commencement of any non working days the electrical current to the
conveyor shall be switched off and padlocked.

(7) Any person inspecting the conveyor shall :

a. be capable of using light fire extinguishers;

b. be capable of operating and stopping the conveyor and

c. know to whom reports of damage and other incidents must be made.

Part Twelve
Raise Climbers

231
 Article 409
Construction and Equipment

(1) Any raise climber powered by an engine shall have :

a. no less than two separate brakes :

1) one of which must be as close as possible to the end of the engine;

2) each brake must be capable of stopping and supporting the climber at its
maximum capacity and

3) each brake may undergo testing separately.

b. the maximum transportable load shall not exceed the requirements of the
manufacturer. The said maximum load shall be displayed on the said
apparatus or at the location of its operation.

c. all raise climbers shall be equipped with instruments that are capable of
preventing the climber from moving out of its track. Where the track is of
significant length effective communications equipment shall be installed for
communication between the operator of the climber and the employee serving
underneath.

(2) All raise climbers powered by electricity shall :

a. be fitted with a current anti-leakage system;

b. shall have a separating switch and a breaker switch close to the employee
serving underneath in order to isolate the engine and

c. shall have a control switch installed on the raise climber.

(3) Facilities shall be provided in order to board and alight from the conveyance of
the raise climber.

Article 410
Safe Working Procedures

(1) It is prohibited to work on the top deck of the raise climber except when already
at the work location.

(2) The hose roller and the controls shall be tested prior to the conveyance being
raised.

232
(3) When the climber is raised or lowered the employee shall be in the cage.

(4) It is prohibited for the raise climber to be operated in excess of the permitted
maximum work load.

(5) The voltage for the engines of raise climbers shall not exceed 750 volts.

(6) The electrical supply to a raise climber shall be disconnected while explosives
and electric caps are being loaded into position for blasting.

Article 411
Inspections and Testing

(1) The main shaft of any drive train of any raise climber engine shall be tested by a
competent person using ultrasonic methods in order to determine that the main
shaft is in good condition. Inspections shall be conducted :

a. prior to the raise climber being operated and

b. every time following major maintenance, or at least every 4000 work hours.

(2) Any equipment that may affect the safe operation of the raise climber shall be
tested by a competent person prior to the said equipment being used for the first
time and then every day after being used as well as after every overhaul.

(3) The frequency of preventive maintenance on the raise climber shall be in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions except stipulated otherwise by a
competent person, but such overhauls shall not be less than the manufacturer’s
instructions.

(4) The raise climber and the rails thereof shall be inspected and cleaned no less than
once a week.

(5) The brakes and controls of the raise climber shall be tested at the beginning of
every working shift.

(6) The raise climber record book shall be stored away and must contain :

a. the date of inspections as required in paragraph (1);

b. any findings during inspections conducted as required in letter a.;

c. notes of any repairs or changes signed by the person who conducted the said
inspection, repair work or changes and

233
 d. records as required in letter c shall be signed by the supervisor in charge.

Part Thirteen
Underground Mine
Electricity

Article 412
General Application

Apart from the requirements of Article 180 to Article 205 the requirements found
hereunder shall apply to the use of electrical currents in underground mines.

Article 413
Electrical Cables and
Permanent Power Lines

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 184, any cable used in an underground
permanent electrical installation shall be of the armoured cable type.

(2) Cables installed at any shaft, incline or roadway inclined at more than 1 : 1 shall
be supported or secured so the (said) cable is not strained by its own weight.

(3) Cables in transportation shafts shall be installed in a proper position in order to

avoid damage caused by vehicles or equipment :

(4) Electrical power lines in cables as required in paragraph (1) :

a. must be cased in insulating materials;

b. must be efficiently protected from mechanical damage and supported at

specific distances as well as

c. the metal casing of the cables must be joined electrically and where necessary
due to location must be protected from rusting.

Except where the outer grounding conductor on concentric cables and the
cable metal casing are used as an grounding conductor.

(5) Where a DC system at a voltage not exceeding 650 volts is used, there may be
separate cables each protected by metallic covering. Such coverings shall be
bonded together at points not more than 30 metres apart.

234
(6) The requirements of this Article shall not apply to overhead power lines from the
trolley cable system.

Article 414
Flexible Cables

(1) Cables used for portable electrical equipment in mines shall be flexible cables
with protective equipment using lead or another metal and shall have a steel
shield.

(2) The metal casing to protect flexible cables from damage shall not be capable of
being used as a ground conductor despite where already connected to the cable or
any other equipment, except where the said cable meets the specifications
recognised by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Flexible cables connected to electrical equipment or machines shall be properly

connected and covered and effectively grounded.

(4) Where any flexible cable is connected to any permanent cable the connection
shall an utilise appropriate isolating switch and shall be properly covered and
fitted with a switch and be effectively grounded.

(5) Any metal casing for trail cables shall :

a. be flexible and of anti rust steel or

b. be in the form of flexible conducting mesh that protects each of the core
cables and

c. be a combination of letter a and letter b.

Article 415
Isolating Switches

(1) Circuit breakers as required in Article 188 paragraph (1) letter c installed in
electrical motors underground shall be an integrated part of the motor or machine
and shall be positioned in such a way in order to be easily operated.

(2) Switches connected to any machine via a trail cable shall be designed to
automatically prevent turning back on.

Article 416
Restrictions on the
Use of High Voltages

235
It is prohibited to use electricity with a voltage in excess of 1200 volts for :

a. any portable electrical equipment or

b. electrical motors with a power less than 15 kilowatts.

Article 417
Positioning of Equipment

(1) Where considered necessary, transformers or switches in underground mines shall

be positioned in a room, compartment or box with a sturdy construction and shall
always be kept dry.

(2) It is prohibited to use combustible materials for any room as required in

paragraph (1) except where the installation of the said equipment is protected or
operated by any means that is capable of reducing the risk of fire.

(3) It is prohibited to store combustible materials or explosives in any room,

compartment or box that contains electrical equipment or underground in the area
of electrical equipment.

(4) Transformers of the type that are filled with oil that have a capacity in excess of
20 kilovolts amps and when used underground shall be positioned in a fireproof
room and equipped with a place for oil leaks.

236
(5) All parts of electrical equipment requiring caution and all levers used to operate
the electrical equipment shall be positioned with safe access and adequate
working space and all levers shall be free from obstructions and be operated
comfortably.

Article 418
Protection of Equipment

(1) Mine workers who carry out any work which may cause damage to electrical
equipment and where the said equipment may be the source of any danger,
necessary steps shall be taken to protect the said equipment from damage.

(2) Electrical equipment, apart from signalling equipment or telephone cables in

blasting areas, shall be removed during blasting. Electricity shall not be
reconnected until the said equipment has been inspected and is found to be in
good condition.

Article 419
Grounding

(1) Except where there exists any other grounding system which may be enacted, the
grounding system shall be conducted at the surface of the mine in order that stray
currents are not dangerous to :

a. any metal cable casing;

b. the outer conductor of concentric cables;

c. all parts of electrical equipment made from metal and

d. all levers used to operate electrical equipment.

(2) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1), every grounding conductor
installed shall have a total conductivity (including connections) of no less than
half of the capacity of any conductor with the largest electrical conduction
capacity installed therefore which has a diameter no less than 14 millimetres
squared. Except that any flexible cables by which electricity is supplied at a
voltage not exceeding 125 volts connected to portable apparatus, the earthing
conductor needs not have a cross-sectional area greater than 6 millimetres square
(mm2).

(3) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) and Article 414, the metal cable
casing may be used as a grounding conductor.

237
(4) It is prohibited to install switches, circuit breakers or fuses on any grounding
conductor.

(5) For underground electrical equipment that is required by these regulations to be

grounded, the neutral point, mid voltage point or pole of any electrical system
underground shall be connected at one and the same place to the earthing system
and that earthing system shall be on the surface of the mine.

(6) This Article shall not apply to :

a. any hand-held light properly protected by a fire resistant casing which is

capable of being grounded, or is made from insulating material;

b. all hand-held equipment that is double insulated;

c. all portable equipment with a voltage of no more than 50 volts DC or 30 volts

AC and

d. all equipment with a voltage less than 250 volts DC or 125 volts AC, except
portable equipment.

(7) In order to complement the requirements of paragraph (1), against the use of
“grounding free”, a special equipotential point shall be created and all conductive
parts of open equipment shall be connected to the said point by means of adequate
conductors.

Article 420
Insulation

(1) Materials used to insulate electrical power lines in mines shall have an insulation
capability and level of mechanical strength in accordance with what is required
and shall be temperature and humidity resistant as well as other things that are
capable of protecting the said insulation.

(2) Except for the outer conductors of concentric cables, every conductor that is part
of any electrical system shall always be insulated efficiently from the ground,
with the following notes :

a. for any poly phase supply system, the neutral point shall be grounded at one
location at the surface or

238
 b. any system that is supplied with electricity from a transformer, shall be fit
with equipment to ensure that electricity from the primary windings will be
cut off automatically, if damage occurs to insulation between the primary and
secondary windings, and one or more neutral points of the said system shall
be grounded to one place at the surface of the mine and

c. any mono-phase supply system supplied from the transformers secondary

winding, apart from any system where the mid voltage point is grounded,
which is used as the only source of electricity for one reason or another as
follows :

1) electrical controls (including automatic equipment, remote controls and

local controls) from switches;

2) electrical connectors of control switches and

3) indicators and other switching instruments including lights installed

therein.

(3) Every electrical system shall be equipped with instruments that are capable of
indicating insulation damage in the system.

Article 421
Electrical Connections and Joints

(1) All parts of switchgear and electrical connections shall be of sufficient

mechanical strength and current carrying capacity to prevent danger, in particular
fromg rough usage.

(2) All electrical parts such as switches and electrical connections shall be covered in
such a way or protected in order to prevent any hazard as the result of any person
touching the said equipment, or protected from dust or any other material that
accumulates, or protected from water.

(3) Wherever any switchgear or connection is at any place at which there may be risk
of igniting gas, coal dust or other combustible material, all live parts thereof shall
be so protected as to prevent external ignition thereof.

(4) Any material that insulates a conductor in cables shall be efficiently sealed tight
at a point where the said conductor is connected to other equipment where the
insulation is capable of being reduced due to humidity or vice versa.

(5) Any cable protected by a layer of metal that is connected to other equipment, the
layer of metal shall be firmly and safely attached to the other equipment to ensure
adequate mechanical strength and electrical connection.

239
(6) Cable gland connections, coupler cable connections, plugs, sockets, cable entries
for junctions, and sealing boxes shall all be constructed to prevent hazards. The
cable termination and the layers thereof shall be safe and the continuity of
electricity shall be properly maintained and where necessary covered to prevent
steam and other pollutants from getting in.

(7) Where an interlock circuit is installed via a plug and switch as an addition to
electrical conductor circuit, the plug and socket shall be constructed to guarantee
that the potential for a potential hazard from electricity not being connected at the
time of insertion or disengagement from the plug. The pin of the said interlock
circuit shall be shorter than the electrical circuit pin to ensure that the plug is
properly connected to the plug prior to the control circuit being completely
connected.

(8) In order to prevent the plug coming loose unintentionally, the socket used shall be
of a type that is restrained or bolted.

Article 422
Protection from Power Surges
and Power Leakage

(1) For underground mine equipment, protection as required in Article 187 shall
guarantee that :

a. the said protection must operate in as short a period of time as possible and
the amount of electricity shall be compatible with the needs of the equipment;

b. circuit breakers shall be capable of cutting off the system where a short circuit
takes places;

c. where possible, equipment shall have a specific short circuiting cut off level
which shall be proven by a person who is capable and authorised to handle
short circuiting testing and

d. where any part of the system is used to stop and start frequently, protective
equipment for power surges shall be provided.

(2) It is prohibited to adjust or change the operating current of safety equipment

except where carried out by the technical supervisor.

(3) For any electrical system where there is a high risk of fire, the impact or ignition
of gases or combustible materials, the limits for maximum leaks or fault current
shall be stipulated. Fault currents shall be kept to an absolute minimum to reduce
the risk of impact, damage and sparks.

240
 Article 423
Transformers and
Oil Transformers

(1) For every transformer, proper procedures shall be made to guard against any
danger occurring as the result of any connection between high voltage and low
voltage. Where a high voltage system is connected to ground or by other means,
the low voltage shall also be grounded in order that where there occurs any
abnormality between the high voltage system and the low voltage system the
electricity will be cut off automatically.

(2) It is prohibited to use any flammable oil for cooling, insulation or to absorb
sparks in the transformer or underground electrical equipment.

Article 424
Telephones and Signalling
Equipment

(1) Adequate steps shall be taken to prevent telephone cables or signalling cables
from coming into contact with other electrical cables or equipment.

(2) Voltages in circuits used to issue signals underground shall not exceed 25 volts.

(3) Every underground phone shall :

a. be placed in a watertight container;

b. be installed on an insulated support;

c. have a clearly marked sign and telephone number on the said apparatus
including information in an emergency situation;

d. be clearly marked with a sign indicating the location of the said apparatus.

(4) At every coal mine or at any other location in any mine that contains flammable
gases :

a. it is prohibited to install any telephone or signal except of a type that has been
authorised by the Chief Mine Inspector;

b. authorisation as required in letter a shall include the circuits and power source
of the said system and

c. it is prohibited to connect any telephone or signalling equipment at the surface

or any where else in the mine to any network used for specific equipment

241
 except where the above fulfils the requirements as intended in letter a or is
connected via a coupler unit that fulfills the requirements.

(5) Contact makers used in telephone or signalling constructions shall be capable of

preventing unintentional closing of the circuit.

Article 425
Electrical Welding

(1) The requirements of Article 413 paragraph (4), Article 414 paragraph (1), Article
419 paragraph (1) and paragraph (2), Article 420, Article 421 and Article 422
shall not apply to electrical welding equipment used underground.

(2) Permanent electrical welding equipment and machinery or transformers shall be

stored in a fireproof room which is well ventilated.

(3) Any machine that operates the welding generator shall always be externally clean,
free from oil and grease and other combustible materials.

(4) Transformers used for electrical welding shall be cut off from the electrical power
source when not in use.

(5) During welding work underground :

a. an insulated electrode holder shall be used that has dead man type switches to
control the electrical current;

b. any object that will undergo welding shall be grounded or connected to the
negative pole of the welding machine or transformer;

c. the welder and assistant welder shall wear safety glasses, aprons and other
appropriate protection and

d. where any other person is working in the said place apart from the welder the
welding site shall be equipped with a partition or screen.

(6) Welding transformers, rectifiers and generators used for the purpose of electrical
welding that are connected to the mine electrical system shall be fitted with
circuit breakers with adequate capacity.

(7) The welding generator machine shall be fitted with circuit breakers.

(8) Electrical welding systems shall be fitted with power surge circuit breakers
installed on the welding equipment, or network circuit breakers having a
maximum capacity of 200 percent of the capacity of the said equipment.

242
(9) Return cables and grounding cable connections shall use screw down connections
and not spring clamps.

(10) A durable metal plate shall be attached to electrical welding machines containing
legible information on the following :

a. the manufacturer, number and type;

b. frequency;

c. number of phases;

d. primary voltage;

e. primary current size;

f. maximum open network voltage;

g. voltage size and secondary current and

h. stipulation of the work load level and period of operation.

(10) Where welding work is carried out in a shaft or near the surface of a shaft, safety
measures against the welding sparks shall be taken as close as possible to the
source of sparks.

(11) It is prohibited to use electric welding in any underground coal mine at any mine
location where ignitable gases are found except where a permit has been obtained
from the Chief Mine Inspector.

243
 Article 426
Positioning, Charging,
Removal of Traction Batteries
and other Types of Batteries

(1) The positioning, charging and removal of traction batteries shall be in accordance
with the requirements of Article 389 on underground mine transportation herein
and the construction shall be in accordance with the Equipment Design and
Construction Guidelines used in the Underground Transportation System.

(2) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall only apply to traction type batteries. It is
prohibited to move or release any battery from its place of operation for charging
and filling except at a workshop or recharging station designated by the Technical
Mine Manager.

Article 427
Equipment Used at
Gas Hazardous Work Sites

(1) It is prohibited to use electrical equipment at any work site where flammable
gases may occur except electrical equipment that is permissible.

(2) The location of mines as required in paragraph (1) shall be marked on mining
maps. The determination of gas hazardous locations shall not only be based on
normal operating conditions, but must also take into account conditions where gas
emissions or blow-outs, ventilation failures occur as well as other extra ordinary
circumstances.

(3) It is prohibited to install electrical equipment at any location designated as

required in paragraph (2), until the Technical Mine Manager has forwarded
ventilation maps of the said location to the Chief Mine Inspector and any related
matter as intended in Article 19 paragraph (3) letter c and a detailed list of
equipment to be installed. Within 30 days, if no objection is offered by the Chief
Mine Inspection installation may be conducted.

(4) Electric lights used for gas hazardous mines shall be of a type that is permissible.

(5) The Mine Inspector may request the Technical Mine Manager to make
amendments to, make additions to the location of the requirements in paragraph
(2) of this Article, based on inspections conducted.

(6) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall also apply to monitoring, testing,
recording and measuring equipment installed permanently or temporarily.

244
 Article 428
Cutting Off Electricity when
Ignitable Gases are Found

(1) Where any person discovers a concentration of flammable gases of more than 1
percent of the air in any location in any underground mine, or where there are
indications of gas as indicated by the flame in the flame safety lamp and the
requirements of Article 301 or Article 342, the said person shall :

a. immediately cut off the electricity from all electrical equipment, except
telephones or any signalling equipment installed or used for the purpose of
gas detection or electric safety lights or

b. inform the operations supervisor of the said matter or any person who
understands electricity.

(2) The operations supervisor or any person that understands electricity who receives
a report about the presence of flammable gases shall take immediate steps as
required in paragraph (1) letter a.

(3) Once the electricity is cut off from the electrical equipment as required in
paragraph (1) and (2), in order to be restarted an order shall be issued by the
Underground Mine Manager and the concentration of flammable gas in the air at
the said location shall be declared not in excess of 1 percent.

(4) Where ever any electrical current is cut off and then restarted, such events shall
be recorded in the Mine Book including information of the location, time and
duration of the electrical shut down or disruption.

Article 429
Flammable Gas Detection
and Reading Devices

It is prohibited to install or use any electrical equipment for the purpose of detecting or
reading / measuring flammable gases except where the said equipment is of a type that is
approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

245
 Part Fourteen
Lighting

Article 430
Application

Apart from the requirements of Article 98 through Article 101, the following
requirements also apply for all underground mines.

Article 431
Lighting at Surface
Work Sites

(1) When work is conducted at night, all pathways, stairways, electrical panels,
loading areas, unloading areas, and buildings shall be equipped with adequate
lighting.

(2) The lighting at work areas in buildings shall be equipped with emergency lighting
with the following stipulations :

a. must operate automatically when electrical currents are cut;

b. must have its own source of electrical power;

c. must be able to light adequately enough for evacuation from the said buildings
and enable very important work to be continued safely and

d. must undergo testing as frequently as possible but must not be less frequent
than the recommendations of the manufacturer.

Article 432
Underground Lighting

(1) In every underground mine effective lighting shall be installed at the following
places :

a. at any entrance facility to the shaft or outlets, all active stations at the shaft,
landing places, and loading sites and any other place required by workers for
passage of work;

b. at any place where people work or move and at which is installed any
machine, motor or machinery;

246
 c. every place where vehicles are regularly coupled or uncoupled or regularly
attached or detached from a haulage system, and every place where vehicles
are regularly filled (loaded) mechanically and

d. at any place where there is equipment or any operation that may be dangerous
due to a lack of lighting.

(2) Main lighting that utilises electricity as required in this Article shall fulfil the
stipulations in Article 412 through Article 429 with a voltage not in excess of 250
volts.

(3) All lighting shall be properly installed.

(4) Places that shall be lighted :

a. all entrances and exit facilities to and from any shaft and outlets and the
surroundings areas thereof used regularly;

b. all walls, passes or intersections where coupling and releasing of coupled

vehicles is regularly carried out or any transportation system and every
vehicle refuelling station where refuelling is conducted mechanically and

c. any room or place where machines, motors, transformers and switches are
found.

(5) Any place within a distance of 250 metres of any working face, stope and blasting
sites may be exempted from the requirements of this Article.

Article 433
Miner’s Lamps

(1) Mine workers who enter any underground mine shall be equipped with lamps
approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Any person engaged in haulage operations underground shall be provided with an
electric cap lamp with a suitable belt and helmet to enable it to be worn
constantly.

(3) Any person who is equipped with lamps must :

a. conduct inspections and ensure that the lamps are in good condition and
properly fitted;

b. refuse to use any lamp that fails to meet stipulated requirements;

247
 c. be cautious in using the said lamps;

d. report any damage to any lamp to the lamp room employee who must record
the damage to the said lamp and

e. return lamps to the lamp room after finishing working.

(4) All lamps shall be numbered and maintained in good condition by a competent
person whose name shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(5) Regulations for the lamp room shall be as follows :

a. all lamps shall be undergo maintenance in a special lamp room;

b. lamps shall be cleaned, installed and refilled in a room separate from the fuel
storage room;

c. open flames, open lighting and smoking shall be prohibited in the lamp room
where lamps are being handled;

d. prohibition signs as intended in letter b and letter c shall be installed at the

entrance facilities to the lamp room and

e. lamp rooms must be fitted with fire extinguishers, the type and volume of
which shall meet requirements.

(6) Any person authorised or assigned to the lamp room shall be in charge of
recording :

a. the name of every person who enters the mine and

b. the number of the lamp issued to any person entering the mine.

Article 434
Fire Prevention

(1) Re-lighting flame safety lamps shall be carried out in accordance with the
stipulated methods.

(2) Where an open/naked flame is used :

a. the open flame shall be enclosed and must be fitted with lamp chimney;

b. no naked light shall be left in the mine unattended.

248
(3) At any place where open flame safety lamps are prohibited it shall be prohibited
to smoke or ignite a fire.

(4) It is prohibited to dispose carbide waste from any acetylene lamp in the mine.

Part Fifteen
Fire Prevention Underground
and Rescue Arrangements

Article 435
General Application

Apart from the requirements of Article 102 through Article 123, the following
requirements shall also apply to any underground mine.

Article 436
Prohibition of Open Flames Underground

(1) It is prohibited to start any fire underground except for welding purposes and the
welding flame shall be extinguished when left unattended.

(2) The requirements of Article 167 through Article 169 shall apply to the use of
oxygen and or gas equipment underground.

(3) Acetylene gas makers underground shall not be permitted. Acetylene or any other
gas that is flammable must be properly stored in a tank.

Article 437
Inspection Requirements and
Identification of the Source of Fire

The Underground Mine Manager shall ensure that the source of any fire in any
underground mine is identified, inspected at specified intervals and where possible
precautionary measures shall always be ready for application to prevent a fire.

249
 Article 438
Storage of Combustible
Liquids Underground

(1) Combustible liquids, including lubricants and grease shall be stored in a safe
metal container or in a tank.

(2) Storage containers or tanks as required in paragraph (1) shall be placed in an area
that is free from combustible materials, separated from explosives or explosives
ingredients, any source of fire, and other materials that may produce heat or
sparks.

(3) Diesel oil shall be transported and only stored in accordance with the
requirements of Article 390.

(4) The use of liquid petroleum gas underground shall only be for the purpose of
maintenance work and may only be brought in limited quantities for immediate
use and the fuel bottles shall be immediately returned to the surface after use.

Article 439
Prohibition on the
Use of Petrol Underground

It is prohibited under these regulations to bring in and or store petrol (premium or

premix) underground.

Article 440
Combustible Materials

(1) The Underground Mine Manager shall make guidelines for the safe use, storage
and transportation of combustible goods in underground mines.

(2) Combustible materials other than coal in coal mines, except wood, shall not be
stored underground except :

a. in a room or container made from non-combustible e materials;

b. in accordance with the guidelines as laid down by the Underground Mine

Manager and

c. carbide may only be brought into an underground mine in a watertight metal

container or in a carbide tight container.

250
(3) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that combustible materials are not part
of any building that :

a. is located at the mouth of any shaft or outlet shaft or

b. is an underground location used as a machine room or electrical equipment

room.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that every ventilation curtain is made
from fire resistant materials and are well maintained.

Article 441
Area Surrounding
the Mine

(1) All surface buildings located within a distance of 30 metres from an opening to a
mine used as a intake airway or emergency exit shaft shall :

a. be made from fire resistant materials or

b. be made from any materials that have a fire resistance of no less than 1 hour
or

c. be equipped with automatic fire extinguishers.

(2) Combustible materials and liquids shall not be stored within a distance of 30
metres of the opening to a mine except where it is essential for maintenance work
with a temporary storage facility for one day use.

Article 442
Entrances to the Mine

(1) The upper section of any shaft or access way portal to the mine shall be made
from steel or other fire resistant materials. Where wood is used the wood shall
undergo prior treatment to reduce the flammability.

(2) Any construction along the length of any shaft shall be fire resistant.

(3) Any shaft constructed from wood shall be treated to be fire resistant and fitted
with fire extinguishers and all landing stations along the shaft shall be made from
fire resistant materials.

(4) Fire fighting equipment as required in paragraph (3) shall be capable of

extinguishing any fire to a distance of 20 meters from the shaft at every level.

251
(5) Any shaft at an incline of less than 1 : 1, with a wooden frame shall be fire
resistant for at least 60 meters from the entrance.

(6) It is prohibited to store lubricating oils, grease or combustible liquids at any

landing station in the shaft.

Article 443
Requirement to Make Roads
from Fire Resistant Materials

Road supports or any part of an underground road shall where possible be constructed
from fire resistant materials.

Article 444
Underground Electrical
Cables

(1) Underground electrical cables should best be installed through a drilled hole or
where possible the said cable shall be installed in the return airway and shall be
constructed to be fire resistant.

(2) Trailing cables used underground shall be capable of resisting flames and must
fulfil the stipulations in the General Regulations for Electrical Installations.

Article 445
Abandoned Electrical Circuits

Abandoned electrical circuits shall be deenergized and isolated so that they can not
become energized inadvertently.

Article 446
Underground Preventive
Measures

(1) Any underground station or work site shall be cleared of fuels or any combustible
waste.

(2) Prior to using oxygen-acetylene equipment all surrounding dry wood shall be
moistened.

(3) After burning or welding work, all wood shall be inspected for the presence of
fire and a re-inspection shall be conducted at every change of work shifts and the
findings thereof shall be recorded.

252
(4) Carbide lamps or candles shall not be allowed to burn unattended.

(5) At any place underground where there exists the potential hazard of combustible
materials or liquids igniting “Smoking Prohibited” signs shall be installed.

(6) After blasting has been conducted, an inspection shall be carried out immediately
for the danger of fire in the surrounding area.

Article 447
Requirements for Fire
Facilities and the
Appointment of Fire Fighters

(1) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be provided at every mine in adequate

numbers and which must always be ready for immediate use.

(2) Fire extinguishers which may cause noxious gases shall not be used in any
underground mine.

(3) A number of competent people shall be designated in writing to implement

regular inspections of the condition of facilities and equipment provided as
required in paragraph (1) and shall report the inspection findings to the
Underground Mine Manager.

(4) In attempting to reduce the potential for fires, the Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. appoint fire fighting personnel;

b. stipulate methods to be employed whenever extinguishing fires.

c. train an adequate number of people to operate the facilities and equipment as

required in paragraph (1) and

d. conduct fire fighting training periodically or on a regular basis for all people
working in the underground mine.

253
 Article 448
Location of Fire
Equipment and Facilities

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 434 paragraph (1) the following shall also
be complied with :

a. the following facilities and equipment shall be provided and be ready for
immediate use where a fire occurs :

1) a supply of water or any other fire extinguishing agent in an adequate

amount;

2) portable fire extinguishers, dust, sand and other materials in adequate

amounts and

3) water spraying equipment, equipment for the spreading of dust and sand
and other fire extinguishing materials.

b. appropriate fire extinguishing equipment shall be provided at the following

locations :

1) at the top of and entrance to any shaft or outlet;

2) at any machine room or any electrical motor room;

3) at any storage facilities where ignitable materials are stored;

4) on every non portable electrical motor, transformer and switches;

5) on every cutting machine or loading machine used at any working face

and

6) along any conveyor crossing, and at coal mines as well as at the following
places :

I) specific places at working faces and

ii) several places along the main intake airway or main return airway.

(2) Where electrical equipment is soaked in oil using more than 400 litres of
lubricating oil the said place shall be equipped with appropriate fire extinguishers.

254
(3) At any underground mine or underground coal mine where wood is utilised as a
means of support, water shall be provided to extinguish fires and the said water
shall be capable of flowing efficiently with an adequate volume to any work site
that has the potential for an outbreak of fire.

Article 449
The Supply and
Delivery of Water

(1) Where water is used as the means of overcoming a fire, a sufficient amount of
water shall be in adequate supply which shall be channelled underground through
a system of pipelines, hydrants and hoses to any location that has the potential for
fire at any work site underground.

(2) Where water from the water supply is channelled through any upright shaft or
inclined shaft the lowest section of the pipeline shall be used for collection of
solid deposits and fitted with a valve for the disposal of the said solid deposits.

(3) Hydrants shall be provided and maintained in order to always be in a condition

ready for immediate use :

(I) at every shaft station;

(ii) at a distance of 20 - 25 metres from any conveyor loading facility, main

junctions, machine rooms, fan rooms, and sub-stations.

(iii) at any other place where there exists the possibility of fire at intervals of 250
meters and

(iv) at any area near a working face of any long wall mining system and at the
central point of any room and pillar mining system and stope workings and
in the area of any work opening.

(4) The location of fire extinguishing facilities shall be close to hydrants as required in
paragraph (3) and be fitted with adequate hoses.

Article 450
Fire Extinguishing Locations

Fire stations shall be provided close to the bottom and any insets of a downcast shaft or
outlet, and at intake airways serving any working sections. The minimum equipment
provided in a fire station shall be :

a. reserve supply of portable fire extinguishers;

255
 b. adequate supply of sand, inert dust, or other fire fighting material;

c. where there is a requirement for water to be used for fire fighting, a supply of
sandbags for quick sealing off purposes shall be provided;

d. 250 metres of fire hoses including couplings when only one water resource is
available; and

e. two branch pipes and nozzles of 12.7 or 16 mm in diameter.

Article 451
Exceptions for
Small Scale Mines

Article 447 through t Article 450 shall not apply to mines that employ less than 100
people underground, except where stipulated otherwise by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 452
Evacuation from
Enclosed Spaces

The Underground Mine Manager shall ensure that measures have been taken to reduce
the risk of workers becoming trapped in any enclosed space or place in which is found
any machine, equipment or in which is stored combustible materials or materials which
emit noxious gases in dangerous concentrations.

Article 453
Preventing Fire Outbreaks
or Suspected Impending Fire

(1) Any person in charge of any part of any mine who notices the appearance of any
smoke or other sign indicating that a fire may have broken out below ground at
any place, shall cause all persons employed at any place, likely to be affected by
such fire, by-products of combustion thereof or by any explosion resulting
therefrom, to leave it.

(2) In any case in which it appears to the person in charge of the part of the mine
from which the sign of a fire emanates that there exists no immediate danger,
persons may remain there for the purpose of preventing danger from arising.

(3) Guidelines for the evacuation of mines in emergency situations shall fulfil the
requirements of Article 341.

256
(4) If it is ascertained that fire has broken out all parts of the seam or level in which
the fire exists and all parts of any other seam or level reached from any common
surface outlet shall be deemed for the purpose of paragraph (1).

(5) All parts of any underground mine shall be treated as required in paragraph (1) for
the duration of fire extinguishing and until work is completely carried out. No
person shall be permitted to enter the underground mine, except for the purpose of
fire fighting and securing the mine.

(6) Except for any person in a rescue team it is prohibited for any person to enter any
mine prior to the area affected by the fire being declared safe.

(7) Following evacuation of a mine in a fire emergency, only persons wearing and
trained in the use of mine rescue apparatus shall participate in rescue and fire
fighting operations.

Article 454
Stopping of any Fire
or Dangerous Area

Stoppings to seal off any fire area or danger area shall be constructed for strength and a
report thereof must be forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 455
Underground Warning
Systems

(1) Fire warning signals that are capable of rapidly warning people in underground
mines shall be installed and maintained to always be in good condition.

(2) When any worker is assigned outside the reach of the warning system, another
warning system shall be created which enable such workers to be aware of the
presence of an outbreak of fire.

Article 456
Underground Evacuation Training

(1) All persons who work underground shall be instructed in evacuation procedures,
escape plans and fire warning signals.

257
(2) Persons who work in more than one area of the underground mine, shall be
instructed about the location of escape ways for all areas of the mine in which
they normally work or travel.

(3) Evacuation training shall be carried out on a regular basis in order that every
person is able to reach the surface or any safe place as designated within the time
limit of the self rescue equipment provided.

Article 457
Fire Doors and Control Doors

(1) An adequate number of fire doors and fire control doors shall be installed in
underground mines to cut off shafts and mine openings from other work sites in
the mine to prevent the spread of fire, smoke and noxious gases in the mine at any
time of fire.

(2) Fire or control doors shall be installed at or near downcast shaft stations and any
outlet designated as an escape way or at other locations that provide protection for
the persons escaping.

(3) Fire or control doors shall be closed or opened only according to predetermined
conditions and procedures and only on the instructions of the Underground Mine
Manager or the Technical Mine Manager.

(4) Fire doors and fire control doors shall be well made for strength in order that
when closed they cannot be opened by differences in air pressure.

(5) Fire doors and fire control doors shall be capable of being opened by the strength
of one person from both sides and must be free from obstructions.

Article 458
Personal Self Rescuers

(1) Coal mines and mines which produce materials that may be combustible, and
which use mining equipment which use diesel or hydraulically operated
equipment, and which may have the potential for fire shall equip workers with
personal self rescuers to protect them from the danger of smoke or any other
product of fire.

(2) Personal self rescuers shall be provided in a type recognised by the Chief Mine
Inspector and shall have the capability to provide protection for evacuation to the
surface or to any available protection station.

258
(3) Any person who uses any personal self rescuers shall be given prior training on
maintenance methods and the use of the said equipment in darkness and training
must be conducted no less than once a year.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall create regulations on the issuing, return,
cleaning, maintenance and inspection of personal self rescuers.

Article 459
Protection Stations

(1) If persons are required to work at places beyond the duration of self-rescuers,
refuge stations shall be provided at suitable places.

(2) At refuge stations, adequate clean water and air shall be supplied as well as
communication equipment to the surface, and the said refuge stations shall be
separate from other work sites and shall be capable of being closed so that gas is
prevented from entering.

(3) Refuge stations shall be easily accessible and evacuation routes shall be free from
obstructions and clearly marked with light reflecting signs.

(4) Refuge stations and the fittings thereof shall be constructed from fire resistant
materials and :

a. be designed with a volume of space greater than 2 cubic meters per person
with a floor area no less than 0.6 meters squared per person;

b. compressed air shall be pumped in from a clean source and shall be no less
than 20 litres per minute per person. Temperature shall be arranged to remain
normal in all protection stations when in use and

c. the following requirements shall be met :

1) provide instructions for use in an emergency;

2) a potable supply of water;

3) first aid equipment;

4) toilet facilities;

5) whistles

6) seating and

259
 7) lighting.

(5) Refuge bay positions should be indicated on the statutory mine plan as required
by Article 19 (d).

Article 460
Life Saving Equipment

(1) Life saving equipment shall be well maintained and always be ready for
immediate use and be located for ease of reach at every underground mine :

a. breathing helmets or any similar equipment with an air hose of at least 40

metres, or other breathing equipment with short durability and suitable for self
rescue from contaminated air;

b. one set of reviving apparatus with bottled oxygen of no less than 600 litres
and

c. reliable portable equipment or facilities to measure the lack of oxygen and

combustible noxious gases.

(2) At every underground mine an adequate number of people trained in using the
equipment as required in paragraph (1) shall be available at every work shift.

Article 461
Mine Rescue

(1) Every underground mine with a worker population in excess of 100 people shall
provide mine rescue facilities in preparation for an emergency situation which
may endanger lives or safety at the mine.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall be in charge of organising and maintaining
mine rescue for both independent mines and those joined with other mines that
operate in an area that is capable of being easily reached (two hours travelling)
from the rescue facilities to each mine.

(3) Any mine rescue facility that serves one or several proximate mines shall be
arranged and operated in accordance with the Code of Practice for Rescue
Arrangement and approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) Company regulations for the Code of Practice for Rescue Arrangement may differ
for every different mine or location taking into consideration the location of the
mine and the conditions of transportation.

260
(5) For differences of rescue equipment as specified in paragraph (4) the Technical
Mine Manager may lodge an application to the Chief Mine Inspector along with
details of the rulings required.

(6) Approved company regulations for the Code of Practice for Rescue Arrangement
including variations thereof that are proposed by the Technical Mine Manager
shall be provided for all or part of the following stipulations depending on the
conditions at the mine concerned :

a. the organisation and employees at rescue stations including permanent rescue

teams ;

b. rescue workers and the mine rescue team ;

c. training and qualifications of the rescue workers;

d. equipment to call rescue employees;

e. transportation requirements for rescue services;

f. records at the central rescue station;

g. equipment for the central rescue station;

h. rescue equipment at the mine;

i. breathing equipment;

j. maintenance and inspection of all rescue equipment;

k. requirements for the safe implementation of rescue efforts or fire fighting

work;

l. signals and communication for rescue work;

m. accommodation at the mine for rescue workers and

n. training schedules and joint practices at various mines.

261
 Part Sixteen
Welfare

Article 462
Working Alone

It is prohibited to send any employee to work at any isolated and hazardous place, except
where equipped with direct communications equipment to nearby workers.

Article 463
Working Hours Underground

(1) It is prohibited to work any person in excess of the number of hours as stipulated
by the Department of Manpower and over any twenty four hour period workers
may only :

a. work eight hours beyond the time required for the change of shift for hoist
operators and signallers;

b. nine hours including time required for the changing of shifts and reporting
time for operational supervisors and technical supervisors and

c. 8.5 hours for other workers.

(2) Working hours as required in paragraph (1) shall be calculated from the time of
entry to the time of exiting the mine or from the time of being lowered into until
the time of being raised out of via the shaft and workers must be lowered and
raised strictly according to the time schedule where possible.

(3) Working hours as intended in paragraph (1) shall not apply for the following
work :

a. taking of samples, research and surveying;

b. any rescue work in an emergency situation and

c. major maintenance that must be carried out for the security and safety of the
mine or in the interests of production continuity.

262
(4) When required in paragraph (3) letter c such a situation is necessary, workers may
be permitted to work an additional two hours of work as many as three times in
seven days or for a period of eight hours in a row once in seven days. Resting
time shall be provided of no less than seven hours prior to the next shift being
commenced. All additional working hours as intended in this paragraph shall be
recorded in the overtime book.

(5) Where air humidity at any work site is very high working hours shall be reduced
in accordance with the conditions at the said place.

(6) Exceptions as specified in paragraph (4) of any matter provided for in paragraph
(3) letter a shall not apply where the air is very hot and humid.

Article 464
First Aid in an Accident

(1) At an easily reached place at any underground mine an first aid post shall be
provided equipped with medicines, equipment, stretchers and blankets.

(2) Shift supervisors and several of the crew thereof shall be given training in first
aid.

(3) Every underground mine supervisor that has been trained to provide first aid in an
accident shall be equipped with an accident first aid kit for immediate use where
necessary and:

a. every kit shall be marked First Aid Kit and contain medical supplies
including :

1) two large wound dressing bandages;

2) two small wound dressing bandages

3) six appropriate wound dressings.

b. every supervisor equipped with a first aid kit as required in paragraph (3)
letter a shall first return the first aid kit at the end of the work shift to the
place as designated by the Underground Mine Manager and

c. the Underground Mine Manager shall ensure that every first aid kit returned is
inspected by a competent person who must refill the said kits prior to reuse.

263
 First Aid Post Locations Underground

(1) A map showing the location of first aid posts shall be provided:

a. first aid posts shall be appropriately located at :

1) every working face or any area under the authority of the supervisor;

2) every shaft used for the passage of people in the area under the authority
of the supervisor;

3) the bottom of every shaft or incline.

b. a map showing first aid post locations must be available at the mining office.

(2) At any first aid post location in any mine, the following additional equipment is
required:

a. appropriate stretchers and blankets in adequate numbers shall be provided and

shall be protected from dust and unclean air;

b. splints;

c. a box marked First Aid Kit containing bandages or padding suitable for use
with splints and

d. two small bags filled with clean sand and other materials the function of
which shall be for use as a support where any person suffers neck or head
injuries.

(3) In order to enable any person to reach the accident first aid posts :

a. signs indicating the direction of the posts must be made and

b. the location of the accident first aid posts shall be indicated on a diagram of
the mine as intended in Article 37 paragraph (2).

Article 466
Equipment for
Transporting the Injured or Sick

(1) At underground mines wheel chairs suited to the conditions of underground mines
shall be provided to transport the injured or sick where the existing means of
transportation makes transportation by stretcher of victims impossible.

264
(2) At every shaft, incline, means of egress which cannot be travelled on foot and at
every working face in a mine at an inclination of 1 : 5 or more a safe means of
transporting the injured and sick must be provided.

(3) When no adequate hospital facilities are provided at the mine, the mining operator
shall create stipulations that ensure that :

a. ambulance vehicles, boats planes or other ambulance facilities are provided

where necessary for the transportation of any worker who experiences injury
or sickness to a hospital and home.

b. an employee in charge of providing ambulance services shall always be on

duty in the mine.

Article 467
Housekeeping

(1) Work sites, traffic ways, magazines and service rooms shall be kept clean and
tidy.

(2) The floor area of any work site shall be maintained to always be kept as dry as
possible.

(3) The floor area of any work site shall be as free as possible from any protruding
nails, splinters, holes or any loose boards.

Article 468
Personal Protection Equipment

(1) Every person shall wear protective head gear when in any underground mine or in
or in the area of any mine or mill where there exists the potential for danger from
falling objects or collisions.

(2) All people shall wear safety boots when in underground mines, in the area of or
near any mine or mill where the potential for foot injury exists.

(3) All persons shall wear safety glasses or safety goggles or face protection
equipment or any other appropriate safety apparel when in or in the vicinity of
any mine or mill when there are hazards which may injure the eyes.

(4) Any person who works at a height of more than 2.5 metres where the potential for
falling, shall wear a safety belt and safety lanyard.

Article 469

265
 Waste Bins

Waste bins shall be equipped with a cover and shall be provided at specific locations and
must be emptied and cleaned at specific times.

Article 470
Communications Equipment

Telephones or two way communications equipment shall be provided and equipped with
instructions for use and important numbers for the purpose of communicating with the
surface from :

a. the base of any shaft or means of egress;

b. the internal terminal of any transportation system used for the transportation of
people;

c. the work site of the operational supervisor.

Article 471
Transportation Requirements

(1) Along the entire length of any road which is hauled by an animal, refuge holes
shall be provided large enough for two persons at intervals of no more than 40
metres.

(2) Along roads without permanently installed lighting, every animal that hauls a
series of mine lorries shall be carry appropriate lighting and the last lorry in the
chain must be affixed with red tail lights.

(3) It is prohibited to ride any animal in any mine.

(4) Not one animal shall be left unattended in any mine except where unhooked from
the vehicle being hauled and such animals must be tethered.

Article 472
Respiratory Equipment

(1) Every type of respiratory equipment that is used shall be approved by the Chief
Mine Inspector.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall create company regulations for the handling,
utilisation, storage and maintenance of respiratory equipment in accordance with

266
 the manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with the conditions at the place
of use.

(3) The use of any approved respiratory equipment shall be suited to the following
breathing hazards :

a. oxygen deficiency;

b. gases or smoke and

c. any other exposures including dust and noxious gases (fumes) and the period
of use and duration of use.

Part Seventeen
Manpower Training
and Supervision

Article 473
General Application

Apart from the requirements of Article 28 through Article 30 of these regulations, the
following stipulations shall apply for all underground mines.

Article 474
Manpower Training

(1) a. it is prohibited to employ any person at any underground mine who has no
experience in working in an underground mine except those workers who
have undergone training and who have been approved by the Technical Mine
Manager and

b. any worker who has completed training shall be given a certificate by the
company or authority approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Training as required in paragraph (1) shall be training provided in accordance

with a curriculum approved by the Chief Mine Inspector. Except where stipulated
otherwise the said training must :

a. last at least 30 days and

b. must to the greatest extent possible be in accordance with actual conditions in

underground mines and such training in the mine must be carried out at least
six days.

267
(3) Every curriculum as required in paragraph (1) shall specify the methods used for
training with particular emphasis on the type of classes, hours of classes, theory in
class, practices, physical training, training sites and schedules, accommodation
facilities and equipment that must be provided as well as arrangements in relation
to theory in class and field practice.

Article 475
Supervision of Underground Workers

(1) Any person who has only recently completed training and who is employed at an
underground mine shall be supervised by an instructor or supervisor for period of
the first thirty working days

(2) Supervision as required in paragraph (1) shall be carried out for only one person
at all times except where working together in one place.

(3) It is prohibited to carry out any work at any location that is specially used as a
training location except for persons who are undergoing training, instructors,
supervisors, mine employees or any other authorised person.

(4) Any person undergoing training may only be underground when accompanied by
an instructor or training supervisor.

(5) Training may only be carried out after the Technical Mine Manager or the head of
training department has appointed an instructor or training supervisor and people
to be trained and the training materials to be used.

Article 476
Training for New Duties

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that persons are not assigned to
perform new duties except :

a. any person who has experience in working underground outside of the new
duties to be performed shall have at least six months experience after the
completion of training as specified in the previous Article and

b. any person who has undergone training and who has been awarded the
certificate as specified in Article 474 paragraph (1) letter b.

(2) Training as specified in paragraph (1) of this Article is not required for any
worker who has been trained and any worker who is capable of demonstrating
safe working procedures for the said new duties.

268
 Article 477
Exceptions

(1) Article 474 and Article 475 shall not apply to any person as follows :

a. Operational supervisors;

b. any staff member of the mechanical or electrical divisions;

c. any mine surveyor or any other person whose duty is specifically to carry out
surveying work;

d. any person whose duty is specifically to carry out monitoring or surveying or

who is oftentimes involved in monitoring or surveying work or

e. any person who does not usually work underground.

(2) Article 474 shall not apply to any person whose work is only to construct shafts
or to develop drifts and such workers must have undergone training of at least six
days with at least a total of thirty training hours and the said training must
comprise practical training in a mine as well as discussion of lessons related to
such work.

(3) Article 474 shall not apply to any worker who has experience in working in any
underground mine of at least two years either in Indonesia or abroad and when the
Technical Mine Manager considers the ability of the said worker to speak
Indonesia is adequate.

(4) Article 476 shall apply to any person as specified in paragraph (2) and paragraph
(3).

(5) Article 474 shall not apply to any student from any educational institution who is
undertaking work practice where :

269
 a. the said student has undergone training of at least 7 days, and the training
included safe working procedures, safe transportation underground, practice
training and demonstrations of mining operations and discussions on any
matter related to the work and

b. for the first fourteen days works at an underground mine students must be
under the supervision of an instructor or Operational Supervisor.

Article 478
Training Records

Copies of every certificate issued based on these regulations shall be stored at the mining
office for the duration of the period the person is working and for six months after the
said person has left.

Article 479
Annual Refresher Training

Every person who works in any underground mine shall undergo annual refresher
training of at least twenty four hours in accordance with the curriculum as approved by
the Chief Mine Inspector or the Technical Mine Manager. Where annual refresher
training is carried out in stages, every stage shall last for a period no shorter than 30
minutes and the worker shall be informed that the said period of time is part of the annual
refresher training.

Article 480
Appointment and Duties
of the Instructor

(1) A number of instructors shall be appointed to supervise training in any

underground mine and the Technical Mine Manager shall make an immediate
report of the appointment of an instructor to be forwarded the Chief Mine
Inspector.

(2) It is prohibited to assign additional duties to any underground mine instructor

apart from training duties.

(3) Where any instructor is without training duties for a continuous period of one
week the Technical Mine Manager shall make a training schedule that is suited to
the area of his duties for the duration of the said period. Copies of the said
notification shall be stored at the mining office where the employee implements
his/her duties ;

(4) Every instructor shall have the following duties :

270
 a. to supervise the implementation of training;

b. to make records of the implementation of training and make reports on the

progress of any person undergoing training under his/her supervision for the
Technical Mine Manager and the said reports must be made at designated
intervals and weekly reports must be made where the period for report making
is not specified.

c. to make weekly reports on the progress and supervision of any person

undergoing training for the Technical Mine Manager.

d. to make quarterly recommendations to the Technical Mine Manager on future

training;

e. to make quarterly reports to the Technical Mine Manager on the progress of

every worker in the underground mine who has less than 12 months of
experience in other underground mines and

f. see to the well being of any worker who has been working less than six
months in any underground mine.

(5) The records and reports required in paragraph (4) shall be stored for twelve
months at the mining office.

Article 481
Training Compensation

(1) Training shall be carried out during normal working hours and any person
undergoing training shall be paid a wage as would be paid were the said person
working normally.

(2) Where such training is carried out away from the work site, the person
undergoing training shall be compensated in the form of additional wages such as
for travelling expenses, food expenses and accommodation expenses which are
incurred for the duration of the training programme.

271
 Article 482
Exceptions

The Mine Inspector may grant exception expressed in writing in the Mine Book
regarding the validation of the stipulations in these regulations to any mine or at any part
of any mine or to any person working therefor, where the Mine Inspector is certain that
such exception will not reduce the occupational health and safety of any person being
trained or any mine worker.

Part Eighteen
Protection from
Natural Radiation

Article 483
Application

The following stipulations shall only apply to protection from the danger of natural
radiation originating from mining rock or mine air. The requirements for protection
against man made radiation shall comply with the regulations as issued by the National
Atomic Energy Agency or other related authorities.

Article 484
Assessment

(1) Preliminary assessment of radon daughters in the mine shall be conducted by

means of taking samples from each of the return airways at any point in the
vicinity of an intersection with a shaft or incline or any means of egress to the
surface.

(2) The sample required in paragraph (1) shall be taken by using methods and
equipment designed for the purpose of measuring concentrations of radon
daughters or the amount of alpha radiation energy, the methods and equipment
employed must be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector. The taking of samples
must be carried out by a competent person specified by the Technical Mine
Manager.

(3) Where the findings of samples taken indicate concentrations of radon daughters or
alpha energy in degrees equivalent to :

a. or greater than 0.03 Working Level

1) measuring of the concentrations of radon shall be conducted at the work
sites, roadways and any other place where workers gather. The samples
shall be taken at nose level when working;

272
 2) where sample results as required in sub item 1 indicates between 0.1 - 0.3
Working Level, further testing shall be carried out at intervals at least
three months until radon daughter measurements are below 0.03 Working
Level and

3) where sample results indicate more than 0.1 Working Level further testing
shall be carried out every week until radon daughter measurements are
less than 0.1 Working Level.

b. where sample results indicate levels less than 0.03 Working Level, further
samples shall be conducted at intervals of 12 months.

(4) In the case of uranium mines intervals specified in paragraph (3) letter a item 2)
shall be reduced to one month whereas in paragraph (3) letter a item 3) the said
period shall be daily, and in paragraph (3) letter b the said period shall be three
months.

Article 485
Radiation Limits

(1) The mine operator, the Technical Mine Manager and the Underground Mine
Manager shall take measures to limit worker exposures to natural radiation when
at work underground.

(2) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) all workers shall be protected
against radon daughters in excess of 4 Monthly Working Levels in one calendar
year.

(3) Workers shall be protected from the danger of radon daughters in excess of 1.0
Working Level except in an emergency situation for the purposes of the rescue of
any worker.

Article 486
Personal Radiation Records

(1) At any mine area where concentrations of radon daughters are detected in excess
of 0.1 Working Level, any person working at the said place shall wear radiation
dosimeters and measuring results or assessments of the said person must be
recorded.

273
(2) Any person who is exposed to levels as specified in paragraph (1) shall be fitted
with personal details including name, work site location, walking area and the
average concentrations at the said place. The cumulative degree of exposure to
radiation shall be calculated in weeks.

(3) Individual details of the exposure level of workers shall not be discontinued
except where the said person is no longer working or where the said person has
exceeded his/her time at the area with concentrations in excess of 0.1 Working
Level for six weeks, and the cumulative degree of exposure for one calendar year
does not exceed 1 Monthly Working Level.

(4) At least two months following the end of every calendar year, or the closing of
the mine, the individual details of the degree of radiation exposure as required in
paragraph (2) and paragraph (3) shall be forwarded to the authorised authority.
Copies of the said details shall be available at the Mining Office.

(5) Copies of validated individual details of exposure levels shall be given to workers
or any person given the authority thereby based on written requests.

Article 487
Safety Measures

(1) Apart from the stipulations of Article 485 paragraph (1), safety measures as listed
below shall be implemented :

a. it is prohibited to smoke at any mine location where the records specified in

Article 486 of these regulations are required to be kept;

b. it is required to install warning signs prohibiting the entry of any non

authorised person into any access way to any non active area in the mine
where concentrations of radon daughters are in excess of 1Working Level.

c. respiratory equipment approved for use as a means of protection against radon

daughters shall be provided at the mine and must be used by any person
entering any working environment containing radon daughters in excess of 1
Working Level and

d. it is prohibited to enter any location that contains radon daughters in

concentrations in excess of 10 Working Level except where the said person is
wearing self-contained respiratory equipment or respirator that absorbs radon
and its gas.

(2) Gamma radiation examinations shall be conducted at every part of the mine that
contains any radio active ore. The examinations shall be carried out in
accordance with the standards as approved by the Chief Mine Inspector and

274
 a. where measurements of gamma radiation indicate an average level in excess
of 7.5 micro sieverts (7.5 U Sv) per hour a radiation dosimeter shall be worn
by any person impacted by radiation and individual details of the degree of
exposure to gamma radiation must be kept;

b. data as intended in letter a shall apply as details/records as specified in Article

486 and

c. individual details of the degree of annual exposures to gamma radiation shall

not exceed 50 milli sieverts (50 m Sv).

Article 488
Radiation Dosimeters

Where individual details of the exposure to radiation are required in Article 486 the
Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. work in conjunction with a laboratory or agency equipped with the necessary

equipment, experts and experience for the purpose of dosimeter services and
the calculation of doses and

b. work in conjunction with advisors in regard to the issue of radiation protection

in the mine.

Article 489
Medical Supervision

Where any person is working in a mine whose period of work exceeds one year and the
doses exceeds 30 percent of the annual worker limit for exposure to radiation as
specified, medical supervision shall be provided for the purpose of monitoring any person
affected by radiation and the effects thereof.

275
 Chapter IX
Underground Coal Mines

Part One
General

Article 490
Application

Every underground coal mine shall be deemed to be a gassy mine and other underground
mines may also be deemed as a gassy mines where one of the following stipulations is
fulfilled :

a. the underground mine has a fire damp content in excess of 0.25 percent at any
time at any part of the underground mine or

b. the underground mine has at some time in the past experienced a fire or fire damp
explosion.

Article 491
Gassy Mine Exceptions

The Chief Mine Inspection may grant an exception to a coal mine, where neither of the
conditions of paragraph 490 have ever applied, if he considers that all circumstances of
the mine do not justify it being classifies as a “Safety Lamp Mine”.

Article 492
Flame Safety Lamps

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 433, it is prohibited to use any light in any
“underground mine” other than safety lamps as approved by the Chief Mine
Inspector.

(2) Safety lamps as specified in these regulations shall be flame lamps or tightly
sealed and protected electric lamps which prevent the ignition of gases or
combustible dusts outside the said lamp.

276
 Article 493
Requirements for
Flame Safety Lamps

All flame safety lamps shall meet the following requirements :

(1) For any mine in which ambient air may contains gases :

a. every lamp shall be so constructed and maintained, that it will not cause
external ignition when used in gassy or dusty atmosphere.

b. the safety of any re-lighter device shall be tested before re-lighting a lamp
below ground to ensure that external ignition of gas or dust is not possible.

(2) Construction of safety lamps :

a. all flame safety lamps shall be fitted with magnetic locks;

b. when using gauze as the raw material, the size of the gauze hole and the
uniformity of the gauze mesh in and outside shall meet safety conditions and

c. every lamp shall have :

1) simple and reliable external means of adjusting the wick;

2) devices to re-light the lamp from the exterior and

3) devices capable of regulating the intake of air only from the top of the
light.

(3) The glasses shall meet the following stipulations :

a. the glass shall have a smooth and clear surface. The end shall be parallel and
at right angles to the axis of the glass and

b. the glass shall not be easily shattered.

(4) The bonnet shall meet the following stipulations :

a. the lamp shall be fitted with a bonnet to protect the gauze from direct wind
and

b. the distance between the top of the gauze and the bonnet shall be no less than
10 millimetres.

277
(5) The intensity of light from any clean light shall be at least the equivalent of 0.6
candle power.

(6) Lamps shall :

a. be capable of giving actual indications of the presence of fire damp and any
lack of oxygen in the air of any mine by means of the flame;

b. shall be a stable flame and

c. shall have enough fuel for use of 12 hours at normal use. Fuel used shall be
of a type approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 494
The Use and Maintenance
of Flame Safety Lamps

(1) Every flame safety lamp shall be clean and in good condition and all parts thereof
shall be properly installed and the said lamp shall always be ready for immediate
use.

(2) When any flame safety lamp is used for the purpose of detecting fire damp or the
lack of oxygen (O2) in the air, the said detection shall be conducted with care and
with caution by a capable person with good eye sight.

Article 495

(1) Inspections shall be carried out prior to and at any time of use of flame safety
lamps :

a. lamps shall be inspected prior to being taken out of the lamp room to ensure
that :

1) the lamps are in good condition and that all parts thereof are installed
properly and safely;

2) the glass is not cracked and in good condition and

3) the lamp has no rust, dirt or oil on the gauze.

b. while underground.

1) it is prohibited to open up the lamp;

278
 2) it is prohibited to set the lamp on the floor or to hang it where it may be
struck by any objects and

3) it is prohibited to leave any lit lamp unattended or unsupervised.

c. When any lamp is damaged it shall be immediately turned off with caution.

Article 496
Inspections for Methane
Gas Using Flame
Safety Lamps

(1) When any flame safety lamp is used to test for the presence of fire damp :

a. the lamp shall be held firmly by the fuel vessel;

b. when the flame grows due to the intake of any gas, the lamp shall be lowered
slowly and with caution. When the flame extinguishes, the lamp shall be
taken to any place where there is fresh air prior to being re-lit.

c. when the flame grows while the wick flame extinguishes, the lamp shall be
taken immediately to a place of fresh air and measures shall be taken to pump
sufficient air to the said location.

d. it is prohibited to allow any lamp to smoke, given that such a situation covers
the gauze and hampers the flow of air into the lamp. Prior to being taken to
any work site for testing purposes, the flame shall first be inspected
thoroughly; while moving forward inspections shall be made to detect the
presence of fire damp.

Article 497
Re-lighting Flame
Safety Lamps Underground

(1) It is prohibited for any person except the Mine Inspector, the Technical Mine
Manager the Underground Mine Manager and any other person granted authority
in writing, to carry any flame safety lamp with a self contained re-lighting device
complete with an operating key into any gassy mine.

(2) It is prohibited to light any flame safety lamp underground except where the said
lamp has been declared in good condition following an inspection.

(3) It is prohibited to light any flame safety lamp equipped with self contained
ignitions in any area where combustible gas is believed to be present.

279
(4) Any person permitted to carry any flame safety lamp with a self contained
ignition is prohibited from carrying the safety key to the said lamp except where
authorised as specified in paragraph (1).

(5) Lamps, as specified in paragraph (4) may only be re-lit by an Operational

Supervisor.

Article 498
Electric Safety Lamps

(1) It is prohibited to use portable electric lamps at any gassy mine except those types
approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Electric safety lamps shall be fitted with a glass globe which seals tightly around
the bulb, and shall be protected with a sturdy bonnet.

(3) Any mine worker using portable electric safety lamps shall be attentive of :

a. the battery cover and the glass cover that protect the light bulb which shall
only be opened by an authorised person, and shall be done only in the lamp
room and

b. when the electric safety lamps is damaged or defective, they shall be

immediately turned off and returned for replacement.

Article 499
Prohibited Objects

(1) It is prohibited to light any fire in any form whatsoever in any underground mine
that is gassy and it is prohibited to carry any lighters or matches.

(2) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) it is prohibited to carry any lighters,
electronic or mechanical, which is capable of producing a flame into any
underground mine except of a type approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) The Technical Mine Manager or any person appointed thereby shall have the
authority to inspect any worker who may be carrying goods as specified in
paragraph (1) an paragraph (2) into the underground mine. The names of those
appointed must be recorded in the Mine Book.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall guarantee that all workers entering an
underground mine have been checked to ensure that not one such worker is
carrying prohibited objects as specified in paragraph (1) and paragraph (2).

280
 Part Two
Prevention of Combustible
Gases and Dust from Igniting

Article 500
General Duties

The Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. Identify potential sources of ignition of firedamp or flammable dust and

b. take effective precautionary measures to ensure that ignition of combustible gases

or dusts does not occur.

Article 501
Preventing Methane
Gas from Igniting

(1) Where fire damp is found to be present in any gassy underground mine,
precautionary measures shall be taken to prevent ignition of the gas and such
precautionary measures shall be carried out continuously as long as the gas
remains present.

(2) Apart from the requirements of Article 500, the Technical Mine Manager shall
specify the precautionary measures that must be taken to reduce the possibility of
the ignition of fire damp caused by :

a. blasting;

b. electrostatic sparking;

c. static electricity sparks;

d. mechanical friction;

e. sparks caused by friction from excavating equipment or loading equipment;

f. spontaneous combustion and

g. open flames.

(3) Light alloy metals (aluminium, magnesium, titanium and the alloys thereof) shall
not be used underground where ever possible. It is prohibited to utilise the said
metals at any place where an accumulation of gas exists.

281
(4) In any mine or section of a mine where coal or other mineral worked may be
liable to spontaneous combustion, the precautions taken shall include the
separation of the various sections of the workings to make them independent of
each other. All entries to each section of such workings shall be provided with
prepared sites for the fire seals.

Article 502
Fire Damp Inspections

(1) At every gassy underground mine, fire damp detection equipment approved by
the Chief Mine Inspector shall be provided.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint an adequate number of competent
people to carry out fire damp testing at all work sites during work shifts using fire
damp detection equipment.

(3) Competent people as specified in paragraph (2) shall be :

a. any person who has undergone training in the use of fire damp detection
equipment in a course whose curriculum is approved by the Chief Mine
Inspector.

b. any person with experience working in an underground coal mine of at least

one year and who has been trained by a competent person in the use of the
said equipment for at least one working month;

c. the names of the said persons shall be recorded in the Mine Book and

d. people as specified in paragraph (3) letter a shall be given refresher training

at least every three years.

(4) Employees as specified in paragraph (2) who carry out fire damp testing shall be
required to make written reports and shall inform the operation supervisor of the
detected presence of any fire damp.

282
 Article 503
Fire damp Testing
Near Electrical Equipment
or Diesel Machinery

(1) At any place where electrical equipment or diesel machinery is operated, fire
damp testing shall be carried out moments before the said electrical equipment
and diesel machinery is started.

(2) Where testing indicates a fire damp content in excess of one percent the said
electrical equipment and diesel machinery shall not be started.

(3) Testing as specified in paragraph (1) shall be carried out by a competent person as
required in Article 502 paragraph (3) and such testing shall be repeated regularly
while the said equipment and machinery is operated.

(4) Any time during a work shift if the presence of fire damp in excess of one percent
is detected, the following measures shall be taken :

a. electricity shall be cut and diesel equipment shall be turned off and the
requirements of Article 428 shall be carried out as soon as possible and

b. such changes or adjustment to the airflow that are possible to reduce the
firedamp content.

(5) When any locomotive or any other vehicle powered by electricity or diesel is used
at a gassy underground mine, fire damp testing shall be carried out at both ends of
the roadway and at several specific places along the said roadway.

(6) Diesel machines used in the mine shall be equipped with exhaust gas catalysts.

Article 504
Examination of Firedamp
Before (Intentional) Roof Fall

Immediately before an intentional roof fall is made, pillar workings shall be

examined to ascertain whether firedamp is present. If 1% or more is detected,
such roof fall shall not be made.

283
 Article 505
Location of Tests
for Firedamp

(1) Fire damp testing shall be made :

a. at the face of each working place;

b. in each heading;

c. in a split of air returning from any working section;

d. at a point not less than 30 centimetres from the goaf or rib at the return end of
any working;

e. specific places along any roadway where fire damp is expected of

accumulating and

f. on the gas monitoring pipes installed at areas that have been sealed off.

(2) Fire damp measuring as specified in paragraph (1) shall be carried out in the
following way :

a. as close as possible to the roof and

b. at the general cross section of any airway.

(3) The result of such testing shall be recorded in the daily record book for ventilation
located on the surface.

Article 506
Precaution Against
Flammable Dust

(1) In order to prevent the spread of coal dust explosions or explosion of other
combustible materials, the said dust shall be cleaned away and shall not be
allowed to accumulate at any work site or on any electrical equipment.

(2) When any underground mine activity is capable of causing or increasing an

excessive amount of dust in the air which is capable of leading to an explosion,
water of other valid means shall be used to reduced the amount of dust.

(3) When the dust is fine or concentrated enough to be dangerous, precautionary

measures shall be taken which must cover :

284
 a. prevention of the dust becoming airborne;

b. reduction of the occurrence of dust during excavation or transportation;

c. cleaning and disposal of the dust from the mine and

d. regularly spreading powdered lime in specific amounts or other means to

ensure that the coal dust is not as flammable.

(4) Precautionary measures required in paragraph (3) shall be in accordance with the
Guidelines for the Prevention of Combustible dust as issued by the Chief Mine
Inspector, particularly in regard to the composition fineness and means of
spreading powdered lime.

Article 507
Taking Dust Samples

(1) When a condition exists as specified in Article 506 paragraph (3), the taking of
dust samples from any roadway where the dust is found shall be carried out at
intervals of no more 30 days in order to determine the combustible content of the
said dust.

(2) The taking of coal dust samples as specified in paragraph (1) shall be carried out
to ensure the collection of no less than one sample from :

a. along any length of coal haulage roads at distances not more than 150 metres;

b. any return airway, beginning at a distance of 180 metres from the working
face and thereafter at distances of no more than 150 metres and

c. every roadway apart from that intended in letter a and letter b for no more
than every 250 metres.

(3) Where analyses of dust samples taken over a continuous period of six months
from any dusty mine roadway indicate that the combustible content can be
naturally sustained without adding rock dust, the taking of dust samples for
analysis may therefore be carried out at intervals of at least ninety days.

285
(4) Paragraph (3) shall not apply where the conditions change or where work
methods cause an increase in the combustible dust content so that the
concentration of non combustible dust is reduced. Samples and the analysis
thereof must be carried out as soon as possible.

(5) The results of dust analyses shall be recorded in a special book no more than 21
days after the dust sample was taken. The findings of the dust sample analysis as
required in paragraph (2) apart from being recorded as digits, shall also be plotted
on the mine map attached to the said special book using different colours in
accordance with the levels of dust concentration.

(6) Where steel arch supports are used to support any mine roadway, dust samples on
the roof and sides may be taken together.

(7) Dust samples to be analysed shall be mixed evenly and be less than 250 micro-
metres and must be analysed using recognised methods.

(8) The stipulations as required in Article 506 paragraph (3) item c and item d shall
not apply to dust :

a. within a distance of less than 10 metres from any working face;

b. that is naturally moist and

c. which contains less than 10 percent volatile matters.

Article 508
Non Combustible Dust

(1) Dust samples taken and analysed as required in Article 507 shall only be
categorised as non combustible dust where the following stipulations are met :

Airborne Particle Content in Minimum Content of Non

Dust Combustible materials
More than 25 percent 80 percent
20 percent to 25 percent 75 percent
15 percent to 20 percent 70 percent
10 percent to 15 percent 65 percent
less than 20 percent nil

(2) Where the analysis results for dust samples taken from any length of road do not
meet the stipulations as required in paragraph (1) :

a. the said length of road must be spread with rock dust and

286
 b. additional dust samples must be taken.

Article 509
Precautions as Regards Vehicle
Containing Coal Dust

Vehicles carrying only coal dust or a large amount of coal dust shall be prohibited from
crossing any roadway under which cables or electrical equipment are located, except
where the bed is firmly sealed.

Article 510
Barriers to Prevent
the Spread of Fire

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall prepare and emphasise the installation of
barriers; either water barriers or rock dust barriers along any roadway leading to
workings to prevent the promulgation of methane or coal dust explosions.

(2) The design for the barriers as specified in paragraph (1) shall be validated by the
Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) The design for the barriers as specified in paragraph (1) shall include :

a. the position and type of partition installed ;

b. the location of where the partition is positioned on the mine map;

c. data on the location of partitions must be updated at least every three months,
and

d. inspections and reports of the physical condition of the partitions

(4) Copies of the design as specified in paragraph (2) shall be filed at the mine office.
Where, in the opinion of the Mine Inspector, the installation procedures and
maintenance still require revision, the Mine Inspector may order such work which
must be recorded in the Mine Book.

(5) The requirements for these regulations shall not apply to any roadway which has
a coal dust airborne particle content of less than 10 percent.

287
 Article 511
Pre-shift Inspections

(1) The Operation Supervisor shall inspect all work sites one hour prior to the
commencement of work shifts or prior to any person entering any work site in any
gassy underground mine. The name of the supervisor or person appointed to
carry out the inspections shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(2) The implementation of inspections and testing of any work site as required in
paragraph (1) shall cover :

a. the accumulation of fire damp;

b. any lack of oxygen;

c. the conditions of seals and ventilation doors;

d. the roof, face and rib conditions;

e. the condition of roadways, rails and conveyors used for the transportation of
people;

f. any hazards along roadways heading towards abandoned areas;

g. air volume and speed at air splits;

h. signs of heating on any conveyor that transports coal and

i. any other hazards as required in these regulations or work guidelines.

(3) Where inspections, as required in paragraph (1),indicates any hazardous

conditions, the said area shall be declared as a danger area and the said employee
shall undertake measures such as installing clear and visible signs and shall make
a report to the Underground Mine Manager.

(4) It is prohibited to enter any danger area as long as the danger sign remains
installed except for any person appointed to overcome the said danger.

(5) Upon completion of the inspection as required in paragraph (2) the findings of the
inspections shall be reported to the Underground Mine Manager.

(6) The inspection findings as required in paragraph (3) shall be recorded in a note
book which may at certain times be inspected by the Mine Inspector.

Article 512

288
 Daily Inspections

(1) The Operational Supervisor or any assigned and competent person shall carry out
inspections of hazardous conditions at every work site at least once every work
shift, or more frequently when necessary, and the name of the said person shall be
recorded in the Mine Book.

(2) All hazardous conditions shall be immediately corrected and when the said
conditions pose immediate danger, the Technical Mine Manager or the
Underground Mine Manager shall as quickly as possible evacuate every person,
except any person assigned to correct the said hazard.

(3) Inspections as required paragraph (1) shall include inspections of fire damp and
any lack of oxygen.

(4) No occupied working place shall be left unexamined for more than four hours.

Article 513
Weekly Inspections

(1) Apart from pre work shift inspections and daily inspections as required in Article
511 and Article 512, inspections of hazardous conditions including testing for fire
damp or any other matter stipulated under these regulations must be carried out
no less than once a week by an Operational Supervisor.

(2) Work site as specified in paragraph (1) shall be any work site where people are
always to be found as well as those work site where people are to be found only
from time to time.

(3) Where hazardous conditions are discovered, a report shall be made immediately
to the Underground Mine Manager or the Technical Mine Manager and the said
hazard shall be corrected immediately.

(4) The findings of inspections, testing results and the outcomes of measures taken as
required in paragraph (3) shall be reported in writing and signed by the party
concerned. The said records may be inspected from time to time by the Mine
Inspector.

289
 Article 514
Inspections of Idle
or Abandoned Areas

The Operational Supervisor shall carry out inspections for fire damp, oxygen deficiency,
and any other hazardous conditions at least three hours prior to any person being
permitted to enter any area that has been abandoned or which is temporarily not being
worked.

Article 515
Evacuation in the
Event of Excessive
Fire damp

(1) Apart from the requirements of the ventilation standards for gassy mines,
evacuation procedures as specified in Article 342 shall apply where fire damp is
measured in excess of two percent in the ambient air at any underground work
site.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall inform the Chief Mine Inspector immediately
of any successfully treated affected area, the implementation of any evacuations
and safety measures, and when considered necessary the Chief Mine Inspector
shall consider the report and enact special stipulations for the said mine.

Part Three
Ventilation in Gassy
Mines

Article 516
Application

The requirements of Article 369 through Article 376 as well as the definitions in Article
1 paragraph 65 through paragraph 69 shall apply as additional requirements this Article.

Article 517
Ventilation Standards

(1) The requirements of Article 370 paragraph (2) shall apply to gassy mines except
that the fire damp content limits shall not be permitted to be in excess of one
percent.

290
(2) The fire damp contents at any intake airway to any working face shall not be
greater than 0.5 percent as measured at a distance of 50 metres away from the
working face.

Article 518
General Stipulations

(1) When ventilation does not meet the requirements of Article 369 and Article 370,
the supervisor shall make an immediate report to the Technical Mine Manager
and the ventilation employee shall take the necessary measures to improve the
condition of the ventilation in order that prevailing requirements are met.

(2) Every section being prepared to be mined shall have a ventilation map that
contains the following :

a. the progress of installation of the auxiliary ventilation fan at the road head and
permanent ventilation systems;

b. in any long-wall working the completion of a through ventilation circuit

before full face production starts and

c. the maximum length of road headings to be made prior to construction of

cross cuts for ventilation in room and pillar mining..

(3) Send copies of the ventilation map as required in paragraph (2) to the Chief Mine
Inspector as specified in Article 19 letter d.

(4) In the case of adjacent mines having part of a ventilation system in common, the
common part of the system shall be the responsibility of a single Technical Mine
Manager or a person authorized by him.

(5) It is prohibited to change any general ventilation system without orders from the
Technical Mine Manager, except in an emergency situation; any changes may
only be carried out by the Operational Supervisor and a report of the matter must
be made to the Technical Mine Manager.

(6) Where changes are made to a major part of the ventilation system :

a. a ventilation plan shall be made showing the changes carried out;

b. such changes shall be carried out by competent people;

c. copies of the planned changes of the ventilation shall be forwarded to the

Chief Mine Inspector no later than 30 days prior to the commencement of the
changes.

291
 Article 519
Company Ventilation Regulations

(1) Company regulations shall be made for ventilation and the use of ventilation
equipment that ensure :

a. safe and effective maintenance and operation of all ventilation systems;

b. monitoring of the operation of ventilation fans;

c. treatment of the conditions at any section of the mine where noxious gas, fire
damp accumulates in excess of the levels as specified in these regulations;

d. the amount of minimum air pumped to every work site and

e. procedures for use of the auxiliary ventilation fans must be provided for and
recorded.

(2) A number of competent employees shall be appointed to supervise the

implementation of the ventilation system as well as the ventilation equipment and the
names of the said employees shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

Article 520
Provision of Reserve Fans

(1) At safety lamp mines any fan provided at the surface shall be equipped with an
alternative source of electircity (means of driving it) unless a reserve fan of adequate
capacity is provided. In either case sufficient ventilation must be produced to allow
every person underground to leave the mine safely, when any or all underground fans
may be stopped.

(2) Any reserve fan shall be kept constantly available for use and shall be test-run at least
once a week.

Article 521
Installation of Booster Fans

(1) Booster fans shall only be installed where :

292
 a. research has been carried out by a competent person as specified in Article
372 paragraph (11) that covers all areas that are to be affected by the said
installation.

b. a report of the research findings is made which provides recommendations of

the type, size and location of the booster fan to be installed and

c. copies of the report as required in letter b have been forwarded to the Chief
Mine Inspector along with any expected problems which may occur due to the
installation of the said booster fan.

(2) Every booster fan shall be designed and installed so that :

a. re-circulation which occurs in mine ventilation systems is prevented

automatically

b. air may flow through the parts of the booster fan where the said fan is not
functioning.

(3) When any booster fan is not guarded by a competent person on a continuous
basis, the said fan shall be equipped with equipment that :

a. is capable of detecting and determining fire damp contents in the air flowing
through the sections of the booster fan, and which is capable of providing
warnings in the form of lights or sounds when the fire damp content exceeds
one percent.

b. is capable of indicating the degree of electricity flowing to every electric

motor and which is capable of cutting of the electricity automatically when
the degree of electricity in any electrical motor exceeds ten percent of the
nominal current;

c. is capable of providing warning signals such as lights or sounds when the

following occur :

1) the motor of the fan fails to function and

2) any rise or fall in the ventilation pressure produced by the fan to 10

percent.

d. warning signals as required in paragraph (3) shall be forwarded to a control

room that is always manned and the location of which should best be at the
surface of the mine.

293
(4) When the booster fan is always manned by an employee the said employee shall
monitor and record the ventilation pressure every two hours. When any
abnormalities are discovered while the fan is being operated a report shall be
made immediately to the supervisor.

(5) The construction of the booster fan house shall be fire resistant and the roadway
on which the said fan house is installed shall be fire resistant for a distance of at
least 10 metres at the intake airway to the fan, and 50 metres to the return airway
from the fan.

(6) When a booster fan is installed the ventilation guidelines as specified in Article
519 shall cover the following :

a. the safe operation of the system ;

b. reports of damage or equipment failure, or any significant rises in the contents

of fire damp ;

c. stopping of the fan shall be carried out only for the purposes of inspections
and maintenance at stipulated times ;

d. stopping of the fan shall only be carried out by the appointed employee ;

e. measures that have to be taken when the fan stops unintentionally and

f. reporting methods for employees in charge of other sections at the mine or to

any related mine leader whose work site may be affected by a stopping of the
fan.

Article 522
Auxiliary Ventilation
Systems

(1) Every road head or dead end that is in excess of 5 metres in length shall have
auxiliary ventilation to pump air as close as possible to the working face.

(2) Company regulations for ventilation as required in Article 519 include company
regulations for auxiliary ventilation that cover :

a. the ventilation system used and the minimum quantity of air supplied while
people are at or are not at the work site;

b. the ventilation equipment to be used consisting of :

294
 1) all fans

2) the type of electrical equipment, control equipment and cables;

3) dust collecting equipment;

4) the type of air ducts and the methods used to install them and

5) equipment used to reduce gas concentrations where accumulations occur.

c. the maximum quantity of air that is taken from an air flow through the
auxiliary fan;

d. the continual operation of the auxiliary fan except when stopped for
maintenance or repairs;

e. the maximum overlapping length, the quantity of air supplied by every fan,
and the minimum quantity of air being supplied to any overlapping section
when an overlapping system is being used;

f. arrangement of ventilation measurements and recording of the quantity of air

supplied to headings at intervals of seven days by a competent person;

g. a map that shows in detail any changes to the planned ventilation system or
equipment; during the implementation of the changes the said map shall be
attached to the road head access way.

h. the methods and equipment to be used when it becomes necessary to close off
the heading temporarily and

i. arrangements to dispose of gas or overcome ventilation system failures.

(3) When several auxiliary fans are installed at one branch of the intake airway, prior
calculation shall be made to ensure that all sections in the mine receive air in an
adequate amount.

(4) When any auxiliary fan fails to function or the minimum amount of air as
stipulated in the ventilation guidelines cannot be met, it is prohibited to enter or
be at any road head except where required :

a. to re-start any auxiliary ventilation under the supervision of the operational

supervisor or

b. to save lives in an emergency situation.

295
(5) When any auxiliary fan fails to function or the amount of air flow falls
endangering workers, the Operational Supervisor shall ensure that all electrical
circuits in the heading are capable of being cut of automatically.

(6) The requirements of paragraph (5) shall not apply to monitoring equipment and
the power cables thereof, although the fire damp level exceeds the stipulations.
The said equipment shall be connected to a source of electricity separate from
other sources of electricity.

(7) When the electricity is cut as specified in paragraph (5), the said current shall not
be restarted until the ventilation system is functioning normally and an inspection
of the heading is carried out.

(8) Every auxiliary fan shall be inspected during operation at intervals of no more
than 4 hours, except :

a. equipment is installed at the heading and on the fans to detect ;

I) the quality and quantity of air;

ii) the mechanical and electrical condition of the fan and

iii) any fire that may occur in or in the vicinity of the road head through which
ventilation air is pumped.

b. when electricity is cut off automatically to the fan when the fire damp content
passing through the fan exceeds one percent, or when mechanical or electrical
damage occurs to the fan.

(9) When two fans or more are installed in the same air vent in an auxiliary
ventilation system, or when several such fans are installed at the working face of
a road head :

a. re-inspections shall be carried out by a competent person to determine the

exact position of the fan in the intake airway to prevent re-circulation or air
leaks and

b. re-measuring shall be conducted whenever progress forward is made in the

road head.

(10) Control switches on every auxiliary fan shall be positioned at the intake airway.

(11) Every venturi ventilator used in the mine shall be positioned in accordance with
the ventilation guidelines and be completely grounded. The said venturi
ventilator shall be made from non combustible materials.

296
 Article 523
Working Environment
Monitoring System

(1) In addition to the requirements of Article 370, the requirements for monitoring
fire damp contents in the operation of locomotives or free steered vehicles, the
making of notification to the Chief Mine Inspector, portable fire damp detection
equipment and automatic fire damp detection equipment; every gassy mine shall
follow the additional rulings in order to guarantee that the following requirements
are capable of being implemented.

(2) Monitoring of fire damp in the ambient air shall be carried out all the time at
every work site specified in Article 370 paragraph (10). Every long-wall shall be
considered a working distric referred to in Article 370 paragraph (10) letter c.

(3) The requirements of paragraph (2) shall be carried out using validated detection
equipment or by taking mine air samples for a period of four work days which
shall be analysed in a laboratory approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) If any firedamp content at any location, as specified in Article 370 paragraph (10)
letter (c), is measured to be :

a. in excess of 0.5 percent in an intake to a working place or 0.8 percent in the

return from a working place; measurements and the taking of samples shall be
made weekly and

b. in excess of 1.0 percent at any return airway from any work site; samples shall
be taken daily.

(5) A continuous monitoring system shall be installed for the detection of or

measuring of fire damp or any other gases, for use as records for the regular
taking of samples, at :

a. the location of the transducer shall be specified as a measuring location;

b. the time calculated from when the sample enters the transducer shall be
specified as the time the sample was taken and

c. all recorded testing results of gas samples.

(6) Coal layers having self combusting characteristics shall have a device installed
that is capable of early detection of heat that occurs at the location as determined
by the Technical Mine Manager or the Mine Inspector. When the taking of
samples is specified to be carried out on a regular basis, such sample taking shall
be carried out at intervals of one week.

297
(7) A barometer shall be installed at every mine which must be positioned for ease of
reading by the mine supervisor when entering the mine. The barometer shall be
equipped with air pressure recording equipment that operates continually and a
barometer shall also be installed at the surface of the mine.

(8) The findings of all monitoring as specified in this Article shall be recorded and
reported and stored as required in article 16.

Article 524
Monitoring of the Methane
Gas Content in the Operation
of Locomotives and Free Steered Vehicles

(1) When any locomotive or is operated in a gassy mine, sampling for fire damp
contents shall utilise recognised detection equipment, or by taking air samples as
required in Article 523 paragraph (3).

(2) Measurement of the fire damp contents shall be carried out :

a. at the end of every mine roadway through which locomotives or other

vehicles pass and

b. at other specified locations.

(3) For the purposes of taking samples, the Chief Mine Inspector may stipulate in
writing additional locations.

(4) Measurements of the fire damp contents shall be carried out once a week at every
place as required in paragraph (1) and paragraph (2), when the gas contents
indicates excessive percentages :

a. when measuring indicates a fire damp content in excess of 0.8 percent,

measuring shall be carried out at the said place at intervals of at least 24
hours. For the duration that the gas content remains at an excessive
percentage, such measuring shall be carried out for a period of seven
consecutive days and

b. when every measurement taken for a period of 30 days indicates that the fire
damp contents is not in excess of :

1) 0.2 percent at the place along the intake airway and

2) 0.6 percent at the place along other roadways.

298
 Measuring at the said place shall be adequate when carried out at intervals of
no more than 30 days for the duration that the fire damp contents exceeds the
percentages as stated above.

(5) Notwithstanding anything in the last preceding paragraph, whenever any

alteration is made in the arrangements for ventilating a mine that may affect any
length of road in which determinations of the firedamp content are required by
this Article, a firedamp determination at each point in that length shall be made as
soon as (possible) any substantial effect of the alteration would be apparent.

(6) When measuring for fire damp contents is required to be recorded as specified in
this article, such recording shall be carried out by taking air samples, the said
measuring shall be carried out at the place and time the sample was taken.

(7) Particulars of every determination of fire damp carried out in accordance with this
Article shall be recorded forthwith in the manner described in Article 502.

(8) If any determination of fire damp content made in any length of road (not
including measurements using air sample analysis) shows a fire damp content
exceding one percent by volume, or any indication of flammable gas is seen (on
the lowered flame of a mine safety lamp in the general body of air) the person
making that determination shall forthwith inform the person in charge of that part
of the mine. The employee in charge shall then stop the operation of the
locomotive or the vehicle on the roadway, which may only be re-operated where
the fire damp contents does not exceed one percent and when approval has been
obtained from the Underground Mine Manager .

(9) When measurements of the fire damp contents is carried out by means of analysis
of air samples and the fire damp content exceeds one percent of the volume, the
requirements in paragraph (8) shall apply.

Article 525
Notification to the
Chief Mine Inspector

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 523 and Article 524, the Technical Mine
Manager shall notify the Chief Mine Inspector immediately when :

a. the fire damp contents is in excess of one percent at the return airway and fifty
metres from the roadway work face;

b. the fire damp contents exceeds 0.5 percent at the air intake vent within a
distance of 50 metres from the roadway work face;

299
 c. any locomotive or remote control vehicle is stopped due to the fire damp
content being in excess of one percent of the volume as specified in Article
524 paragraph (8) or paragraph (9) and

d. the effective temperature is more than 30 degrees Celsius.

(2) Notification as required in paragraph (1), the maximum fire damp contents or the
temperature detected and the duration of the said conditions, shall be stated in
detail including the causes thereof. Steps to overcome the ventilation conditions
shall also be explained.

Article 526
Portable Methane
Gas Detection Equipment

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 502 paragraph (3), flame safety lamps or
portable fire damp detection equipment shall be supplied, with an adequate
number of trained people to operate the said equipment.

(2) The ventilation guidelines specified by the company shall cover the number and
location of fire damp detectors. The following shall be provided :

a. the long wall face or any part of the work face of a room and pillar system
shall be fitted with at least one detector for every eight workers during any
work shift ;

b. at least one detector at other work areas including non coal drifts or road
heads ;

c. at least one detector at every return airway when repair work is being carried
out and at a distance of 90 metres from the work face of any place when
electrical equipment is used and

d. at least one detector at any place when electrical equipment is used at a

distance of 90 metres from the work face in any return airway.

(3) Inspections shall be carried out at the commencement of every shift and whenever
re-entering a mine after blasting.

(4) Refresher training as required in Article 502 paragraph (3) letter d shall also cover
any hazards related to flame safety lamps and in particular the re-lighting of flame
safety lamps in an environment of combustible air.

Article 527
Automatic Methane

300
 Gas Detectors

(1) Automatic fire damp detectors shall be provided in an adequate amount in order
that the following stipulations of this Article are fulfilled :

a. work faces.

Automatic detection equipment shall be installed when two consecutive

readings at a distance of 50 metres in the return airway of any work face of
any long wall or part of a room and pillar system, indicates a fire damp
content in excess of 0.5 percent;

1) a the return end of the face or pillar section;

2) in association with any coal cutting machine or road header in coal; and

3) at any goaf stripping operation in pillar workings.

b. automatic fire damp detection equipment shall be installed at the road head of
any intake airway when two consecutive readings are discovered in excess of
0.5 percent and

c. automatic fire damp detection equipment must be installed at any return

airway with a normal fire damp content in excess of 0.5 percent at the exit,

1) every permanent electrical motor in the said roadway and

2) any locomotive or free steered vehicle operating at any section of the said
roadway.

(2) Every automatic fire damp detector as required in paragraph (1) shall be installed
in accordance with the stipulations created by the Technical Mine Manager or the
instructions of the Mine Inspector.

(3) Every automatic fire damp detector installed in any coal mine machinery or any
electrical engine which cannot be monitored, shall be made to cut electrical
current automatically when the fire damp content exceeds one percent.

(4) Automatic fire damp detectors provided in accordance with the requirements of
this Article or provided at the discretion of the Technical Mine Manager shall be
counted as portable detectors to meet the requirements of Article 526.

In such situations no more than two automatic fire damp detectors shall be
permitted at any work face of any long road or at any section of any pillared area.

301
(5) When a need for explosive gas detectors is fulfilled by the use of automatic
detectors, the need for equipment to detect any lack of oxygen shall be given
individual evaluation and such equipment shall be provided by the Technical
Mine Manager.

(6) When the fire damp content at any return airway exceeds 0.5 percent, the Chief
Mine Inspector may instruct that automatic fire damp monitors be supplied for
continuous monitoring. Any measurement data and readings shall be capable of
being monitored at the surface.

Article 528
Leakage Control

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 375, every roadway that connects intake
airways and return airways which is not used for mine work shall be closed by
any means that have been approved of by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Airways into disused sections of workings shall be stopped off in an approved
manner with facilities for sampling the internal atmosphere.

(3) At any air crossing there shall be no access between intake and return airways
except through a properly designed air lock.

(4) Doors provided for necessary access between main intake and return airways
shall be of fireproof construction. All air crossings, stoppings and seals provided
in pursuance of this Article shall be explosion-proof.

Article 529
General Duties

At any mine that has a fire damp drainage system, equipment used shall be compatible
with the fire damp drainage and drainage guidelines and a competent Operational
Supervisor shall be appointed to supervise the implementation of the following
stipulations.

Article 530
Drill Holes and
Drainage Pipes

(1) Prior to the drilling of any drill hole for the purpose of fire damp drainage a pipe
shall be provided to be used for pumping the methane out of the drill hole to a
safe place.

302
(2) Drilling as required in paragraph (1) shall be carried out using equipment that is
capable of closing the drill hole when any sudden flow of fire damp occurs.

(3) Prior to the commencement of drilling as specified in paragraph (1), an employee

shall ensure that water will flow through the drill rods and that the said water will
flow out of the mouth of the drill hole.

(4) Every drill hole shall be equipped with combustible gas volume reading
equipment which is capable of continuous measurement.

(5) Each stand pipe forming part of the fire damp drainage system shall be so inserted
and sealed in the bore hole that leakage of firedamp or air around the pipe is
minimized.

(6) No stand pipe shall be joined to a pipe range by other than a flexible connection.

Article 531
Pipe Networks and Taps

(1) No pipe or pipe network of any fire damp drainage system is permitted to be
installed at any shaft or any exit that is an intake airway to the mine.

(2) Every network of pipes installed for the drainage of fire damp shall :

a. be designed so that fire damp samples may be taken and may be drained from
the pipes;

b. be installed for sturdiness ;

c. yellow painted signs shall be installed close to any joints.

(3) Every joint in a gas network shall be sealed in order that no air is sucked into the
fire damp pumping pipeline.

(4) Every tap in a fire damp drainage system pipe network shall be painted yellow.

Article 532
Fire Damp Exhausters

(1) Any exhauster installed at any fire damp drainage system shall :

a. be of a function and type that is recognised;

b. be capable of preventing re-circulation of fire damp when the exhauster is not

working and

303
 c. be arranged in such a way that when the exhauster is not working fire damp
can flow freely.

(2) All fire damp exhauster machines shall be grounded.

Article 533
Enclosed Buildings for the
Fire damp Exhauster
and the Calorimeter

(1) Exhausters shall be placed in an enclosed building at the surface.

(2) Electrical equipment installed in any explosive gas exhauster building or

calorimeter room shall be of a type that is flame proof and that is recognised.

(3) Any lights used in the exhauster building or calorimeter room must be explosion
proof.

(4) The calorimeter or any monitoring device used in a fire damp drainage system
shall be positioned in an enclosed container and ventilated separately from the
calorimeter room.

(5) It is prohibited to open any container as specified in paragraph (4) in the

calorimeter room except where safety has been ensured in the calorimeter room.

Article 534
Fire damp Disposal

(1) The location for the disposal of fire damp shall be made secure to prevent the
possibility of the fire damp igniting unintentionally.

(2) The extreme end of the fire damp discharge shall be fitted with flame traps for the
purpose of preventing the spread of fire into the drainage system.

(3) It is prohibited to dispose of fire damp from any drainage system into any
utilization plant when the fire damp content is less than 40 percent.

(4) It is prohibited to dispose of fire damp at any location close to any intake airway
to a mine.

(5) It is prohibited to dispose of fire damp from any drainage system in an

underground mine.

304
 Article 535
Supervision of
the Exhauster

Supervision of fire damp drainage including the exhauster and the air pressure control
room shall be carried out by a competent person.

Article 536
Venturi Exhausters

Venturi exhausters used in any fire damp drainage system shall be made of any metal
other than aluminium or magnesium.

Part Four
Installation of Supports at Work Sites

Article 537
Application

Apart from the requirements of Article 346 through Article 365, the following
stipulations shall apply to all underground coal mines.

Article 538
Systematic Supports

(1) Systematic support shall be provided and maintained for the roof and sides of :

a. any work face;

b. every road head

c. every intersection of two or more roads where through one of which vehicles
or conveyors travel and

d. every length of road where people work, except occasionally or for short
periods.

(2) The Mine Inspector may order in writing the Technical Mine Manager to make
stipulations for systematic Support at any place or length of road in any mine
other than the stipulations as required in paragraph (1) and

(3) The Chief Mine Inspector may enact the requirement for systematic supports in
mines other than underground coal mines.

305
(4) Nothing stated in this Article shall prevent a person from installing in addition to
the specified system any support he considers necessary for safety.

(5) Mine workers shall install additional supports within the boundaries of their
working area in accordance with instructions from the Operational Supervisor.

Article 539
Company Regulations
on Supports

(1) Every person assigned to install or remove supports or assigned to supervise such
work shall be in possession of a copy of the company regulations on supports
apart from the requirements of Article 361.

(2) When any mine worker experiences language difficulties or is illiterate, the
supervisor concerned shall provide oral orders and instructions.

(3) A copy of all valid company regulations on supports shall be filed at the mining
office or any other place approved or stipulated by the Mine Inspector.

(4) The Mine Inspector may make written amendments to any company regulation on
supports in the Mine Book.

Article 540
Support Guidelines
for Special Conditions

(1) Company support rules for any roadway that is driven as part of the bord and
pillar system or for the purpose of developing any longwall/shortwall panel shall
specify the sequence in which supports are to be erected, or set and advanced, and
the maximum distance between :

a. the last row of support and the face which shall not exceed 1.0 meter;

b. each row of props , roof bolts or other supports which shall not exceed 1.25
metres;

306
 c. adjacent props, bars, roof bolts or other supports used in the same row, which
shall not exceed 1.25 meters;

d. arches or girder sets of no more than 1.25 meters and

e. sprags or chocks of no more than 1.5 metres.

(2) Company regulations for supports in any long wall mining system or any short
wall mining system shall include the support of the roof along the entire length
and width of the face working and must determine the means and method of
removing supports.
The maximum distance between supports shall be :

a. the distance between any row of props shall not exceed one meter;

b. the distance between any series of adjacent props in the same row shall not
exceed 1.25 metres and

c. the distance between any row of front props shall be a close as possible to the
work face.

(3) Every bar set shall be supported by at least 2 props.

a. if coupled bars (link bars) approved by the Chief Mine Inspector are used :

1) any such bar may be supported by one support only (provided it is

connected to another such bar similarly supported);

2) any such bar in the front row may be supported in cantilever.

b. when the company regulations for supports allow for the use of slide bars the
said bars shall be supported using no less than 2 props and

c. the end of the bar in any front row shall be as close as possible to the work
face.

(4) Supports at machine cut faces:

.
At any place where a machine is used which shears coal to a depth exceeding 0.4
metres at a single cut, the props shall be installed as soon as possible after an
opening is made. Installation of the supports shall follow the requirements of
paragraph (2).

(5) Company regulations for supports for powered roof supports.

307
 a. every powered roof support used in any mine shall be of a type approved by
the Chief Mine Inspector;

b. company regulations for powered roof supports shall detail the maximum
distance between powered roof supports. The said distance shall be in
accordance with the manufacturers specifications;

c. at any place where a coal shearing machine is used to a with of more than 0.4
metres per cut, powered roof supports shall be moved forward as soon as an
opening is made and

d. it is prohibited for any person to be between any A.F.C (flexible chain

conveyor) and a work face when any coal shearing machine is operating or
when powered roof supports are being moved forward.

(6) Company support rules when carrying out roof ripping at roadways shall provide
for :

a. the setting of support as near as practicable to the ripping lip, so as to provide

effective support (for the roof adjacent to the ripping lip);

b. the roof newly exposed by the ripping to be forthwith effectively supported

(tight to the roof);

c. ripping is carried out for enlarging underground openings; at the cessation of

ripping the face of ripping to be effectively supported; and

d. the maximum length of the roof that may be exposed by ripping before
supports are to be set.

(7) Company regulations for supports shall cover the maximum allowable distance
between any work face and the last row of supports.

(8) Temporary Supports.

a. when any person is working between an A.F.C and a work face and the
distance between the work face and the front row of supports is more than 1
metre the said place shall be installed with temporary props. With the
stipulation that recognised powered roof supports are used the bar shall be
installed no less than one bar at intervals of every one meter;

b. at any excavation site that is not a long wall face or a roof ripping face the
support rules shall cover support stipulations in accordance with the said
excavation work. When an appropriate system of supports makes use of props
and bars, the stipulations in the Support Guidelines shall cover the installation
of temporary props with distance of no more than 1.0 metres in front of the

308
 last support installed and the distance between the props shall not be more
than 1.25 metres.

1) for coal excavation at any work face, the distance between any row of
temporary props shall not exceed one meter from the front props and the
distance between every series of adjacent props shall not exceed the
distance between each row of front props installed.

2) where coal is being excavated at a buttock of temporary props shall be

installed at intervals of no more than 1.0 metre measured parallel to the
face of the last props in a row of props already installed, or from the last
temporary prop in accordance with the conditions.

c. at any coal excavation site that is not a long wall face or a ceiling cut the
support guidelines shall include support stipulations suited to the said
excavation. Where the system of supports is appropriate as required above
and makes use of props or bars, the said stipulations shall cover the
installation of temporary props at a distance of no more than 1.0 metre in front
of the last supports already installed and the distance between the props shall
not exceed 1.25 meters.

(9) Arch girders or girder sets at road heads.

Where the system of support of the roof and sides in any heading makes use of
arch girders or girder sets, the support guidelines shall include the stipulation that
the maximum distance between supports shall not exceed 1.25 metres.

(10) Roof Bolts (Strata Bolts)

a. it is prohibited to use any roof bolts as the only support at any work face in a
long wall except for the purpose of removing powered roof supports and

b. when roof bolts are used as supports, the support guidelines shall include the
pattern, the intervals of distance and the torque values used. The use of roof
bolts shall be in accordance with the stipulations as intended in Article 353.

(11) Control of the Roof Rock by Packing

When packing is used to control a large portion of the movement of the roof rock
layer, the support guidelines shall cover :

a. the maximum distance between any work face and the front wall of the packs
opposite the work face;

b. the minimum width of the packs and

309
 c. maximum distances between packs.

Article 541
Duties in Company Regulations
for Supports

(1) The Operational Supervisor or any capable person appointed to take charge of any
work whenever supports are installed, moved forward, or removed, or who is in
charge of any person who has been assigned to install, move forward, or remove
supports, shall ensure that the company regulations for supports are carried out.
The said person shall also ensure that whenever any additional support must be
used, the said additional supports shall be installed immediately although the said
matter may not be covered in the company regulations for supports.

(2) Apart from the requirements of Article 32 paragraph (3) and Article 350, every
person at the mine whose duties are related to excavation and supports at any
place including ripping or repair of any road shall ensure that the requirements as
provided for in the company regulations for supports at the said places are met
and that any additional supports required are installed.

(3) Any travel way or any place in the mine that is not safe as required in the
company regulations for supports shall only be entered by a person who has been
granted the authority to carry out inspection or repair work.

Article 542
Stipulation for Road
Ceilings under
Specific Conditions

At any mine where the incline of the rock layer is 40 degrees or more, a section of the
coal layer in the roof shall be left intact. This requirement shall be included in the
company regulations for supports.

Article 543
General Stipulations for
the Installation of Supports

(1) Props.

a. every person installing props to support any roof or sides shall do so in order
that the support is sturdy and that is has strong foundations;

310
 b. when any person whose duties include installing props sees any broken
damaged or unstable props the said employee shall make the said support
stable or replace it and

c. when any such employee is unable to carry out the stipulations as required in
paragraph (1) letter a and letter b the said employee shall make an immediate
report to the supervisor in charge of the installation of supports.

(2) Wooden Lids

a. any person who installs props must insert wedges of an appropriate thickness
in between the top of the props and the bar or the roof in order to completely
close the top of the props and where a bar is not installed above a prop, the
said wedge shall be as wide as the top of the props and the length shall be no
less than two times size of the top of the props and

b. Wedges shall not be required to be inserted between the top of a props and a
bar where :

1) it is inserted underneath a wooden bar;

2) the prop installed is fitted with a friction cap the function of which is to
support the bar to ensure that it stays above the props;

3) the prop is set to induce a roof break; and

4) a rigid steel prop fixed to a girder in a place that is not a working face or
roadhead.

(3) Installation of Powered Roof Supports.

a. any employee installing powered roof supports shall ensure that every support
has been securely installed. Where any powered roof support is found to be
damaged a report shall made immediately to the supervisor in charge of the
installation of supports and

b. the supervisor in charge of the installation of supports shall ensure that every
damaged powered roof support is repaired or replaced and the ceiling in the
said place is properly supported.

(4) The installation of rock bolts shall be carried out in accordance with the
stipulations as required in Article 353.

(5) Chocks.

311
 a. chocks shall be installed on strong foundations and must be tight to the roof
and sides an

b. chocks shall be made of timber with flat surfaces.

(6) When any packing is incorporated into system of supports in a mine the said
packing shall be made and installed so that is tight to the roof and when the
packing is made manually it shall be made on strong foundations and be filled
with debris.

(7) Arch girders and Girder Sets

.
Every arch girder or girder set installed to support the roof and sides shall be
installed on sturdy foundations and shall provide strong support for the roof and
between supports a bar shall be tied securely to each of the supports.

Article 544
Installation of Replacement
Supports

(1) Support employees shall ensure that any damaged support or any support that is
not functioning is hastily replaced with a new support and unstable supports shall
be made stable.

(2) Any worker who finds any damaged support shall where possible carry out
repairs of the said support or any such find shall be reported immediately to the
operational supervisor.

(3) When any roof has collapsed or any wall has shifted, is broken or causes supports
to not function at any part in the mine where people travel or people work, any
person on duty at the time shall ensure that :

a. any open roof or side or any roof or side close to any open area shall be
supported immediately;

b. safety measures shall be taken prior to any debris being cleared away and

c. when any employee, as required in letter a and letter b, is not capable of the
measures as specified in this paragraph, the said employee shall ensure that no
person crosses into or works in the said area except on the instructions of the
underground operational supervisor.

Article 545
Removing Supports

312
It is prohibited to remove any support at any section in any mine except where such work
is being carried out from a safe position.

Article 546
Delaying Installation
or Moving Supports

(1) Delaying installation or moving supports shall only be carried out under the
following circumstances :

a. in order that operations are not disrupted regarding advancing, turning of, or
making room for coal shearers, loaders or conveyors and

b. when the operation of any shearing machine is disrupted due to the presence
of any bar at the ceiling the said bar may be moved.

(2) Delaying installation or moving support shall be made for as short a period as
practicable.

(3) Where circumstances are different than the requirements of paragraph (1) letter a,
the said stipulations shall cover sustained supports using single bars the length of
which must be greater than the distance between two props or where the distance
is less than 2.0 metres coupled bar may be used.

(4) Every single bar shall be supported no less than one prop at each end and every
coupled bar shall be supported by no less than one prop.

Article 547
Installing and Releasing
Powered Roof Supports

(1) A installation diagram shall be made for every mine that uses powered roof
supports as well as a diagram that shows the method of removal and
transportation of such supports.

(2) The powered roof supports installation diagram shall include :

a. the method of transportation from the surface to the work face and with
particular emphasis on handling and transportation safety;

b. stipulations of appropriate transportation vehicles in any special form where

necessary;

c. stipulations regarding appropriate winches fitted with load limitation

facilities;

313
 d. stipulations for transport equipment designed for adequate size and strength;

e. support methods at work faces during installation of powered roof supports.

(3) The diagram showing the release and transportation of powered roof supports
shall include :

a. support methods at work faces during the removal of supports;

b. transportation methods of powered roof supports from work faces to the new
work faces and

c. the same stipulations as specified in paragraph (2) letter b through letter d.

Part Five
Training and Supervision
of Manpower in
Underground Coal Mines

Article 549
General Application

(1) The requirements of Article 28 through Article 30, and Article 474 through
Article 490 shall apply to all underground coal mines.

Article 550
Manpower Training

(1) Mine workers permitted to work at underground coal excavation work shall be :

a. any worker who has been trained, who has been declared capable and who is
certified and

b. any worker who is undergoing training.

(2) Training given to mine workers shall be in accordance with the curriculum
approved by the Chief Mine Inspector and shall cover :

314
 a. basic training for coal excavation work of no less than 90 days which shall be
under the strict supervision of an instructor or mine supervisor or

b. further training for coal excavation work of no less than 30 days after
undergoing basic training and which shall be under the strict supervision of an
instructor or mine supervisor;

(3) The Chief Mine Inspector shall ensure that :

a. a supervisor supervises only one basic trainee and an instructor shall only
train a person in only one field of work and

b. at any place used completely for the purposes of training at any specific time
other work shall be stopped.

Article 551
Coal Shearing Machine
Operators

Any mine worker who is capable of operating a mechanically, hydraulically or

electrically driven coal shearing machine not including portable such machines in
underground coal mines shall meet the following requirements :

a. shall have been given training as required in Article 550 paragraph (1);

b. shall have had experience in coal excavation work of no less than six months;

c. shall have been given training in the operation of coal shearing machines of the
same type and

d. shall have been declared capable of operating a coal shearing machine.

Chapter X
Penalties

Article 552

Any violation of this Ministerial Decree shall be subject to a sentence as intended in

Article 33 of Law Number 11, 1967 on Mining Basic Stipulations.

315
316
 Chapter XI
Transfer Stipulations

Article 553

Mining companies shall put into application the stipulations regarding the qualifications
of the Technical Mine Manager as intended in this Ministerial Decree no later than a
period of two years after this Ministerial Decree is enacted.

Chapter XII
Closing Stipulations

Article 554

(1) By the enactment of this Ministerial Decree, all regulations that provide for
general mining occupational work health and safety to the extent that they are
provided for in this Ministerial Decree shall be deemed no longer valid.

(2) Further stipulations required for the implementation of this Ministerial Decree
shall be provided for by the Director General.

Article 555

This Ministerial Decree shall come into effect on the stipulated date.

Stipulated in Jakarta
May 22, 1995

The Minister of Mines and Energy

signature

I.B. Sudjana

317